C^s 2H53 
 
 George Washington Flowers 
 Memorial Collection _ 
 
 DUKE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 
 ESTABLISHED BY THE 
 
 FAMILY OF 
 
 COLONEL FLOWERS 
 
* ? 
 
 / / 
 
THE 
 
 SOLDIER'S COMPANION: 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 AN ABRIDGEMENT OF HARDEE'S INFAN- 
 TRY TACTICS ; 
 
 WITH THE 
 
 HEAVY IXFANTRY AXD RIFLE MANUALS, 
 
 SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAYONET EXERCISE, FIELD 
 FORTIFICATION, 
 
 PICKET AND OUTPOSTDUTY, 
 
 WITH VARIOCS REGULATIONS, FORMS, 40., THAT WILL BS 
 
 FOUND USEFUL TO THE SOLDIER IN CAMP 
 
 AND ON THE MARCH ; 
 
 WITH AN APPENDIX CONTAINIXG . 
 FANCY MOVEiMENTS FOR VOLUNTEER COMPANIES, 
 UNIFORM AND 1)RES3 OF THE ARMY, &0. 
 
 By Capt. GEO. C. LEWIS, 
 
 PROVIS10NA.L ARMY OF THE CONFEDERATE STATES. 
 
 RALEIGH, N. C. : 
 JOHN SPEfiMAN, PRINTICR, OFFICE STATE JOURNAL. 
 
 1803. 
 
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1862. 
 
 By Capt. GEO. C. LEWIS, 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the Confed- 
 erate States, for the District of Pamlico, 
 !^fo^th Carolina. 
 

 TO THE 
 
 OFFICERS AND SOLDIERS 
 
 OF THB 
 
 NORTH CxVKOLTNA TROOPS, 
 
 THIS LITTLE VOLUME 13 AFFECTION'ATELT AXl) IIESFKOTFCLLT 
 INSCRIBED. 
 
 340901 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The following paj^es of this Uttle votunie hare been pre- 
 pared and compiled by the undersigned, with the view of 
 supplying what he believes to be an important want of the 
 Officers and Soldiers, constituting^ the army of the Con- 
 federate States. It embracoB an abridgment of Harder's 
 Infantry TAorics, with the Heavy Infantry and Riflo 
 Manuals, adapted to the use of either the Percussion Mus- 
 ket or the Enfield Rifle; also the Skirmish Drill and Bayo- 
 onet Exercise, and a Sysopsis of Field Fortification, 
 Picket and Outpost Ddtt, and the Regulations as to 
 Parade?, Reviews, Inspections, Guard-moKntings, Ac. 
 
 It contains nvany suggestions that the practical soldier 
 needs in camp and on the march, with various forms that 
 are essentially necessary in a work ot this kind, such as 
 guard-repoftSjIofhcers and soldiers, pay accotints, fur-r 
 loughs, leaves of absence, &c. 
 
 It has been the object of the compiler, in the prepara- 
 tion of this work, to embrace as much as possible in the 
 emalieit limit, as he knows from experience how inconve- 
 nient it is, in an active campaign, for an officer or soldier 
 to be lugging around several works, when all that he need* 
 might easily be combined in on«. 
 
TVyETXCZ. 
 
 Under the head of Firxn Fortification, the author hi's 
 introduced only so much as will enable the inexperienced 
 foldier, in case of necessity, to throw up temporary breast- 
 works for the protection of his men, or to enable them the 
 better to hold some important point to which they may 
 have been assigned. In a war like the one at present 
 waged between the Confederate and United States, where 
 there is such an extented frontier, it is very essential that 
 every soldier, and especially every officer, should knoiv 
 something of field fortification. 
 
 During the winter campaign of 1861 and 1862, on the 
 Potomac, and more recently when the City of Richmond 
 was beseiged b}' the enemy, the compiler paw many in- 
 stances where young and inexperienced officers, were by 
 force of circumstances, placed in positions that rendered it 
 exceedingly necessary that they should.have a knowledge 
 of entrenching and erecting temporary breastworks. 
 
 In the appendix will be found the regulations as pre- 
 scribed by the War Department for the dress and uniform 
 of the army ; also^ some movements that are intended prin- 
 cipally for volunteer companies in times of peace on their 
 public parades. They were translated from a French work 
 written by M. DuPre' and were used by the compiler 
 previous to the war. 
 
 The undersigned presents tl is little volume to his fellow 
 soldiers, with the knowledge that it contains many defics- 
 encies, but assures them that none but official works and 
 those most in repute have been coniulted in the selection 
 of its contents. 
 
 It was prepared during the long weary hours when the 
 author wsiB confined to bis room from disease contracted 
 
in cttmp, and was written partially to relieve t\ie monotony 
 of the sick-room, and with the hope that though prevent- 
 cd at that time fr<tm being in active service, he still might 
 do something to aid t-lie glorious cause for which our 
 brave people are so gallantly stmggling^ and should this 
 work be tlie means of imparting to a brother soldier one 
 item of information that he otherwise would not have 
 known, the author will feel amply rewarded for his trouble. 
 
 GEO. C. LEWIS. 
 Balej<5m, X, C, January, 18^- 
 
INTRODUCTION, 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR CONDUCTING DRILLS, 
 
 A good method of instruction in military discipline, 
 should exclude everything that is unnatural or not appli- 
 cable to actual military eervice in action* If anything be 
 admitted at any time in the parades of show, mounting 
 guard, or the like, it should be taught separately, and 
 after the principles of a rational discipline are well estab- 
 lished. 
 
 It is too much the practice to commit the charge of the 
 elementary drills to non-commissioned officers, by which 
 many great evils are produced. No officer can expect to 
 command a company, much less a regiment, ( to which evei y 
 officer should through merit aspire,) unless he has had 
 practical experience; and in no circumstances can an 
 officer so soon acquire the habit of command, or learn the 
 mode of instruction and the effect of discipline, as by per- 
 sonall}' conducting the drill of his men. By devolvino' 
 these first duties on non-commissioned officers, the com- 
 missioned officers remain ignorant and timid ; and the 
 chance of finding non-commissioned officers who can 
 clearly comprehend and eacplain the principles of a gool 
 
X TXJKODlCTIfyy. 
 
 discipline, u not one in. twenty ; from which cause it is 
 twenty to one t^at the reeraits are imperfectl}' or errone- 
 ously taught. 
 
 He, therefore, who has the charge of a drill, or who 
 teaches others, should not be himself ignorant j nor should 
 he be offended at the ignorance of those who never had an 
 opportunity to learn — he should be patient, but firmj 
 generous, but without relaxing from the strictness of duty ; 
 he should command his own temper, in order to secure re- 
 ipect ; and he shouid never be tired of rendering what be 
 teaches intelligible,, Every word should be explained, 
 and a single explanation to those whom he is to teach, will 
 not be sufficient — every man in the drill should understand 
 every word that is used, and the use ot every motion and 
 movement he makes j and personal actions should be used 
 as examples wherever practicable ; so that whenever a 
 word is used, or a movement commanded, not only the 
 word shall be familiar to the ear by repeated use and illus- 
 tration, but the movement itself, by frequent practice, 
 familiar to the eye. 
 
 AUdrills should, therefore, be superintended or conducted 
 by a commissioned otlicerywho should always keep in mind, 
 that discipline is as necessary for him who teaches, as for 
 those that are taught. He should, therefore, be careful 
 that he acts personally according to the manner he teaches, 
 and that his own motions conform to the principles ho 
 gives ; he should keep in mind that the soldier very soon 
 discovers the capacity of the officer; and that unless the 
 officer possesses skill himself, he cannot expect the soldiers 
 to confide in him, nor to respect him ; they may be made 
 to fear his power, but the fonfiidence which is most pre- 
 
fNTROniTOTIOX. if 
 
 cious to a good ofllcer, is that which arises out of the 
 voluntary esteem and respect, produced by the gene- 
 rosity of his conduct and the skill which he manifests 
 in the discharge of his duty ; when he treats those 
 OTcr whom he is placed, as men. w^hose hapiness and 
 credit he studies, rather than as slaves over whom he has 
 the right to tyranise. The celebrate 1 General Lloyd, 
 speaking of the German discipline, reprobates its Bavage 
 character by observing: *' that blows may make a man 
 a coward, but never made a hero." 
 
 The instructor of a drill should be of a cheerful, but firm 
 disposition; he must have discernment and good sense to 
 know that as the habits of persons newly entering upon 
 military exercises have been formed differently, that they 
 cannot be expected to change their habits suddenly, or 
 embrace habitsat once different from those they hare been 
 accustomed to. 
 
 It should be explained that the first lessons of the posi- 
 tion — the /aciii ga-^-ihe step and toheelivg, are only like the 
 first lessons ia leading and writing ; that it is requisite to 
 practice them often, aud ta perform them with the greatest 
 exactness in the first beginnings, in order to c.Try the samo 
 correctness and exactness into more enlarged practice. 
 
 That the duties of a company are the same as^e duties 
 of a regiment and of a whole array—that the whole of 
 the military art consists In marching, facing and reheeling, 
 according to the rules which experience has proved to be 
 the most effective ; and that without perfec. ion in these 
 particulars, arms would be of ]jtt!c or Jio usn, opposed ro 
 troops who fire v,'oll disciplined, 
 
IJiTRODUeTIOK. 
 
 These instructions should be introduced in familiar and 
 persuasive language, as advice, rather than command ; 
 always ivith good temper and kindness — ahuae never 1 1 
 
 The advantages and security of a good discipHne should 
 be constantly brought into view ; and the necessity of 
 inarching correctly ever equal spaces in equal times, should 
 be hinted at as being the means by which the whole power 
 and strength of a line or column is brought to bear at the 
 same instant. 
 
 No opportunity should be lost, that is practicable, to 
 present to the eye of the soldier the manner of any opera- 
 tion which he is to perform. A well disciplined man pre- 
 sented in front, whose actions may accord with the com- 
 mand, and who may be seen by the whole of the drill, will 
 have an excellent eflect in producing a ready understand- 
 ing, It is much easier to imitate what is seen, than to 
 execute what is barely described. The variety of habits, 
 and the different signification of the same word in the un- 
 derstanding of different persons, render verbal descriptions 
 generally imperfect. There can pbe no mistake by the eye, 
 and every word should be explained which may not be 
 otherwise understood. 
 
 The€fcmpiler of this work, would particularly and earn- 
 estly suggest that officers be careful in their treatment of 
 those under their command. In some armies, the mind 
 and feelings of the man are never studied; his passions 
 are never called forth, except to excite terror and hatred 
 of his officers ; and. there have been men who have held, 
 that the army should be more a£raid of their own General 
 than of the enemy I But we mu«t reprobate such ignor- 
 ance of human nature, " He who attempts to govern by 
 
IVTRODUCTIOK. rfn 
 
 ihe lash," laid Timoub ''knows not how to govern."— 
 There is no incompatibility in exciting the generous affec- 
 tions of the soldier, with the principles of discipline. 
 Cruelty may make cowards and deserters, but in never 
 made a good, faithful, honorable soldier. 
 
 Officers have only to convince soldiers that they under- 
 stand their own duties, and the soldiers will respect them ; 
 officers have only to demonstrate that they are soldiers* 
 friends, and they may lead them to the cannon's mouth, or 
 in the face of the death dealing bullet, with an enthusiasm 
 that never fails to triumph when regulated by discipline. 
 The triumphs of the French armies, in which no man is 
 ever beaten with a cane, and in which whipping never was 
 known, clearly evince the futile barbarity of military 
 punishments, by the lash, or by any species of degiading 
 torture. The humblest bred man that fills the ranks of an 
 army, is as susceptible of the sentiment of glory, and 
 honor, and shame, as the proudest captain that ever car- 
 ried a plume. 
 
 The principle of discipline most prevalent is terror, 
 cruelty and degradation— the soldier is treated as an out- 
 cast of the earth, and however different he may be when 
 he enters the ranks, the manni r of his treatment too often 
 transforms him into the miserable slave which he is pre- 
 supposed to be. 
 
 This treatment is inconsistent with reason and humanity. 
 Officers should remember that the great majority of the 
 privates who constitute the Confederate army, and who 
 are so gallantly exposing themselves to the rigors and 
 hardships of a soldier's life— in the defence of our countrj-, 
 aio not of the material that compose other armies and 
 
xir iNTROnccnON. 
 
 that in thousands of cases, they are the cherished jtod loved 
 idol of some household circle. 
 
 Besides, it is not neccsaary to discipline or subordination. 
 A generous, aflectionate, and cherishing courtesy, will 
 overcome the most hardened villian, and where it fails, 
 cruelty or barbarity vrill never succeed. 
 
 The line between familiarity and kind conduct, is easily 
 drawn by men of sense, conscious of themselves. None 
 but incompetent men will treat a soldier in the ranks with 
 contempt or cruelt3% O-n the parade, good temper and 
 good manners should never be absent. Haughtiness is in- 
 compatible with true dignity ; openness, generosity and 
 firmness, constitute the true deportment which inspires 
 respect without exciting fear; which commands with de- 
 cision, and is obeyed implicitly, and which is inflexible 
 only in the discharge of duty. 
 
 In the manner of command, much depends upon the 
 clearness and distinctness of the utterance of him who 
 teaches. At drill, he must not be spai'ing of explanation, 
 but on parade he gives no instruction ; he commands 
 only, and sees that what he orders, be executed promptly 
 and properly. 
 
 It is observed by the British General Dundas, with a 
 degree of truth that cannot be too strongly impressed upon 
 the mind of every man who holds a military commission — 
 " That the complete instruction of an officer enlarges with 
 his situation and at last takes in the whole circle of mili- 
 tary science. But an oflicer who cannot thoroughly 'dis- 
 cipline and exercise the body entrusted to his command, 
 large or small, is not fit, in time of service, to lead it 
 against an enemy; he cannot be cool and collected in time 
 
nvTiioouci'iox. ^^ 
 
 of danger; he cannot profit by circamstanccs, from his 
 inability to comprehend ivhatis doing by the enemy, or 
 what is necessary to be done against them, to direct it 
 properly. The fate cf many depend on his well or ill ac- 
 quitting himself of his duty ; for it is not suflicient to ad- 
 vance with bravery ; it is requsite to possess that degree 
 of intelligence, which should distinguish every officer, ac- 
 cording to his station. Soldiers will not act with spirit or 
 animation, when they have no reliance on he capacity of 
 thoffc who conduct i.hem/' 
 
 The intention of all discipline is to auppy a kind of arti- 
 ficial instinct, and to make this uniform throughout the 
 whole mass of an army, so that whenever an operation is 
 required to be performed by an army, no wore is requisite 
 than to assign stations to the several divisions^ and appoint 
 the time whe'n the movements commence, or when the 
 concert of operations should meet and produce the effect 
 required. 
 
 To discipline men well, there must be a familiar, compre- 
 hensible, and rational method. 
 
 The more simple it is, the more easily it is understood^ 
 the better will it be executed. 
 
 To this end, the language must be that of the science' 
 and it must be taught and explained with clearness. 
 
 There must be nothing unnecessary or unnatural in the 
 svstem. Every operation and movement should be exe- 
 cuted exactly as required, in the shortest period of time, 
 and occupying the least possible space in which it can be 
 accomplished. 
 
 As all discipline is intended for action^ and not for parade^ 
 discipline should be directed to inculcate that which is 
 
adapted to action only, as fundamental, and to make all 
 that appertains to parade, secondary — action must never be 
 'ost sight of in teaching discipline. 
 
 It may be proper to remark here, for the information of 
 those who are not alread}' conversant in the subject, that 
 many of the words of instruction, direction, and precau- 
 tion, employed in the drill, cease to be employed when 
 the battalion is completed in its discipline. Numerous 
 words and commands are used in the elementary instruc- 
 tion, which are no longer required to be employed, though 
 their application and practical use are never to be omitted. 
 These directions cannot be made too familiar. . 
 
 Officers should remember that there are three kinds of 
 commands, viz : 
 
 The command of caution, which is attention. 
 
 The 2)reparatory command, which indicates the move- 
 ment which is to be executed. 
 
 The command of execution, such as march or halt, or in 
 the manual of arms, the part of command which causes an 
 execution. 
 
 The tone of command should be animated, distinct, and 
 of a loudness proportioned to the number of men under 
 instruction. 
 
 The command attention, is pronounced at the top of the 
 voice, dwelling on the last syllable. 
 
 The command of execution will be pronounced in a tone 
 firm and brief. 
 
THE SOLDIER'S COMPANION. 
 
 PART FIRST 
 
 Position of the Soldier and Squad Drill. 
 
 The correct position of the soldier, and the drill of the 
 squad, being the ground work of proficiency in all mili- 
 tary exercises, it is exceedingly necessary that the men 
 should fix and keep their attention upon the instructor— 
 who should be as clear and concise as possible in his in- 
 structions and explanations, and should endeavor to habitu- 
 ate kiraself and men, by precept and example, to that com- 
 posure and presence of mind which is so essentially re 
 quisite in drilling and instructing recruits. 
 
 Great care should bo taken in learning them the correct 
 position at first, as considerable difficulty is sometimes 
 experienced in their further progress when they have been 
 incorrectly taught in the beginning, 
 
 In most cases it is impracticable to instruct recruits in 
 squads of less than four or eight men at a time. 
 
 Position of the Soldier. 
 
 1. Heels on the same line and as close together as the 
 conformation of the man will permit, the feet turned out 
 equally and forming with each other something lese than 
 
2 I'OSITIOX OF TUB SOLIJ.KK. 
 
 a right angle ; knees straight without stiffness ; body erect 
 on the hips, inclining a little forward ; shoulders square 
 and falling equally ; arms hanging naturally ; elbows near 
 the body ; palms of the hands turned a little to the front, 
 the little fingers behind the seam of the pantaloons ; head 
 erect and square to the front, without constraint; china 
 little drawn in and near the stock without covering it; 
 eyes fixed straight to the front and striking the ground 
 at about fifteen paqes. 
 
 2. The instructor having given the recruit the position 
 of the soldier without arms, will now teach him the turn- 
 ing of the head and eyes ; he will command : 
 
 1. Eyes — Right. 2. Front. 
 
 3. At the word righ*, the recruit will turn the head 
 gently to the right, so as to bring the inner corner of the 
 left eye in a line with the centre of the body, the eye fixed 
 on the line of the eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in 
 the same rank. At the word front, resume the direct 
 position. 
 
 4. The movement of eyes — Left will be executed by in- 
 Terse means. 
 
 5. The instructor will take care that the movement of 
 the head does not derange the squareness of the shoulders. 
 
 Rest. 
 
 6. At the command rest, stand at ease. 
 
 7. When the instructor wishes to cause a resumption of 
 the habitual position, he will command : 
 
POSITION OP THE SOLDIER. J 
 
 • • 1. Attention. 2. Sqdad. 
 
 8. At the first word, the recruit will fix his attention : 
 at the second, he will resume the prescribed position and 
 steadiness. 
 
 -^ 
 Facings. 
 
 1. Squad. 2. lii(jht (or left)— Face. 
 
 9. At the second command, raise the right foot slightly, 
 turn to the right (or left,) on the left heel, raising th'^ toe 
 a little, and then replace the right heel, by the side of the 
 left, and on the same line. 
 
 10. At the command front, turn on the left heel so as to 
 regain the first position, and replace the right heel by the 
 side of the left. 
 
 11. To full face to the rear (or front), the command will 
 be given : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. About — Fack. 
 
 12. At the word about, turn on the left heel, bi-ing the 
 left toe to the front, carry the right foot to the rear, 
 the hollow opposite to and full three inches from the left 
 heel, the feet square to each other. 
 
 13. At the word face, turn on both heels, raise the toes 
 a little, extend the thighs and face to the rear, -bringing, 
 at the same time, the right heel by the side of the left. 
 
 14. The instructor will take care that the?o motions do 
 not derange tho position of tlio body. 
 
4 POSITIOX OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 The Direct Step ■ ♦ 
 
 15. The direct step, or pace, in coimnon time, is ttventy 
 eight inches, reckoning from heel to heel and at the rate of 
 ninety a minute. 
 
 16. The instructor wishing to instruct the recruit in the 
 principles of this step, will place himself six or eight 
 paces in front and facing him. He will then execute the 
 step slowlj, by way of illustration, and command : 
 
 1. Squad foi'tvard. 2. Common time. 3. March. 
 
 17. At the first command, feel the weight of the body 
 on the right leg, without bending the left knee. 
 
 18. At the command march, step off with the left foot, 
 carrying it straight forward twenty-eight inches from the 
 right, the solencar the ground, the ham extended, the toe 
 a little depressed, and, as also the knee, slightly turned 
 out ; at the same time, throw the weight' of the body for- 
 ward, and plant flat the left foot, without shock, precisely 
 at the distance where it finds itself from the right, when 
 the weight of the body is brought forward, the whole of 
 which will now rest on the advanced foot. Next, in like 
 manner, advance the right foot and plant it as above, the 
 heel twenty-eight inches from the heel of the left foot, and 
 thus continue to march, without crossing the legs, or 
 striking the one against the other, without turning the 
 shoulders, and preserving always the face direct to the front. 
 
 19. The instructor wishing the squad to halt, will com- 
 mand: . 
 
 L Squad. 2. Halt, 
 
 20. At the command halt, which will be given at the 
 instant either foot is coming to the ground, the foot in the 
 
POSITION OF Tllfi vSOLDIER. 5 
 
 rear will be brought up, and planted by the side of the 
 other, without shock. 
 
 The Quich-Stej). 
 
 21. The principles of the step in quick time are the same 
 as for common time, but its swiftness is at the rate of one 
 hundred and ten steps p^r minute. As soon as the recruit 
 has the required steadiness, and has become established in 
 the manual of arms, and in the mechanism of the step i 
 common time, he will be practiced only in quick time, the 
 double quick, and the run. " When the time is not indicat- 
 ed in the preparatory command, the squad will always 
 move in quick time. 
 
 22. Thi! instructor wishing to march in quich time, will 
 command : 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. March. 
 
 23. At the command march, the squad will step off and 
 continue to march in quick time. 
 
 The Double Quick-Step. 
 
 24. The length of the double quick-step is thirty-three 
 inches, and its swiftness at the rate of one hundred and 
 sixty-five steps per minute. 
 
 25. The instructor wishing to teach the recruit the prin- 
 ciples cf this step, will command : 
 
 1. Double qinch-Htep. 2. March. 
 
 26. At the first command, raise the hands to a level with 
 the hips, the hands closed, the nails towards the body, the 
 elbows to the rear. 
 
C POSITION OF TIIF. SOl.DIEH. 
 
 27. At the second command, raise to the front the left 
 leg bent to its greatest elevation, the part of the leg be- 
 tween the knee and inst(»p vertical, the toe depressed ; 
 replace the foot in its former po.^ition ; execute with the 
 right leg what has just boen prescribed for the left, and 
 continue the alternate movement of the legs until the com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. S'itiad. 2. Halt. 
 
 28. At the command halt, bring the foot which is raised 
 by the side of the other, drop the hands to the side, and 
 resume the position of the soldier. 
 
 29. The instructor should phice 'himself six or eight 
 paces from, and facing the recruit, and indicate the ca- 
 dence bj the commands one and two, given alternately, as 
 each foot is brought to the ground. 
 
 30. The recruit being sufficiently established in tho 
 principles of this step, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2, Double quick. 3. Makch. 
 
 31. At the first command, throw the weight of the body 
 on the right leg. 
 
 32. At the second, place the arms as indicated in No. 26. 
 53. At the third, carry forward the left foot, the leg 
 
 slightly bent, the knee raised, plant the left foot, toe first, 
 thirty-three inches from the right, and with the right 
 foot execute what has just been prescribed for the left. 
 This alternate movement of the legs will take place by 
 throwing the weight of tho body on the foot that is plant- 
 ed, and by allowing a natural oscillatory motion of the- 
 arms. 
 
rOSITION or THH; SOLDIK!;. < , 
 
 24. The instructor should cautien the recnuit to breathe 
 as much as possible through the nose, k-oping the moutfa 
 closed, as it will enable him to go a mncli longer distance, 
 without experiencing the fatigue that he otherwise would. 
 
 The. Run. 
 
 35. The recruits will also be exercised in running. 
 
 36. The principles are the same as for (he double quick 
 gtep, the only diflference consisting in a ;;rcater degree of 
 swiftness. 
 
 Aligmnenis. 
 
 57. The instructor will at first teach the recruits to 
 align themselves man by man, in order the better to make 
 them comprehend the principles of alignment ; to this end 
 he will command the two men on the right flank to march 
 to the front, and having aligned them, ho will cause the 
 remainder of the squad to more up, as thoy may ba suc- 
 cessively called, each by bis number, and align themselves 
 successively on the line of the first two men. 
 
 38. Each recruit, as designated by his number, will turn 
 the head and eyes to the right as prescribed in No. 3, and 
 will march in quick time two paces forward, shortening 
 the last so as to find himself about six inches behind the 
 new alignment, which he ought never to pass ; he wil» 
 next move up steadily by steps of two or three inches, the 
 thighs extended, to the side of the man next to him on 
 the alignment, so that, without deranging the head, the 
 
8 rOSITIOX OF lilE SOLnil'R. 
 
 line of the eyes, or that of the shoulders, he inay find 
 himself in the exact line of his neighbor, whose elbow he 
 will lightly touch without opening his own. 
 
 39. The instructor eeeing the rank well aligned, will 
 command : 
 
 FRONT. 
 
 40. At this, the recruits will turn their ejes to the front 
 and remain firm. 
 
 41. Alignments to the left will be executed on the same 
 principles. 
 
 42. "When the recruits shall have learned to align them- 
 selves correctly, the instructor will cause the entire rank 
 to align itself at once by the command : 
 
 Bight (or left) Dress. 
 
 43. At this, the rank, except the two men placed in ad- 
 vance as a basis of alignment, will more up in quick time, 
 and place themselves on the new line as prescribed in No. 
 38. 
 
 44. The instructor will carefully observe that the princi- 
 ples are followed, and will place himself on the flank that 
 has served as a basis, to see that the alignment is correct. 
 
 45. The instructor seeing the rank aligned, will com- 
 mand : 
 
 FRONT. 
 
 46. Alignments to the rear will be executed on the same 
 principles, the recruits stepping back a little beyond the 
 
POSITION' OF A SOLDIER. \f 
 
 line, am^ thon dressing up according to the principles pre- 
 scribed in No. 38, the instructor commanding : 
 
 1. Biffht (or left) backtcard—DR^m. 
 
 To March to (he Front. 
 
 47. The rank being correctly aligned, when the instruc- 
 tor shall wish to causa it to march to the front, he will 
 place a well instructed man on the right or left, according 
 to the side on which he may wish theguid' to be, and 
 command : 
 
 1. Squad, foncnrd. 2. Guide right {ov left.) 3. March. 
 
 48. At the command march, the rank will step off smart- 
 ly with the left foot ; the guide will take care to march 
 straight to the front, keeping hia shoulder in a square 
 with that line. 
 
 49. The men 'hould touch lightly the elbow towards the 
 side of the guide, be careful not to open out the left el- 
 bow nor the right arm, yield to the pressure coming from 
 the side of the guide, and resist that coming from the o{>- 
 posite side. 
 
 50. They should keep the head direct to the front, no 
 matter on which side the guide may be, and if found be- 
 fore or behind the alignment, the man in fault must cor- 
 rect himself by shortening or lengthening the step, by 
 degrees, almost insensible. 
 
 51. The instructor will labor to cause the recruits to 
 
10 ror^iTTOx of thr soldier. 
 
 comprehend that the alignment can only be preserved, in 
 snarching, but bv the regularity of the step, the touch 
 of the elbow, and the maiutainance of the shouldera in & 
 square with tkQ line of direction. 
 
 62. The squad being in mirch, the instructor wishing to 
 march them obliquely, will command: 
 
 I. Itigkt (or left) obli-^ue. 2. Makch. 
 
 53. At the second command, each man will make a half 
 face to the right (or left) and will then march straight 
 forward in the new direction. As the men no longer touch 
 elbows, they should glance along the shoulders of the near- 
 est files towards the side to which they are obliquing, and 
 should regulate their steps so that the shoulders shall al- 
 ways be behind that of their next neighbor on that side, 
 and that his head shall conceal the heads of the other mem 
 in the rank. 
 
 54. The men sh«uld preserve the same length of pace 
 and the same degree of obliquity. 
 
 55. The instructor wishing to resume the primitive di- 
 rection, will command : 
 
 I. Foru-ard. 2. March, 
 
 56. At the second command, each man will make a half 
 face to the left (or right) and all will then march straight 
 to the front, as in the direct march. 
 
 57. The squad being at a halt, if the instructor should 
 wish, to march it in the back step, he will command: 
 
 1. Squadlacl-iOKtrd. 2. Guide right {ov left.) 3. Miuoir. 
 
 l-H. At the oouiinand marrh, the recruit will step off 
 
Kosrrio.v ok ihk solltier. 11 
 
 smartly with the left foot fourtecu inches to tho rear, 
 reckoning from heel to' heel, and so on with the fset in 
 succession, till the command halt, which will always be 
 preceded by the cauti'>n, tSquacl. 
 
 59. The men will halt promptly at this command and 
 bring the foot in front by the side of the other. 
 
 60. This step will ahra3'S be execnted in quick time. 
 
 To Mirk Time. 
 
 01. The .'quad marching in the direct step in common 
 or quick time, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. 3fark time. 2. March. 
 
 62. At the command march, which will ho, given at the 
 instant either foot is coming to the groind, make a sem- 
 blance of marching, by advancing flr?t one foot and then 
 the other, always bringing back the advanced foot and 
 placing its heel by the side of the heel of the other. 
 
 To Change Step. 
 
 63. The squad being in march, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Change step. 2. March. 
 
 Gi. At the second coiwraand, which will be given at the 
 instant cither foot is coming to the ground, bring up 
 quickly the foot in the rear to the side of that just come to 
 the ground, and step olV v.ilh the latter. 
 
12 rosuiox OF ruK soldieu. 
 
 65. The squad marching in common, quick or double 
 quick time, and the instructor wishing to face it about, 
 will command : 
 
 J. Sqnad, right about. 2. MA.aCH. 
 
 66. At the comjiand march, which will be given the 
 instant the left foot is coming t» the ground, bring this 
 foot to the ground, and turning on it, face to the rear, then 
 place the right foot in the new direction, and step off with 
 the left foot. 
 
 67. If the squad be marching and the instructor wishes 
 to bring it to a halt and faced to the rear, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Sqnad, right about. 2. Halt. 
 
 08. At the command halt, which will be given as the 
 left foot is coming to the ground, bring this foot to the 
 ground, and turning on it face to the rear, then bring the 
 right foot to the side of the left. 
 
 69. The squad being at a halt, the instructor wishing 
 to move it to the right on the same line, will command : 
 
 1. Side step to the right. 2. March. 
 
 70. At the second command, each man will glance his 
 eyes to the right, and at the same time carry his right 
 foot about tcMi inches to the '•ight, and instantly bring up 
 his left foot, and so on, the whole with perfect precision 
 of time. 
 
 71. The shoulders must be kept square to the front, and 
 
13 rOSITIOiV OF THE ROLPIBR. 
 
 each man perceptibly halting, when he has closed on the 
 fixed point, or on the man next to him. 
 
 72. When the instructor shall wish the squad to halt, 
 he will command : ** 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 73. At the command halt, bring up the left foot to the 
 Bide of the right, and stand firm. 
 
 74. To change the position by aide step to the left it will 
 be executed on the same principles by inverse means. 
 
 To March by the Flanh. 
 
 75. The rank being at a halt and correctly alligned, the 
 instructor will command : 
 
 Count ttcos, 
 
 6. At this command the men count from right to left, 
 pronouncing in a loud and distinct voice, in the same tone, 
 and without turning the head, one, two, according to the 
 place which he occupies. 
 
 77. This being accomplished, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Squad, right — Face. 2. Fornard. 3. March. 
 
 78. At the command face, the squad will face to tho 
 right; the even numbered men after facing to the right, 
 will step quickly to the side of tho odd numbered men, 
 the latter standi^ng fast, so that when the movement is 
 executed, the men wi;l be formed into files of two abreast* 
 
1-i *tllLIUl- (»1- 1111', SyLAll. 
 
 70. Xt the command march, tlie equitd will jstep oft' 
 smartly with the lePt foot ; the files keeping alicjned and 
 prcsei ving their intervals. 
 
 80. To march by the left flank, %ill be executed b}- the 
 same command, substituting the word left for right, and 
 bj inverse means ; in this case the even numbered men 
 after facing to the left will stand fast, and the odd num- 
 ber will place themselves on their left. 
 
 81. The instructor should place himself five or six paces 
 on the flank of the rank marching in file, to watch over 
 the execution of the principles prescribed. He will also, 
 sometimes place himself in its roar, halt and suffer it to 
 pass fifteen or twenty paces, the better to see whether the 
 
 .men cover each other accurately. 
 
 82. When he wishes to halt the rank, marching by the 
 flank, he w ill command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 83. At the second command, the rank will halt, and af- 
 terward no man will stir, although he may have lost his 
 distance. 
 
 84. At the third command, each man will front by fac- 
 ing to the left, if marching by the right flank, and by a 
 face to the right, if marching by the left flank. 
 
 85. The rear rank men will at the same time move 
 quickly into their places, so as to form the squad again in- 
 to one rank. 
 
 86. To change direction by fik', the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. B>/file left (or right) 2. March. 
 
 87. At the command march, the first file will change di- 
 rection to the left (or right) in describing a email arc of a 
 
SCHOOT, OF THE SQIUD. 15 
 
 circle, and will then inarch straight forward ; the two 
 men of this file in wheeling will keep up the touch of the 
 elbows, and the man on the side to which the wheel ia 
 made, will shorten the first three or four steps. Each file 
 will come successively to wheel on the same spot where 
 that which preceded it wheeled. 
 
 88. To face by the right or left flank, in marching, tlio 
 instructor will command : 
 
 1. Squad, hij the ri;jht {ov left) Jlank. 2. March. 
 
 89. At the command march, which will be given a little 
 before either foot comes to the ground, the recruit will 
 turn the body, plant the foot that is raised in the new di- 
 rection, and step off with the other foot, w'ithout altering 
 the cadence of the step ; the men will double or undouble 
 rapidly. 
 
 90. If in facing by the right or left flank, the squad 
 should face to the rear, the men will come into one rank 
 agreeably to the principles as indicated in Nos. 84 and 85. 
 Observe that the men who are in the rear always move 
 up to form into single rank, and in such manner as never 
 to invert the order of the numbers in the rank. 
 
 91. If, when the squad has been faced to ihe rear, the 
 instructor should cause it to face by the left flank, it is the 
 even numbers who will double by moving to the left of 
 the odd numbers; but if by the right flank, it is the odd 
 numbers who will double to the right o' the even num- 
 bers. 
 
 92. Should the instructor wish the men to march in one 
 rank, he will caution them not to double files. 
 
K> $||U00L OF THE SOLDIKR. 
 
 Wheelings. 
 
 93. Wheelings are of two kinds ; from halts or on fixed 
 pivots, and in march or on movable pivots. 
 
 9i. Wheeling on a fixed pivot takes place in passing a 
 corps from the order in battle to the order in column, or 
 from the latter to the former. 
 
 95. Wheels in marching, take place in changes of direc- 
 tion in column, as often as this movement is executed to 
 the side opposite to the guide. 
 
 96. In wheels from a halt, the pivot-man only turns in 
 his place without advancing or receding. 
 
 97. In the wheels in marching, the pivot-man takes 
 steps of nine or eleven inches, according as the squad is 
 marching in quick or double quick time, so as to clear the 
 wheeling point before the next subdivision arrives on the 
 Bame ground, which is necessary in order that the succeed- 
 ing subcivisions may not lose their distances by being 
 delayed. 
 
 98. The man on the wheeling fla:ik will take the full 
 step of twenty-eight inches, or thirty-three inches, accord- 
 ing to the gait. 
 
 Wheeling from a Halt, or on a Fixed Pivot. 
 
 99. The rank being at a halt, the instructor will place 
 a well instructed man on the wheeling flank to conduct it, 
 and then command : 
 
 1. By squad, ri(jht wheel. 2. March. 
 
 100. At the command march, the rank will step off with 
 the left foot, turning at the same tinip tli!" head a little to 
 
 A 
 
T-OSiriON OF TUE .SOUDIKR. 17 
 
 the left, the C3'es fi.Tod on the line of the oyc^ of tlie men 
 to the left ; the pivot man will merely mark fimc in grada- 
 f.Wy turning his body, in order to conform himself to the 
 movement of the marching flank ; the man who conducts 
 this flank will take steps of twenty-eight inches, and from 
 the first step, advance a little the left shoulder, cast his 
 eycji from time to time along the rank, and feel constantly 
 the elbow of the next man lightly, but never push him. 
 
 101. The other men wiil feel lightly the elbow of th« 
 next man, towards the pivot, resist pressure cominjj from 
 the opposite side, and each will coRform himself to the 
 njarching flank, shortening his step according to his ap- 
 proximation to the pivot. 
 
 102. The instructor will make tlic rank wheel round tlio 
 circle once or twice before halting, in ^rder to cause th^^ 
 pijnciplss to be better understood, and he will be watch- 
 ful that the centre docs not break. 
 
 103. The wheel to the left will be executed according to 
 the same principles. 
 
 lOL When the instructor shall wish to arrest the wheel 
 he will command : 
 
 1. iSqtKtd. 2. Malt. 
 
 105. At the second command the rank will halt and no 
 man stir. The instructor going to the flank opposite t)ie 
 pivot, will place the two outer men of that flank in the 
 direction he may wish to give to the rank, without, how- 
 ever, displacing the pivot, who will conform the line of 
 iiis shouldei's to this direction. 
 
 IOC. The instructor will take care to have between th-^PH 
 two men and the pivot, only the space necessary to cvsx- 
 iii'm the other men. lie will theu coaimaud • 
 li 
 
18 SCHOOL or Tna soitDiEtr. 
 
 1. Left (or right) — Dress. 
 
 107. At this the rank will place itself on the allignmcnt 
 ®f the two men established as a basis in conformity with 
 principles prescribed in No. 38. 
 
 108. The instructor will next cammand Front, which 
 will be executed as prescribed in No. 3^. 
 
 Wheeling^ in Marching, or on a Movable Pivot. 
 
 109. The rank being in march, and the instructor ■«Tiab- 
 ing tO' chang-e the direction to the reverse flank, (to the 
 side opposite to the guide or pivot flank) he will com- 
 mand: 
 
 1. Right (or left) whtel. 2. March. 
 
 110. The first command will be given when the rank is 
 jot four paces from the wheeling point. 
 
 111. At the command march, the wheel will be executed 
 in the same manner as from a halt, except that the toucb 
 of the elbow will remain towards the marching flank (or 
 side of the guide) instead of the actual pivot j that the 
 pivot man, instead of merely turning in bis place, will 
 conform himself to the movement of the marching flank, 
 feel lightly the elbow of the next man, take steps of full 
 nine inches, and thus gain ground-forward in describing a 
 small ciu've, to clear the point of wheel. The middle of 
 tha rank will bend slightly to the rear. As soon as the 
 movement shall commence, the man who conducts the 
 marching flank will cast his eyes on the ground over which 
 Jie will have to pass. 
 
 112. The wheel being ended, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
rOSITION OF A BOLOTUn. 19 
 
 1. Fortcard. 2. March. 
 a- '.A. 
 
 113. The first command will be pronounced when ftiuv 
 paces are yet re^juired to complete the chan,fe of direc- 
 tion. 
 
 Hi. At the command march, which will be given at the 
 instant of completinf^ the wheel, the man who- conducts 
 the marching flank will direct himself straight forward ; 
 the pivot man and all the rank will retake che step of 
 twenty-eight inches, and bring the head direct to the 
 froat. 
 
 Turning. 
 
 115. The change of direction to the side of the guide, 
 In matching, will be executed as follows : The instructor 
 will command : • 
 
 1. Left (or right) tiirit. 2, Mauch, 
 
 116. The first command will be given when the rank is 
 yet/our paces from the turning point. 
 
 117. At the command march, to be pronounced at the 
 instant the rank ought to turn, the guide will face to the 
 left (or right) in marching, and more forward in the new- 
 direction without slackening or quickening the cadence, 
 and without shortening or lengthening the step. The whole 
 rank will promptly conform itself to the new direction, to 
 eflect which, each man will advance the shoulder opposite 
 the guide, take the double quick step, to carry himself in 
 the new direction, turn the head and eyes to the side of 
 the guide, and retake the touch of the elbow on that side 
 in placing himself on the allig-njiicnt of the guide, from 
 
20 POSITION OF rnK soldiek. 
 
 whom he will take the step, and then resynie tho direct 
 position of the head. Each man will thus arrive pucc-g- 
 sivelj on the allignment. 
 
 118. When the reoruits compreheiul and execute well, in 
 quick-time, the wheels, at a halt and in marching, and the 
 change of direction to the side of the guide, the instructor 
 will cause the same movements to bo executed in double 
 quick time. 
 
 Manual of Aims fur Heavy Infantry. 
 
 119. The manual of arms will be taught to four men, 
 placed at first in one rank, elbow to elbow, and aftcrwai-ds ' 
 in two ranks. 
 
 120. Each command will be executed in one time, (or 
 pause) and this time will be divided into motions. 
 
 121. The rate or swiftness of each motion, except the 
 motions relative to the cartrige, to the rammer and to the 
 fixino- and unfixing of the bayonet, is fixed at the ninetieth 
 part of a minute ; but the motions here excepted should 
 be executed with promptness and regularity. 
 
 122. As soon as the recruits shall well comprehend the 
 positions of the several motions, they will be taught to 
 execute the time without resting on the motions. 
 
 123. Tlecruits are frequently seen with natural defects 
 in the conformation of the shoaldcrs, breast, and hips. — 
 These the instructor will endeavor to correct in the 
 lessons without arms, ana afterwards by steady endea- 
 vors, so thai the appearances of the pieces in tlie same 
 line may be uniform, and this without constraint to the 
 men. 
 
rOSTTIOX OF THE SOLPIER. 21 
 
 '' Princi2)fes of Shouldered Arms: 
 
 124. The recruit being jilaccd in the position of the 
 soldier, thff instructor will cause him to seize the piece in 
 the left hand, the arm but a very little bent, the elbow 
 back, near the body, the palm of the hand passing on the 
 outer edge of the butt on the upper joints of the fi^gcri, 
 (the inner edge on the lower joints, and the ends inside,) 
 the heel of the butt between the middle and forefingers, 
 the thuihb on the front screws of the butt plate, the re- 
 maining fmgers under the butt, the butt more or less kept 
 back, according to the conformation of the man, so that 
 the piece seen from the front (or side) shall appear per- 
 pendicular, and also that the movement of the thigh, in 
 inarching, may not raise it, or cause it waver : the stock 
 below the tail band resting agiiinst the hollow of the shoul- 
 der, just within the joint, the right arm hanging naturally 
 as in the position of the soldier. 
 
 125. The instructor, before proceeding to drill the re- 
 cruit in the manual will causo to be repeated, the move- 
 ments of eyes right, left and/rout and the facings. 
 
 126. The manual of arms will be taught in the follo>Ving 
 progression : The instructor will command : 
 
 Pretent — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 127. ( First motion. ) Turn the piece with the left hand, 
 the lock out, seize the small of the stock at the same time 
 with the right hand, the piece perpendicular and detached 
 iV ini the shoulder, the left hand remaining under the butt. 
 
 ]'1R. {Second motion.) Complete the turning inwaids 
 oT ihe jjiccc so as to bring it erect before the centre of tlio 
 
22 , POSITION OF THE SOLDlSlt. 
 
 body, the rammar to the front, the right hand under and 
 against the f^uard ; seize it smartly at the same time with 
 the left hand above the lock, the thumb extended along 
 the barrel and on the stock, the forearm resting on the 
 body without constraint, and the hand at the hight of the 
 elbow. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and tu-o motions. 
 
 120. {First motion.) Turn the piece with the right 
 hand, the barrel out, (with the thumb on the S plate, and 
 the forefinger against the cock,) raise and support it 
 against the left shoulder with the right hand, drop the 
 left hand under the butt, the right hand resting on, with- 
 out graspin'g the small of the stock. 
 
 130. {Second motion.) Drop quickly the right hand 
 into its position. 
 
 Order — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions 
 
 131. {First motion.) Drop the piece smartly by ex- 
 tending the left arm, seize it at the same time with the 
 right hand above and near the tail band; (without the 
 i?ast pause.) quit the hold of th^ left hand, and carry the 
 piece opposite the right shoulder, the rammer in front, the 
 little finger behind the barrel, the right hand supported 
 against the hip, the butt three inches from the ground, 
 the piece ei*ect, the left hand hanging by the side. 
 
 132. {Second motion.) Let the piece slip through the 
 rio-ht hand, without shock, to the ground and take the fol- 
 lowing position : 
 
POSTTrON OF THE SOLDIER. 23 
 
 Position cf Order Arms. 
 
 133. The liand low, the barrel between the thumb and 
 forelinper, extended along the stock ; the other fingers ex- 
 tended and joined ; the muzzle about two inches from the 
 right shoulder ; the rammer in front : the toe (f»r beak'^ 
 of the butt, against, and in aline with the toe of the right 
 foot; the barrel perpendicular. 
 
 134. The instructor will see the recruit is well establish- 
 ed in the position of order artnt, and then command : 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 Otie time a»d trro mofiomi. 
 
 135. [Firnt motion.) liaise the piece smarlty with the 
 right hand, carry it against the left shoulder, so as to 
 bring the barrel to the front, place, at the same time, the 
 loft hand under the butt, and slip the right hand down to 
 the hammer. 
 
 136. (Second motion.) Let fall smartlj the right hand 
 into position. 
 
 Siijyport — Arms. 
 
 One time and three motionn. 
 
 137. {First motion.) With the right hand, seize the 
 small of the stock four inches below the lock, raising a 
 little but r.ot turning the piece. 
 
 138. {Second motion.) Take the left hand from the butt, 
 extend the left forearm upward, jicross the body, under 
 the cock, the hand flat on the right breast. 
 
 139. {Third motion.) Drop the right hand smartly into 
 its position. 
 
24 POSITION OF THE SOLDIErv. 
 
 Shoulder (or carry) — Akms, 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 140. {First motion.) Carry quicklj the right hand to 
 the small of the stock. 
 
 141. {Second motion.) Place quicklj the left hand un- 
 der the butt, and at the same time, without any pause, let 
 the right hand, with the fingers extended slip up under 
 the cock of the piece, the cock resting on the forefinger 
 between the middle and third joints, and the thumb ex- 
 tended along the S plate.* 
 
 142. {Third motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand 
 into its position, and drop with the left, at the same time, 
 the piece into tha position of shoulder armf. 
 
 Unfix — Bayonet. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 148. {First motion.) Drop the piece by a full extension 
 of tho left arm, seize it at the same tim* with the right 
 hand abore and near the tail band. 
 
 144. {Second motion.) Drop the piece with the right 
 hand along the left thigh, seize it with the left hand abore 
 the right, lengthen out the left arm, re»t the butt on the 
 ground without shock, and c irrj at the same time the 
 right hand to the bayonet; with the thumb turn the«lasp 
 
 ♦This movement is somewhat different from that pre- 
 scribed in other works, but it will be found that it causes 
 uniformity and precision, and adds much more ease and 
 grace in its execution, ea^iecially li-om a front yiaw. It 
 was used entirely by the lamented Col. C. C. Tew, Sup't. 
 of the North Carolina Militarr Academr, at Hillsboro', 
 N. C. 
 
POSITION OF THE Sni.PIER 2.> 
 
 against the stop, seize the bayonet at the s(X:ket and ihank, 
 10 that the lower end of the socket may be about an inch 
 below the heel of the palm, and that in wresting off the 
 bayonet, the thumb may be extended on the blade. 
 
 145. ( Third motion.) Wrest off the bayonet, return it 
 to the scabbard, place imnu-diately the rijjht little finfijer 
 on the butt of the rammer, lower the I'A'l hand alonp the 
 barrel, extending the arm, without depressing the shoulder. 
 
 Sliouhler- -kuMS. , 
 
 0)lt time and thrte modnua. 
 
 146. {Fimt motion.) Uaise the piece with the left h^nd 
 ■lon{( the left side, the hand at the height of .the chin, th; 
 forearm touching the piece, the barrel to the front ; drop 
 at the same time the right hand to seize the piece a littU 
 above the small of the stock, the forefinger touching the 
 ^ock, and the thumb on the S plate. 
 
 147. (Second motion.) Raise the piece with the right 
 hand, drop the left and place it under the butt, support 
 the piece with the right hind against the shoulder i i the 
 pouition of $houlder armt, the right hand resting ou with- 
 ont grasping the piece. 
 
 143. {Third motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand 
 into its position. 
 
 149. The instructor should be careful that in all more- 
 nients where the hand is under the cock, as in the second 
 motion abore, that the fingers are extended and perfectly 
 •traight, the cock resting on the forefinger between the 
 middle and third joints, and Ihe tliuiub on the S plate. 
 
26 POSITION OF THK SOLDIKR. 
 
 Secure — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 150. (Fir$t motion.) Seize quickly the piece with the 
 right hand, the thumb on the S plate, and the forefinger 
 against the cock ; at the same instant, detach the piece 
 from the shoulder, the barrel to the front, seize it at the 
 tail band with the left hind, the thumb extended on the 
 rammer, the piece erect, opposite the shoulder the left 
 elbovT on the piece. 
 
 151. {Second motion.) Reverse the piece, pass it under 
 the left arm the left hand remaining at the tail band, the 
 thumb on the rammer, the little finger resting againit the 
 hip, and the right hand falling at the same time into ita 
 position. 
 
 Sho aider — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 152. {First motion.) Raise the piece with the left hand, 
 (but not too suddenly lest the rammer should flj out,) 
 seize the small of the stock with the right hand to support 
 it against the shoulder, allowing the hand to assume the 
 position as indicated in Xo. 141, quit the hold of the left 
 hand and pass it quickly under th.e butt. 
 
 153. {Second ^notion.) Let fall smartly the right hand 
 into its position ; drop at the same time the piece into the 
 position of shoulder armt. 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 154. {First motion.) Kimtrnfixhayontt, '^o. \iZ. 
 
 155. {Second motion.) As in unfix bayonet, No. 144, 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SQCAB. 27 
 
 except that the right hand will go to the scabbard, to seize 
 the baronet by the socket and shank, so that the lower (now 
 upper) end of the socket shall extend about an inch above 
 the heel of the palm. 
 
 156. ( Third motion. ) Draw the bayonet from the scab- 
 bard, carry it and fix it on the muzzle, turning the clasp 
 towards the body with the right thumb: place immedi- 
 ately the little finger on the head of the rammer, lower 
 the left hand along the barrel, extending the arm without 
 depressing the shoulder. 
 
 iS'Ao«('(f*r~-AKus. 
 
 One time and three motio7is. 
 
 157. ( First, Second find Third moliow^.) As in shoulder 
 armn from uvfix bayonet. 
 
 Charge — Bayonet. 
 One time and tico motions. 
 
 158. {First 7not{on.) Make a half face to the right on 
 the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, place at the 
 same time the right foot behind and at right angles with 
 the left, the hollow of the right foot opposite to and about 
 three inches from the left heel ; turn the piece with the 
 left hand, lock outwards, and seize the small of the stock 
 at the same time with the right hand, the piece perpendi- 
 cular and detached from the shoulder ; leaving the left 
 hand under the butt. 
 
 150. {Second 7notion.) Bringdown the piece with the right 
 hand into the left, the latter seizing it a little in advance 
 of the tail band, the barrel up, the left elbow near the body 
 
28 
 
 POSITION OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 the right hand supported against the hip, the point of the 
 bayonet at the height of the eye. 
 
 160. The men of the rear rank will take care and not 
 touch their file leaders with the points of their bayonots. 
 
 Shoidder — Ahms. 
 
 One time and two motions, 
 
 161. {First motion.) Face to the front by turning on 
 the left heel, bring up the right foot by the side of the 
 left heel, at the sause time spring up the piece with the 
 right hand, to the left shoulder, and place the left hand 
 under the butt, allowing at the same time the right hand 
 to assume the position as indicated in No. 141. 
 
 162. { Second motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand 
 into its position. 
 
 Trail — Akms. 
 
 One time and tico motions. 
 
 1^3. {First motion.) As first motion of order armi 
 No. 131. 
 
 164. {Second motion.) Incline a little the muzzle to the 
 front, the butt to the rear, and about three inches from the 
 ground, the right hand grasping the piece and supported 
 at the hip. 
 
 165. Should the instructor wish to relieve the men when 
 marching with arms trailed, he will command : Change — 
 Trail, which will be executed in one motion, by raising 
 the muzzle to the shoulder, passing the piece across the 
 front of the bod}--, trailing it with the left. At the com- 
 mand Iiec7iange—TRAUj, raise the muzzle to the shoulder, 
 pass the piece to the right hand and retake the position of 
 trail arms. 
 
ruSMION UF THE SOLl>IER, 29 
 
 Sh o u Ider — A R m s, 
 
 IGG. At the comniand shoulder raise the piece pcrpcn^i- 
 cuLar in the right hand ; at the command arms execute the 
 two motions in the shoxdder arma, from the positien of 
 order anna. 
 
 1C)7. The instructor wishing to give the men repose in 
 the position of order onus, will command: 
 
 Rest. 
 
 168. At this command, the men will no longer he re- 
 quired to ])rescrve silence, or to remain pteady in position. 
 Or he may command : 
 
 1. In place. 2. Rkst. 
 
 ino. At the second command, the men will not be re- 
 quired to preserve silence or steadineee of position, but 
 they must always keep one of their heels and their pieces 
 on the allignment. 
 
 [Jicninrkt.] (The instructor will be careful that the men 
 do not squat ur lie down, as it is exceedingly unmilitary 
 and apt to make them careJess and inattentive. The com- 
 piler of this woik has often seen reci-iaits stretched at full 
 length on the ground, l^iung ofhcers particularly, should 
 be cautioned against allowing it.) 
 
 If the instructor wishes, he will commaisd : 
 
 1. Parade. 2. Rest. 
 
 170. At the second command, the men will carry th« 
 right foot six inches in rear of the left heel, the left kne(» 
 slightly bent, the body upright upon the right log, th« 
 piece resting against the hollow of the ri^ht shoulder, tte 
 
3'(J rOSITIOI* OF THE JfOLDIETt. 
 
 hands crossed in front, the back of them outwards, the 
 left hand uppermost, the eyes directed to the front. 
 
 171. To cause a resumption of the original position, the 
 instructor will command : 
 
 I. Attention 2.. Squai>. 
 
 172. At the second command, the men will resnme their 
 correct position of order arma. 
 
 173. If the squad should be at the position of support 
 arms, when the command in place or parade rest is given, 
 the men wiji be regulated by the directions indicated in 
 No. 169, ITO except they \Till bring up the right hand 
 amartly to the small of the stock and seize it. 
 
 174. At the command attention they will resume the cor- 
 rect po8itio>n of auj^pmH arms^ 
 
 1. To Ei^ht Shotdder Shift 2. Arms. ( From a STiouMer 
 Arm9. ) 
 
 One tim« and two mottona. 
 
 175. {First motion. ) Turn the piece with the left hand, 
 lock to the front, seize it at the same time with the right 
 hand at the small of the stock. 
 
 176. {Second motion.) Carry the piece to the right 
 shoulder, the lock plate upwards^ the left liand still holding 
 the butt, the muzzle elevated; |jiace the right hand on th& 
 Jautt, the beak between the two first fingers, the other twO" 
 
 fingers under the bait plate, and let fall the left hand by 
 the side. 
 
 Shoulder— Krms. 
 One time c$nd two motions . 
 
 177. ( First motion. ) Raise the piece and extend t&e 
 right arm, seize it with the left hand above the lock^ ca^-rj 
 
TOSITIOK OF THS SOXDrRB. "31 
 
 tlie piece Jip:ainst the left shoulder, turning the barrel to 
 the front, (in turning place the thumb of the right hand 
 on the S plate, fingers extended, cock resting on the fore- 
 finger as indicated in Xa. 141,) the right hand being at the 
 small of the stock, place the left hand under the bult. 
 
 178. (Stdftid motion.) L«t the r^ht hand fall by the 
 fide. 
 
 Arms — At Will. 
 
 One f»o(io». 
 
 175. Carry the piece at pleasure on either tSiomlder, wit"k 
 one or both hands, the muzzle elevated. 
 
 Sh<nild-er— Av.iS£. • 
 
 180. Retake the position of ahoidder arms, 
 
 Armn — Port. 
 
 181. Throvf the piece diagouaUy across the body, the 
 lock to the front, seize it smartly at the same time with, 
 both hands, the right at the small ef the stock, the left at 
 the tail band, the thumbs pointing towards the muzzle, the 
 barrel sloping upwards and crossing opposite to the point 
 of the loft shoulder, the butt proportionately lowered ; the 
 palm of the right haad abore, tliat of the Mt under the 
 piece, and the nails of both hands next to the body, t© 
 vrhich the elbows will be clased. 
 
 Sim iildrcr — A R MS, 
 
 On« time and two motions. 
 
 182. ( First motion. ) Bring the piece smartly to the left 
 shoulder, place the left hand quickly under the butt, th« 
 fingers of the right hand under the cock and extended a4 
 in No. UL 
 
■->-i POSITION OF TXTK SOLrHETt. 
 
 183. {Serond motion.) Drop the right hand sm.irtiv hy 
 the sido. 
 
 7b Ground Arm^. 
 
 184. The se(_uad being at ordered arms, if the instructor 
 Irish tbe piece to be placed on the ground, he will command; 
 
 Ground — Arms. 
 It 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 185. {First motion.) Turn the piece with the right hand,, 
 the barrel to the left, at the same time seiz'e the cartridge 
 box with left hand, bend the bodv, advance the,left foot, 
 the heel opposite the lower band ; laj the piece on the- 
 ground with the right hand, the toe of the butt on a line 
 with the right toe, the knee slightly bent, the right heej 
 raised. 
 
 186. (Second motion.) Rise up, bring the left foot by 
 the side of the right, quit the c?*rtridge box with tbe left 
 hand, and drop the bands by the side. 
 
 Maise — Akms. 
 
 187. Seize the cartridge box with the left hand, bend 
 the body, advance the left foot opposite tbe lower band, 
 and seize the piece with tfl*e right hand. 
 
 188. liaise the piece, bringing the left foot by the side of 
 the right ; turn the piece with the right ham}, the rammer 
 to the front; at the same time quit the cartridge box with 
 the left hand, and drop this hand by the side. 
 
 7o Sfock Arms, 
 
 189. The squad bring in two ranks at order arms, the 
 mstructov will command i 
 
ras7TT0N OF TiiK &ni,rwj%v. 2.» 
 
 Stack — Arms. 
 
 100. At this commaiHl, the front rank man of crory 
 even numbered file will jjasp his jjicce before liini, seizing' 
 it with the left hand above the middle band, and place the 
 butt outsidd and near theleftfoot, the barrel turned to the? 
 front, the ifiuzzle opposite the rifjht shoulder. At the 
 same titnc the front rank man of ercry odd numbered file 
 ■nill pass his piece before him, seizing it with the left hand 
 below the middle band, and hand it to the man next on the 
 left) the latter will receive it with the rig^ht hand two 
 inches above the middle band, throw the butt about thirty- 
 two inches to the front, opposite to his right shoulder, in- 
 clining the muzzle towards the right shoulder, and lock 
 the shanks of the two bayonets, the barrel remaining to 
 the rear ahd its shank above that of the first piece. The 
 tear sank man of every even file projects his bayonet for- 
 ward, the barrel to the right, and introduces it (usingboth 
 hands) between the muzzles and under the shanks of the 
 two other bayonets. He will then abandon the piece to 
 his file leader, who will receive it with the right hand un- 
 der the middle band, bring the butt to the front, holding 
 up his own piece and the stack with the left hand, ami 
 place the butt of this third piece bctwccr. the feet of the 
 man next on his right, the barrel to the right. The sCack 
 thus formed, the rear rank man of every odd file will pass 
 his piece into his left hand, the barrel turned to the front, 
 and, sloping the bayonet forward rest it on the stack. 
 
 li)l. ^Yhen organized coiypanies stack arms, the ser- 
 geants, (and also the corporals, if in the rank of file 
 closers,) will rest thoir pieces against ttie stacks nearest 
 them respectively, after ranks are broken and resume thevf 
 pieces on i':.v sisMial to ■>•' fi-u-in CKiik'--. 
 
'^i POSITION OP THK SOLDTBH. 
 
 " 192. The nien of both ranks haring assumed ihe position 
 of the soldier without arms, the instructor noaj give the 
 command : 
 
 2. Break rank*. 2. Maroh. 
 
 193. The instructor Tiavlng; reformed tLe ranks wiil 
 command : ' 
 
 Take — Arms, 
 
 194. At this command the rear rank man of every odd 
 file will withdraw his piece from the stack; the front rank 
 Hian of ever J even file will seize his own piece with the 
 left hand, and that of the man on his right with his right; 
 ihe rear rank man of every even file will seize his piece 
 with the right hand at the middle band, advancing for tke 
 purpose the hollow of the right f«ot as far as the right 
 heel of the file leader; these two men will raise *up the 
 stack to loosen tha sfeanks ; the front rank man of every 
 odd file receives his piece from the hand of the man next 
 on the left, and the four men retake the position of the 
 Boldier at order arms. 
 
 195. The instructor having brotight the mea to the posi- 
 tion of shoulder arms, will command : 
 
 Reverse — Arms- 
 
 Otie time and tito motions, 
 
 196. {First rAotiGn.) Grasp ike piece with tiae right 
 hand, the finger nail to the front, at the height of the 
 shoulder, turn the piece to the right and front of th® body, 
 and bring it reversed under the left arm, the barrel slop- 
 ing to the rear ; at the same time, slip the left hand to the 
 
 •gmall of the stock grasping it with the finger nails up. 
 
P08ITI0X OF TnK SOT-DIBB. 3S 
 
 197. {Second motion.) Remove and -carry briskly the 
 right hand to the rear of the body, and with it grasp 
 the piece between the middle and lower bands, the finger 
 nails outwards. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and ttco madotia. 
 
 198. (Fir et motion.) Bring the right hand briskly to 
 the front and with it grasp the piece at the swell of the 
 Slock, the finger nails inward; at the same time slip the 
 left hand to the butt and invert the piece with both han(I» 
 bringing it in front of the body, to the shoulder, and slip- 
 ping the right hand, let it fall to the hammer. 
 
 199. {Second motion. ) Drop the right hand by the side- 
 
 Jieat on — Arms. 
 One tivte (tnd two motions. 
 
 200. {First motion.) Grasp the piece at the height o 
 the shoulder with the right hand, the finger nails to tho 
 front, reverse it by turning it to the right in front of tho 
 body, let the muzzle rest on the left foot, the left hand rest- 
 ing on the butt. 
 
 201. {Second mofi&n.) Ilemore quickly the rigf^lit hand 
 to the butt and let it rest there, the finger nails outward ; 
 at the same time bow the head and bend the right knee. 
 
 [I^eynark.] (This movement is rarely used ezcept in 
 funeral ceremonies, Ac. ) 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and ttco motions. 
 
 202. {First motion.) Drop the right hand, and with it 
 seize the piece at the swell of the stock, with both hands^, 
 
3G rOSliluN OF TllH SOLDIEK. 
 
 (the left depressed and the right raised,) turn tlie piece in 
 front of the bod^^, bringing- it against the shoulder, and 
 slipping the right hand let it fall to the hammer. 
 
 203. {Second motion.) Drop the righthand bj the side. 
 
 Indirection of jlmis. 
 
 204. The men being nt orderod arms, and having the 
 bayonet in the scabbard, the instructor will command: 
 
 Inspection — AuMS. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 205. {First motion.) Face to the right once and a half 
 e arryicg the right foot perpendicular to the allignmcnt, 
 
 about six inches from, and at right angles Mith the left, 
 foot; seize promptly'' the peice with the left hand a little 
 above the middle band, incline the muzzle to the rear with" 
 "out displacing the heel of the butt, the rammer turned 
 towards the body ; carrj'ing at the same time the right hand 
 to the baj'onet as indicated in /?.» hayonet. 
 
 206. {Second motion.) Draw the bayonet from the 
 scabbard, carry and fix it on the muzzle; seize next the 
 rammer, draw it-as explained in the fifth time of loading 
 (see Z)raH-— Rammer, Xos. 217, 218, 219.) and let it glide 
 to the bottom of the boi-e. 
 
 207. ( Third motion. ) Face promptly to the front, seize 
 ' the peice with the right hand and retake the position of 
 
 order Mrm!*. 
 
 208. The insti'uctor will then inspect, in sviccession, the 
 piece of enfh man, in passing along the front of the rank. 
 Each as thi' insti'uctor roaches him will laise smartly his 
 piece v.'ith kis right hand^ seize it with the left near the 
 
I'UtilJlON (IK TUB SULL>n-,lt. 0/ 
 
 lower band, the lock to the front, the loft hand at the 
 height of the chin, the piece opposite to the left eye; the 
 instructor will take it with the right hand at the handle, 
 and after inspectinfj it, -will return it to the recruit, who 
 will receive it back with the right band and replace it ia 
 the position of order arms. 
 
 209. When the instructor shall have passed him, each 
 man will take the position prescribed in No. 203, return 
 the rammer as explained in the seventh time of loading;, 
 (sec ii'e/!n-»— Rammer, Nos. 221, 222, 223.) 
 
 210. If, instead ol tnitpcctioii of arms, the instructor 
 shall wish bayonets to be fixed, he will command: 
 
 iYx— Uayonet. 
 
 211. Take the position prescrioed in the first motion of 
 inspection arms. No. 203, fix bayonet and face to the front. 
 
 212. If the instructor should wish to ascertain if any 
 of the pieces are loaded, he will command : 
 
 6'p?*t » (7 — II A MM EU . 
 
 213. Put the rammers in the barrel as above explained, 
 and retake the position of order armif. 
 
 The instructor for the purpose stated, can take the 
 rammer by the small end, and spring it in the barrel, or 
 cause each man to make it ring in the barrel. 
 
 214. Each man after the instructor passes him will re- 
 turn rammer and resume the position of order arms. 
 
 Jiejitark. [The compiler would caution oflicers against 
 striking the buds of the pieces against the ground to 
 make the rammer J^pring, as it is liable to injure tbclock.] 
 
38 POSITION OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 Loading and Firing. 
 
 Load in ten times. 
 
 1. Load. 
 
 Two motions. 
 
 215. {First motion.) Drop the piece by a full exten- 
 sion of the left arm, seize it with the right hand above 
 and near the tail band ; at the same time carry the right 
 foot forvrard, the heel against the hollow of the left foot. 
 
 216. {Second motion.) Drop the piece with the right 
 band along the left thigh, seize it with the left hand at the 
 middle band, and with the left hand let it descend along to 
 the ground, without shock, the piece touching the left 
 thigh, and the muzzle opposite the centre of the body; 
 carry the right hand quickly to the cartridge box and 
 open it. 
 
 2. Handle — Cartridge. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 217. Seize the cartridge with the thumb and next two 
 fingers and place it between the teeih. 
 
 3. Tear — Cartridge. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 218. Tear the paper down to the powder, hold the cart- 
 ridge upright between the thumb and next two fingers, 
 near the top ; and in this position place it in front of and 
 near the muzzle, the back of the hand to the front. 
 
 4. Charge — CiRTRiDGE. 
 One time and one motion. 
 210. Fix the eye on the muzzle, turn quickly the back 
 
POSITIOH OF THE SOLDIER. 39 
 
 Of the risht hand towards the bodj, in order to discharge 
 the powder into the barrel, rai.e the elbon' to the he.vtt 
 of he wr.st shake the cartrid<.e, force it into the muzzle 
 and eave the hand reversed, the fingers extended, the 
 thumb extended along the barrel. 
 
 5. 2>ro«?— Rammer. 
 One time and three motiona, 
 220 {Fir.t motion. ) Drop smartly the right elbow and 
 seize the rammer between the thumb and fore-fino-er bent 
 the other fingers shut; dra.v it smartly, extending the 
 arm; seize the rammer again at the middle, between the 
 thumb and fore-finger, the hand reversed, the palm to the 
 ront, the nails up, the eyes following the movement of 
 the hand; clear the rammer from the pipes bj again ex- 
 tending the arm. 
 
 221. {Second motion.) Turn rapidly the rammer bo- 
 tween the bayonet and the face, closing the fingers, (the 
 rammer of the roar rank man grazing the right shoulder 
 of the man of the same iile in front, respectively,) the 
 rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the 
 butt of the rammer opposite to the muzzle, but not yet 
 inserted, the eyes fixed on the muzzle. 
 
 222. {Third motion.) Insert the butt of the rammer 
 and force it down as low as the hand. 
 
 6. i?a»i— Cartridge. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 223. Extend the arm to its full length to seize the ram- 
 mer between the right thumb extended and the fore-fin- 
 ger bent, the other fingers closed ; with force ram home 
 twice, (the right elbow down and near the piece,) and 
 
40 POSITION OP THE SOLDIER. 
 
 seize the ramuier at the little end, between the thumb and 
 fore-finger bent, the other fingers closed, the right elbow 
 touching the body. 
 
 7. Return — Rammeu. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 224. {Fir $t motion.) Draw briskly the rammer, re-seize 
 the middle bet tveen the thumb and fore-finger, the hand 
 reversed, the palm to the front, the nails up, the eyes fol- 
 lowing the movement of the hand, clear the rammer from 
 the barrel by extending the arm. 
 
 225. [Seeond motion.) Turn rapidly the rammer be- 
 tween the bayonet and face, closing the fingers, (the ram- 
 mer of the rear rank man grasing the right shoulder of 
 the man of the same file in front,) tho rammer parallel to 
 the bayonet, the arm extended, the little end of the ram- 
 mer opposite to the first pipe, but not yet inserted. The 
 eyes fixed on that pipe. 
 
 226. ( Third motion.) Insert the little end, and with the 
 thumb, which willTollow the movement, farce it as low as 
 the middle band; raise quickly the right hand a little 
 bent, place the little finger on the butt of the rammer and 
 force it down, at the same instant lower the left hand on 
 the barrel to the extent of the arm, without depressing 
 the shoulder. ' • 
 
 8. Cast — About. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 227. ( First motion. ) Raise the pieco with the left hand 
 along the left side, the hand at the hei^rht of the chin, the 
 fore-arm touching the piece, the bai'rel to the front; drop 
 at the same time tho right hand to seize the piece a little 
 
rosmON OF THE SOLDIER. 41 
 
 above tlie pmall of tlic stock, the fore-finger touching the 
 lock, the thumb on the S plate, and bring the right heel 
 to the side of the left. 
 
 228. (Second iiio'ion.) Make a half face to the rijht on 
 the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, the right foot 
 behind and at right angles with the left, the hollow of the 
 right foot against the heel of the left. At the same time 
 seize the small of the stock with the right hand, and bring 
 down the piece with both hands to the position of charge 
 hayonet. 
 
 9. Phime. 
 
 One time and one motion. ♦ 
 
 229. Sustain the piece with the left hand, (half cock the 
 piece,) brush ofl" the old cap and with the thumb and first 
 two fingers take a cap from the pouch, place it lirmly on 
 the cone, pushing it down with the thumb. 
 
 10. Shoidder — AuMS. 
 One time and ttro motions. 
 
 230. As from Charge— Bayontt. Nos. 161, 162. 
 
 To Load in Four Times. 
 
 231. The first time will be executed at the command 
 Load ; the three others at the words tv-o, three and four. 
 
 Load in four times— \jOkD. 
 
 222. Execute w^hat is prescribed for Load, Handle- 
 Cartridge, Tear — Cartridge and Charge — Cartridge. 
 
 TWO. 
 
 233. Drato — Ramm'.r and Ram — Cartridge. 
 
42 POSITION OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 THREE. 
 
 234. Return — Rammer and Castr— About. 
 
 FOUR,. 
 
 235. Prime and Shonldar — Arms. 
 
 To Load At Will. 
 
 236. The instructor wishing the men to execute the load- 
 ing without pause, will command. 
 
 Load at Will — Load. 
 
 237. At the command load, the men will execute the 
 loading as in four times, but without resting on the times. 
 
 Ready. 
 
 One time and four motions. 
 
 238. {First motion.) Make a half face to the right on 
 the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, place at the 
 same time the right foot behind, and at right angles with 
 the left, the hollow of the right'foot against the left heel ; 
 turn the piece with the left hand, the lock outwards, and 
 seize at the same time the small of the stock wiWi the right 
 hand, the piece perpendicular, and detached from the 
 shoulder; leave the left hand under the butt. 
 
 239. {Second^motion.) Bring the piece with the right 
 hand to the middle of the body, place the left hand just 
 above the lock, the thumb extended on the stock at the 
 height of the chin, the S plate almost turned towards the 
 body, the rammer obliquely to the left and front. 
 
 240. ( Third motion.) Place the thumb on the hammer, 
 the fore-tinger under and on the guard, the other three 
 fingers joined to the first, the elbow at the height of the 
 wrist. 
 
POSITION OF THK SOLDIKR. 43 
 
 241. ( Fourth motion. ) Close the right elbow smartly to 
 the body in cocking, seize the piece at the small of the 
 stock, lot it descend along the body in the left hand to 
 the tail bind, which will remain at the height of the 
 shoulder, and opposite the centre of the body. 
 
 Aim. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 242. Drop smartly the muzzle, the left hand remaining 
 at the tail band, support the butt against tkc right should- 
 er, the left elbow a little down, shut the left eye, direct 
 the right along the barrel, drop thr head upon the butt to 
 catch the object, and place the fore-finger on the trigger. 
 
 243. The rear rank will, at the same time, carry the 
 right foot about eight inches towards the left heel of the 
 man next on the right. 
 
 FiRB. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 244. Apply the fore-fingor with force to the trigger, 
 without further lowering or turning the head, and remain 
 in that position. 
 
 245. The instructor wishing the men to load, rom this 
 position, will command : 
 
 Load. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 246. {First motion. ) Bring back the piece quickly with 
 both hands, the rear rank man bringing the right foot be- 
 side the left; depress the butt strongly by extending the 
 right arm, and carry it with the arm thus extended to the 
 left side, the barrel turned to the front, and opposite the 
 
44 POSITION OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 left shoulder, open the left hand to let the piece slide 
 through it to the middle hand, the back of the hand to 
 the front, the left fore-arm touching the stock ; at the 
 same time face to the front, and cari'y the right foot for- 
 ward, the heel against the hollow of the left foot. 
 
 247. {Second motion.) Quit the hold of the right hand ; 
 with the left hand remaining at the middle hand, let the 
 piece descend to the ground, without shock, and take the 
 position of the second motion of the first time of loading. 
 
 248. The men being in the position of Fire, and the in- 
 structor wishing them to come to the position of Shoulder 
 — Arms, will command : 
 
 Shoulder — Aems. 
 
 One time and tico motions. 
 
 249. (First motion.) Bring back the piece with both 
 hands, face to the front, carry the piece to the left shoulder, 
 the right hand under the cock in the position as prescribed 
 in No. 141, the left hand under the butt. 
 
 250. (Second motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand 
 into position. 
 
 251. The men being in the position of Aim, if the in- 
 structor wishes, he may command : 
 
 Recover — Arms. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 252. At the word recover, Avithdraw the finger from the 
 trigger; at the command Arms, thi-o^v up smartly the 
 muzzle, and re-take the position of tlie fourth motion of 
 ready. 
 
 253. The men being in the position of rcacZv// the in- 
 structor will command; 
 
POSITION OF THE SOLPIER. 45 
 
 Shonliler — Arms. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 254. At the word ShoMcr, face to the front, hv'ing the 
 piece to the middle of the bodj; the left thumb at the 
 height of the chin, the piece supported by the left hand, 
 holding it fast above the lock ;. next place the righnhunib, 
 on the head of the cock, support tho fore-linger on the 
 trigger, sustain at the same time the cock in its descent 
 till it nearly touches the cone, raise the cock to the half 
 cock notch, (the reachino- of which will be both felt and 
 heard,) and seize the hamrlc of the i>iece, (or small of the 
 stock,.) with the right hand. At the word Armn, carry 
 the pi.ece smartly to tlic shoulder, and re-take the position 
 of shoulder — arms. 
 
 The Firing. 
 
 255. The firings arc direct or oblique, and \tili be exe- 
 cuted as follows : 
 
 The Direct Fire. 
 
 IftC. For the direct fire the instructor will command. 
 
 1. Fire hrj Spiad. 2. Sqnad. 3. Ready. 4. Aim. 5. 
 
 Fire. 6. Load^ 
 
 257. These several commands will be executed as Iras 
 been prescribed in the Mannal of Arms. 
 
 258. At the fourth command they will aim according to 
 the rank in which each man may find himself placed, the 
 rear rank men inclining forward a little tlie upper part of 
 the body, in order that their pieces may reach as much 
 bej-ond tlie front rank as possible. 
 
 259. At the sixth command, they will load their pieces 
 and return immediately to the position of ready. 
 
46 POSITION OF THG SOLDIER. 
 
 260. The instructor Trill re-commence the firing by the 
 commands; 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 
 
 261. When the instructor wisnes the firing to cease, he 
 will command ; 
 
 Cease— Firing. 
 
 262. At this command the men will cease firing, hut will 
 load their pieces if unloaded, and afterwards bring them to 
 a shoulder. 
 
 The Oblique Fire. 
 
 263. The oblique firings will be executed to the right 
 and left, and by the same commands as the direct fire, with 
 this single difference — the command Aim, will always be 
 preceded by the caution, right or left oblique. 
 
 Posiiion. of the Ranks, in ihe Oblique Fire to the 
 
 Right. 
 
 264. At the command ready, the two ranks will execute 
 what has been prescribed for the direct fire. 
 
 265. At the cautionary command, right oblique, the two 
 ranks will throw back the right shoulder and look steadily 
 at the object to be hit. 
 
 266. At the command Aim, each front rank man will 
 aim to the right without deranging his feet ; each rear 
 rank man will advance the left foot about eight inches to- 
 wards the right heel of the man next on the right of his 
 file leader, and aim to the right, inclining the upper par 
 of the body forward, and bending a little the left knee. 
 
 267. At the command load, both ranks will resume the 
 position of load, in the fire direct. 
 
POSITION OP THE SOLS>Icn. 41 
 
 Position of the Ranks in the Ohlique Ffre to tke 
 Left 
 
 268. At the command left ahliqne, the two ranks wil 
 throw back tbe left shoulder, and look tteadily at the ob- 
 ject to be hit 
 
 269. At the command aim, the front rank will take aim 
 to the left without deranging the feet; each man in the 
 rear r&nk will advance the right foot about eight inches 
 towards the right heel of the man next on the right of his 
 file leader, and aim to the left, inclining the upper part of 
 the body forward, and bending a little <be right knee. 
 
 270. At the command load, both ranks will come to the 
 position of load as prescribed in the direct lire. 
 
 To Fire by File, 
 
 271. The fire bj file, will bo executed by the two ranks, 
 the files of wliicb will fire successively, and without wait- 
 ing on each other, except for the first fire. 
 
 272. The instructor will command : 
 
 1. Fire by file: 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Conwicnce — 
 Firing. 
 
 273. At tbe third command, the two ranks will take tbe 
 position prescribed in tbe direct fire. 
 
 274. At the fourth command, the file on the right will 
 aim and fire, the men together, the rear rank man, in tak- 
 ing aim, will carry the right foot about eight inches to the 
 right. 
 
 275. The second file will aim at the instant the first 
 brings down the pieces to re-load ; and each file successive- 
 ly on to the left. 
 
-IS rosi-TIOX OF TUB SOi,DlEIl. 
 
 276. After ?he first fire, every man will load and fire 
 without waiting for the others. 
 
 277. The instructor wishing the Are to eease, will coiu- 
 Qiand: 
 
 Cease— FiuiNa. 
 
 278. At this command the men will cease firing. If they 
 have fired, they will load their pieces and biing them to 
 a shoulder ; if at the position of ready, they wiH half cock 
 and shoulder- arms. It in the position of Ami, they will 
 bi'iHg down their pieces, half cock and shoulder arms- 
 
 To Fire hy Rank. 
 
 ■279. The fire by rank will be executed by each cntii"c 
 rank, alternately. 
 
 280, The inst]'uctor will coraman-d : 
 
 1. Fire l>Tf rank. 2. Squad. 3. Heady, 4. Ecar raulc 
 5, Aim- 6. Fire, 7. Load. 
 
 281. At the third command, both ranks Avili take the po- 
 sition of ready. 
 
 282, At the seventh comm.and, th^^ rear rank will load 
 and come to the position of ready. 
 
 283. As soon as the instructor shall see several men in 
 the rear rank in the position of ready, ho will command : 
 
 1. Front-rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire, 4. Load, 
 
 284. At these commaads, the men in the front rank v.- ill 
 execute what has been presci'ib6,d lor the rear ra.nk, but 
 will not step off with the right foot. 
 
 285, The instructor will thus continue to alternate the 
 fire from rank to raAik, until he shall wish the firing to 
 ceas',^, whfii he will command cease yirm^, which will be 
 e^iccuted as heretofore prescribed. 
 
THE COMPANY. 
 
 PART SECOND 
 2'Ae Formation of the Company. 
 
 286. The company being assembled on its ground, will 
 be formed in two ranks, b}' the first serfjeant, who will 
 command : * 
 
 Fall In. 
 
 287. At which command the rank and file, (corporals 
 jind privates,) will form in two ranks faced to the right, 
 the tallest corporal on the, right, (or head of the com- 
 pany,) the two tallest men next, and so on down to tho 
 jcft or rear of the rank. 
 
 •288. This having been accomplii:»hed, the first sergeant 
 will command : 
 
 • FHONr. 
 
 289. At this command the company will face to the 
 front; the command Right — Dress, will then be given, 
 which will be executed as'has been jirescribed ; the men 
 keeping their etjes right until the command front, 
 
 290. The company should fall in at a support arms, and 
 if the roll is called, each man as he answi rs to his name, 
 will first bring his jiiece to a shoulder, and then to an ojv 
 der ar}ni>. 
 
 291. This being done the fust sergeant will bring (^9 
 company to a shoulder, and command ; 
 
ifjj SCHOOL or THE COMPAKJ'. 
 
 292. At this command the men count in each rank from 
 light to left, pronouncing in aloud and distinct voice, in 
 the same tone, without hurry, and without turning the 
 head, o«c, two, according to the place which each one 
 «!ccupies. 
 
 293. He will then divide the company into two equal 
 j^atoons, and each plat6on into two equal sections, place 
 the corporals in position in the front rank, on the right 
 and left of platoons, and report to the captain the forma- 
 
 ^ tion of the company. 
 
 294. The otficers and sergeants will now take their posts 
 a? follows : 
 
 295. The captain in the front rank on the rjght of the 
 company, touching with the left elbow. 
 
 296. The Jirst h'eM/enajii two paces in rear of and opposite 
 the centre of the fourth section. 
 
 297. The second lieutenant two paces in rear of and op- 
 posite the centre of the first platoon. 
 
 298- The third lieutenant two paces in rear of and op- 
 posite the centre of the second platoon. 
 
 299. The Jirst sergeant in the rear rank and covering 
 the captain. He is denominated the cohering sergeant, or 
 right guide of the company. 
 
 300. The second sergeant two paces in rear of and op- 
 posite the second file from the left of the company. lie is 
 designated as left guide of the company. 
 
 301. The third sergeant two paces in rear of and opposite 
 the second file from the right of the second platoon. 
 
 302. The/('»r^A sergeant two paces in rear of and op- 
 j.osite the second file from the left of the first platoon. 
 
 Z(iZ. .T\\Q fifth sergeant two paces in rear of and oppot^ite 
 tlie second file from Ihc right of the tirrt platoon. 
 
hCiiooL Of rut; i ipwr. 6G 
 
 S04. Absent oflicers an(Ksergeant3 will^be re-placed — 
 officers by sergeants, and sergeants by corporals.* 
 
 305. The officers and sergeants thus posted in the rear 
 constitute the rank of closers. This rank is two paces ia 
 rear of the r^ar rank. • 
 
 306. The pittneer is posted on the line of file closers on 
 the right; and the music in aline with the front rank, 
 four paces on its right, the drum on the right of the tifer 
 or bugler. 
 
 To Open Ranhs* 
 
 3p7. The company being at ordered aims, the ranks and 
 , tile .closers well aligned, to open ranks, tl^e instructor will 
 » command: ».' 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shonlder-r-X'&yi^. 4. Prt- 
 pare to open ranks. 5. To the rear open order. 
 
 308. At the fourth command the kft guide will place 
 himself on the left of the front rank. 
 
 309. At the fifth command the covering sergeant and 
 the left guide will step off smartly to the rear, four paces 
 from the front rank, in order to mark the alignment of the 
 rear rank. 
 
 310. The instructor having observed that Uiese two 
 guides are on a line parallel to the front rank, will com- 
 mand : 
 
 G. March. 
 
 311. At this command the front rank will stand fast. 
 
 *When the captain acts as instructor, or is in indepen- 
 dent command of the company, the first lieutenant takes 
 his post, and his post in turn is filled by the second lieu- 
 tenant, and so on. 
 
 • 
 -» 
 
S7 8CJI00L OF THK COJfFAST. 
 
 312. The rear rank will step to the rear without count- 
 ing the step, and will place itself on the alignment marked 
 out for it. "^ 
 
 313. The covering sergeant will then align the rear 
 rank on the left guide. 
 
 314. The file closers will step off at the same time with 
 the rear rank, and place themselves two paces in the rear 
 of it when it is aligned. 
 
 315. The instructor seeing the rank aligned, will com- 
 mand: 
 
 7. FaoNT. 
 
 316. At this command the sergeant on the left of the 
 rear rank, will return to his place as a file closer. ^- 
 
 Jllignments in Open Ranks. 
 
 317. The ranks being open, the instructor will, in the 
 first exercises, align the ranks, man by man, the better to 
 iuculculate the principles. 
 
 318. To effect this he will cause two men on the right or 
 left of each rank to march two or three paces forward, 
 and after having aligned them, command : 
 
 By file right (or left) — Dkess. 
 
 319. This command will be executed as has been prescri- 
 bed. The instructor will also cause the men to align 
 themselves backward, and he will be careful to observe 
 ^at they dress correctly, and that their arms are in proper 
 position. 
 
 Manudl of A^'ms. 
 
 olQ. The ranks being open, the instructor will place 
 
 ^ 
 
SCHOOL or XHK COMPACT 6S 
 
 himself in a position to see the ranks, and will command 
 the manual of arms in the following order :* 
 
 Present Armi. Shoulder Anno, 
 
 Order Arms. 
 
 dound Arms. 
 
 Raise Arms. Shoulder Arms. 
 
 Support Arms. Shoulder Arms. 
 
 Fix Bayonet. Shoulder Arms. 
 
 Charge Bayonet. Shoulder Arms. 
 
 Trail Arms. Shoulder Arms. 
 
 Unjix Bayonet. Shoulder Arms, 
 
 Secure Arms, Shoulder ^rms. 
 
 Load in ten times. 
 
 321. To close the ranks after the execution of the 
 manual of arms, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. Close order. 2. March. 
 
 322. At the command march, the rear lank will close up 
 in quick time, each man directing himself on his file leader. 
 
 323. The company should be exercised in the manual of 
 arjns, loading at will, Jiring by Jile, Jiving by rank, and 
 directjind oblique Jiring, by company as prescribed in the 
 squad drill, the instructor substituting the word company 
 fcr squad w^hercver it occurs. 
 
 324. At the preparatory command in firing, the captain 
 will promptly place himself opposite the centre of hia 
 company, and four paces in rear of the line o! file closers ; 
 
 *The compiler would suggest to officers the practica- 
 bility of causing the front rank to about face, and place 
 themselves at one end, so that they can better see the exe- 
 cution of the movement by the whole company. 
 
69 SCHOOL OF IBB COMPANY. 
 
 the covering sergeant will retire to that line, and place 
 himself opposite to his interval. This rule is general for 
 both captain and covering sergeant in all the different 
 firings. 
 
 To Fire hy tJie Rear Rank. 
 
 325. The instructor will cause the several fires to be 
 executed to the rear, that is, by the rear rank. To effect 
 this he will command : 
 
 \. Face by the rear rank. 2. Company. Z. Jlbout — Face. 
 
 326. At the first command the captain will step out and 
 place himself near to, and facing the right file of his com- 
 pany ; the covering sergeant and file closers, will pass 
 quickly through the captain's interval, and place them- 
 selves faced to the rear, the covering sergeant a pace be- 
 hind the captain, and the file closers two paces fi^om the 
 front rank opposite their places in line, each passing be- 
 hind the covering sergeant. 
 
 327. At the third command, which will be given at the 
 instant the last file closer shall have passed through the 
 interval, the company will face about; the captain will 
 place himself in his interva,l in the rear rank, now become' 
 the front, and the covering sergeant will cover him in the 
 front rank, now become the rear. 
 
 328. Faced by the rear rank, the diflerent firings will be 
 executed in the manner already prescribed. 
 
 329. The fire by file will commence on the left of the 
 company, now become the right ; and in the fire by rank, 
 the firing will commence with the front rank, now become 
 the rear. 
 
SCHOOL IHS COMHAHT. « (-' 
 
 330. To resume the proper front, the instructor will 
 command : 
 
 1. Face by the front rank. 2. Company. 3. About — Face. 
 
 331. At the first command the captain, covering ser- 
 geant and file closers will conform to what is prescribed in 
 Nos. 326, 327. 
 
 332. At the third command the companj having faced 
 about, the captain and covering sergeant will resume 
 their places in line. 
 
 To Advance in Line of Battle. 
 
 333. The company being in line and correctly aligned, to 
 march it b}'- the front the instructor will cause a sergeant 
 to take position six paces in advance of the eaptain. This 
 advanced sergeant, who is charged with the direction, 
 will take two points on the ground in the straight line to 
 the front to direct his course. 
 
 334. The instructor will then command : 
 
 1. Company — Forward. 2. March. 
 
 335. At the command march, the company will step off 
 with life. The directing sergeant will observe with the 
 greatest precision, the length and cadence of the step, 
 marching on the two points he has chosen ; he will take in 
 succession, and a little before arriving at the points near- 
 est him, new points in advance, exactly in the same line 
 with the first two, and at the distance of some fifteen or 
 twenty paces from each othei-. The captain will march 
 steadily in the trace of the directing sergeant, keeping al- 
 ways six paces from him. The men will march with the 
 li.'ad direct to the front, touch lightly the elbow towards 
 the captain, and resist pres.-ure coming- from the opposite 
 
71 Si'HuOL V¥ lUK COMPANY, 
 
 side. The file closers will march at the habitual distance 
 of two paces behind the rear rank. 
 
 336. If the men lose the step, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 To </ie— Step. 
 
 337. At this the men will glance towards the directing 
 sergeant, re-take the step from him, and again direct the 
 eyes to the front. 
 
 338. The instructor wishing to halt the company, -will 
 command ; 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 
 
 339. At the second command the company will halt; the 
 directing sergeant will remain in advance, unless ordered 
 to return to the line of file closers. 
 
 340. The captain will then rectify the alignment, by the 
 commands and according to the principles prescribed in 
 No. 9. 
 
 To March in Retreat. 
 
 341* The company being halted and correctly aligned, 
 to cause it to march in retreat, the instructor will place the 
 directing sergeant sis paces in rear of the line of file 
 closers, and in the same straigkt line with the covering 
 sergeants, and will then command : 
 
 1. Com-pany. 2. About — Face. 
 
 342. The company and directing sergeant having faced 
 to the rear, the instructor will command : 
 
 3. Co/npan?/— Forward. 
 
 343. At this command tho. covering sergeant will step 
 into the line of file closers, opposite to his inlerval. and 
 
SCHOOL or THE COMPANY. 72 
 
 the captain will place himself in the rear rank now become 
 the front. 
 
 344. This disposition being promptly made, the instruc- 
 tor will command : 
 
 4, March. 
 
 345. At this the directing sergeant, the captain and the 
 men will conform themselves to what has been prescribed 
 in No. 335. 
 
 346. The instructor will cause to be executed, marching 
 in retreat, all that has been prescribed for marching in ad- 
 vance; the commands and the means of execution will be 
 the same. 
 
 Ohllqi\e March in Line of Buttle. 
 
 347. The company being in the direct march, when the 
 instructor shall wish to cause it to march obliquely, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. RigJit (or left) oblique. 2. March. 
 
 848. At the command march the company will take the 
 oblique step, and execute the movement as prescribed in 
 No. 53. 
 
 349. In the oblique march the men not having the touch 
 of elbows, the guide will always be on the side to which 
 the oblique is maae, without any indication to that effect 
 being given, and when the direct march is resumed, the 
 guide will be, equally without indication, on the side where 
 it was previous to the march. 
 
 350. When the instructor shall wish the direct march to 
 be resumed, he will command . 
 
 1. Forvnrd. 2. March. 
 
73 SCHOOL OF THB COMPANT. 
 
 351. At the command march the company will resume 
 the direct step. '^ 
 
 352. The instructor should now exercise the company in 
 the following commands^ according to the principles pre- 
 scribed in squad drill : 
 
 1. Mark Time. 2. Mabch. 
 
 1. For tear d. 2. March. 
 
 1. Common Time. 2. March. 
 
 1. Double Quick, 2. March. 
 
 1. Quick Time. 2. March. 
 
 1. Change Step. 2. March. 
 
 1. Right About. 2. Ma ich. 
 
 1. liight About. 2. Halt. 
 
 353. When the company is inarching in the double quick, 
 the pieces should be carried at a right shoulder shift arms 
 or a trail arms, and the distance between the ranks should 
 be twenty-six inches. 
 
 354. When the pieces are carried on the right shoulder, 
 in quick time, the distance between the ranks should be 
 sixteen inches. 
 
 355. Whenever the company is halted, the men will 
 bring their pieces at once to a shoulder at the command 
 halt; and the rear rank will close up to its proper distance 
 of thirteen inches. These rules are general. 
 
 To March hy the Flanh. 
 
 356. The company being in line of battle, and at a halt, 
 when the instructor shall wish to cause it to march by the 
 right flank, he will command : 
 
 1. Company right — Face. 2. Forward — March. 
 
 3a7. At th» first command, the company willfacsr to th« 
 
SOBOOL or XJiK (.'0H1«1.N"Y. (4 
 
 right, the covering sergeant will place himself at the bead 
 of the front rank, the captain having stepped out for the 
 purpose, so far as to find himself by the side of the ser- 
 geant, and on his left ; the front rank will dot ble as is 
 prescribed in Xo. 77 ; the rear rank will, at the same time, 
 side step to the right one pace, and double i» the same 
 manner so that when the movement is completed, the files 
 will be formed of four rnen aligned, and elbow to elbow. 
 The intervals will be preserved. 
 
 358. The file closers will also juove by side step to the 
 right, so tha» when the ranks are formed, thej will be two 
 paces from the rearmost rank. 
 
 359. At the command march, the company will move oflf 
 briskly in quick time ; the covering sergeant at the head 
 of the front rank, and the captain on his left, will march 
 straight forward. The men of each file will march abreast 
 of their respective front lank men, heads direct to the 
 front ; the file closers will march opposite their places in 
 line of battle. 
 
 360. The instructor will cause the march by the loft flank 
 to be excuted by the same commands, substituting left for 
 right; the ranks will double as has been prescribed in 
 No. 83, the rear rank will side step to the left one pace 
 before ioubling. 
 
 361. At the instant the company faces to the left, the 
 left-guide will place himself at the hsad of the front rank; 
 the captain will pass rapidly to the left, and place hiniself 
 by the right side of this guide; the covering sergeant will 
 replace the captain in the front rank, the moment the 
 latter quits it to go to the left. 
 
 362. Should the instructor wish to face the company 
 
75 scuoot or thb compast. 
 
 to the right or left, without doubling files, be will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Compani/, in two ranks, right (or left) — Face. 
 
 362. At which command, the company will face to the 
 right or left, without doubling. 
 
 To Change Direction hj File. 
 
 263. The company being facod by .he flank, and either 
 in march, or at a halt, when the instructor shall wish to 
 cause it to wheel by file, he will command : 
 
 1. By file left {or right.) 2. March. 
 
 365. At the command march, the first file will wheel ; 
 if to the side of the front rank man, the latter will take 
 care not to turn at once, but to describ e a short arc of a cir- 
 cle, shortening a little the first five or si* steps in order to 
 give time to the fourth man of this file to conform himself 
 to this movement. If the wheel be to the side of the rear 
 rank, the front rank man will wheel in the step of twenty- 
 eight inches, and the fourth man will conform himself to 
 the movement by describing a short arc of a circle, as has 
 been explained. 
 
 3^6. Each file will come to wheel on the same ground 
 when that which preceded it wheeled. 
 
 367. When the company is marching by the flank and 
 the instructor wishes to halt it and face it to the front, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 368. The second and third commands will be executed as 
 has been prescribed in No. 81, 82, 83. As soon as the files 
 have undoubled, the rear rank will close to its proper dis' 
 lance. 
 
SBnOOL OF THE COMPANY. ' 7$ 
 
 369. The captain and covering sergeant, as well as the 
 left guide, if the march be by the left flank, will return to 
 their habitual places in line at Uie instant the company 
 faces to the front. 
 
 370. The instructor may then rectifiy the alignment hw 
 the means prescribed. 
 
 371. The company being in march by the flank, to form 
 it on the right (or left) by file into line of battle, the in- 
 structor will command : 
 
 1. On tJie right, bi/ file into line. 2. March, 
 :^72. At the command march, the rear rank men doubled, 
 will mark time, the captain and covering sergeant will 
 turn to the right, march straight forward, and be halted 
 hy the instructor, when they shall have passed at least 
 six paces beyond the rank of tile closers ; the captain will 
 place himself correctly on the line of battle, and will direct 
 the alignment as the men of the front ranfc successively 
 arrive ; the covering sergeant will place himself behind 
 the captain at the dis'anee of the rear rank; the two men 
 on the right of the front rank doubled, will continue to 
 march, and passing beyond the covering sergeant and the 
 captain, will turn to theright,- after turning, they wili 
 continue to march elbow to elbow, and direct themselves 
 toward the line- of battle, but ^vhen they shall arrive at 
 two paces from this line, the even number will shcrtcn the 
 step so that the odd number may precede him on the line, 
 the odd number placing himself by the side and on the 
 left of the captain ; the even number will afterwards ob- 
 lique to the loft, and place himself on the left of the odd 
 number; the next two men of the front rank doubled. 
 
7^ .SLUOOL Of IHK DOM PAS r, 
 
 will i^ass in the same manner behind the two first, turn 
 then to the right, and place themselves according to the 
 means just explained, to the left and by the side of the 
 two men already established on the line of battle ; the re- 
 maining files of this rank will follow in succession, and be 
 formed to the left in the same manner. 
 
 373. The i-ear rank doubled will execute the movement 
 in the manner already explained for the front rank, taki-ng 
 care not to commence the movement until four men of the 
 front rank are established on the line ; the rear rank men 
 as they arrive on the line, will cover accurately their file 
 leaders. 
 
 374. If the company be marching by the left flank, and 
 the instructor wishes to cause it to form by file on the left 
 into line of battle, he will command r 
 
 1. On the left, hy file into line. 2. March. 
 
 375. At the second command, the same movements will 
 be made to the left ; in this case the odd numbers wilf 
 shorten the* step, so that the even numbers may 
 precede them on the line. The captain, placed on the left 
 of the front rank, and the left guide, will return to their 
 places in line of battle, by order of the instructor, after 
 the corapany shall be formed and aligned. 
 
 376. The instructor should at first cause this movement 
 to be executed separatelj^ by each rank doubled, and after- 
 wards by the two ranks united and doubled. He should 
 also place himself on the line cf battle, and without the 
 point where the right or left is to rest, in order to estab- 
 lish the base of alignment, and afterward will assure him- 
 self that each file conforms itself to what has just been 
 5)rosLcrihcd. 
 
377. If the company be marchipg by the right flank, 
 and the instructor should wish to undouble the files, whick 
 inight sometimes be found necessary, he will cause arms to 
 OQ shouldered or supported, and command : 
 
 1. In I ICO ranks, undouhle files. 2. March. 
 
 ^78. At the second command, the odd numbers will con- 
 tinue to march straight forward, the even numbers will 
 shorten the step, and obliquing to the left will place them- 
 selves promptly behind the odd numbers; the rear rank 
 will gain a step to the left so as to retake the touch of 
 elbows on tJie side of the front rank. 
 
 ;;7y. If the company be marching by the loft flank., it 
 u-ill be the evoa numbers who will ci^ntinuc to march for- 
 ward, and the odd numbers who will undouble. 
 
 380. If the iustiuctor should wish to double the files, he 
 will command : 
 
 ], In four ranks, doiihle fUn^ 2. Maiich. 
 ■m. At the command mavdi, the files will double in the 
 iuanner as explained, when the company faces bv the ric^hi 
 or left flank. ' " 
 
 382. The instructor should also cause these movement 
 to be executed in double quick time. 
 
 Movements in Column. 
 383 The company being in n^.arch bj the right flank, 
 and the instructor wishing to form into line, mil command, 
 1. % compaay into line. 2. March. 
 384. At the command march, the covering-sergeant will 
 continue to march straight forward ,• the men will ad.anc. 
 th. nght shoulder, take the double quick step, and moT. 
 
70 SCHOOL or THE COilfAAT. 
 
 into line by the shortest route, taking care to uadowbie 
 the files, and to come on the line one after the other. 
 
 385. As the front rank men successively arrive into line 
 with the covering sergeant, thej will take from him the 
 step, and then turn their ejos to the front. 
 
 386. The men of the rear rank will conform to the move- 
 ments of their respective file leaders, but without endea- 
 Toring to arrive in line at the same time with the latter. 
 
 387. At the instant the movement begins, the instructor 
 will face the company and observe the execution ; and as 
 soon as the company is formed, he Mill command, guideJeft. 
 
 388. At the cemmand guide left, the second sergeant 
 will promptly place himself in the front rank, on the left,^ 
 lo serve as guide, and the covering sergeant who is on the 
 opposite flank, will remain there. 
 
 389. When the company is in march by the left flank, 
 this movement will be executed according to the same 
 principles and by the same commands. The company being 
 formed, the captain will command, guide right ;. the cover- 
 ing sergeant, who is on right of the front rank, will 
 serve as guide, and the second sergeant placed on the left 
 flank will remain there. * 
 
 390. Thus in column by C()mp.any, right or left in front, 
 the covering sergeant and the second sergeant of each 
 company, will always be placed on the right and left, re- 
 spectively, of the front rank, and they will be denominat- 
 ed right guide and left guido, and the one or the other 
 charged with the direction. 
 
 391. The company being in march by the flank, and the 
 instructor wishing to form platoons, he will command : 
 
 1. By jjlaioon into line, 2. 3Iakcii. 
 
SCnOOi. OF THE CUMPANT. 80 
 
 392. This movement will be executed by each platoon 
 according to the above principles. The captain will prompt- 
 ly place himself before the centre of the first platoon, and 
 the first lieutenant before the centre of the second, and 
 command, without waiting for each other — guide left (or 
 right) as soon as the platoons are formed. 
 
 393. At the command, guide left {or right), the guide of 
 each platoon will pass rapidlj- to the flank indicated, if 
 not already tb«ro. 
 
 394. The right guido of the company will always serve 
 39 the guide of the right or left of the first platoon, and 
 the left guide of the company will serve, in like manner, 
 as the guide of the second platoon. 
 
 395. Thus in a column, by platoon, there will be but one 
 guide to each platoon, and he will always be placed on the 
 jeft flank, if the right is in front, and on the right flank if 
 the left is in front. 
 
 396. In these movements, the file closers will follow the 
 platoons to which they are attached. 
 
 397. The instructor should exercise the company in pas- 
 sing, without a halt, from the march to the front to the 
 march by the flank, and reciprocally, and in either case he 
 will command. 
 
 1. Company by the right (or left) fiotk. 2. March 
 
 398. At the command march, the company will face to 
 the right or left, as is prescribed in No. 88, and the cap- 
 tain, file closers and guides will conform themselves to 
 what has been prescribed for each, in the march by the 
 flank, or the front, 
 
 ^99, If after facing to the right or lefi. ia- niarrhing, th";- 
 
SI SCHOOL tf? THfci COMPASr. 
 
 company find itself faced by the rear rank, the captarn 
 "svill place hiinstdf two paces behind the centre of the front 
 lank, now tiio rear, the guides vs ill pass to the rear rank, 
 now leadinfj, and the file closers will march in front of this 
 rank. 
 
 400. Wlien the company i.s marching in column by pla- 
 toon, right in front, and the instructor wishes to march it 
 by the flank in the same direction, he will command : 
 
 1. Column, hy the right jlank. 2, By file left. 3. March, 
 
 401. At the second command, each chief of platoon and 
 its guide, will pass rapidly to the right flank, to conduct it. 
 
 402. At the command march, each platoon will face to 
 the right in marching, wheel by file to the left, and then 
 march straight forward ; the leading file of the second pla- 
 toon will unite with the rear file of the first , the chief and 
 guide of the second will pass through the interval to their 
 places as file closers. 
 
 403. When the left is in front, the movement wili be 
 executed by inverse means, substituting in the command, 
 lefi fov ricjh', and rif/ht fov left. The captain, (if a hall 
 he will not irumediately commanded), will replace the first 
 lieutenant and conduct the left flank, and the covering 
 sergeant wili return to his place on the right fl ink now be. 
 come the rear. 
 
 404. The company being at a halt, in line of battle, the 
 Instructor, wishing to break it into column, by pLitoon to 
 ,the right, will command t 
 
 1. l',y lAatoon, right u-heel. 2. MaRch. 
 
 403, At th.3 first command, the chiefa of platoon will 
 rapidly pluc'-j ihemselves two paces before tha centre* •( 
 
their respectire platoons, the lieutenant parsing around 
 The left of the company. Ther need not occupy theni- 
 i-elves with dressing one upon the other. The coveriug^ 
 sergeant will replace the captain in the front rank. 
 
 406- At the command march, the right front rank man 
 of each platoon will face to the right, the covering ser- 
 geant standing fast ; the chief of each platoon will movo 
 quickly by the shortest line, a little beyond the point at 
 which the marching flank will rest when the wheel shall 
 be completed, face to the late rear, and place himself so 
 that the line wljich he forms with the msn on the right 
 (who had faced) shall be perpendicular to that occupied by 
 the coiupan}' in line of battle; each platoon will wheel ac 
 cording to the principles prescribed for tho wheel on a 
 fixed pivot, and when the man who conducts the marching 
 flank shall approach near to the peri>endicul!ir, its chief 
 will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 407. At the command halt, which will hv given at the 
 instant the' man who conducts the marching flank shall 
 have arrived at three paces from the perpondicular, the 
 platoon will halt; the covering sergeant will move to the 
 point where the left of the first platoon is to rest, passing 
 b}' the front rank ; the second -«ergeaut will place himser 
 in like manner, in regard to the second platoon. Each 
 will take care to leave between himself and tho man on the 
 right of his platoon, a space equal to its front ; the cap- 
 tain and first lieutenant will look to this, .and each take 
 care to align the sergeant between himself and the man af 
 the platmm who had faced to the right. 
 
83 SCHOOL or THH COilPAXt, 
 
 408. The guide of each platoon, being thus established 
 on the perpendicular, each chief will place himself two 
 paces outside of his guide, and facing towards him, will 
 command : 
 
 409. The alignment being ended, each chief of platoon 
 will command Fuoxr, and place himself two paces before 
 its centre. 
 
 410. The file closers will conform themselves to the 
 movements of their respective platoons, preserving always 
 the distance of two paces from the rear rank. 
 
 411. Should the instructor wish to break by platoon to 
 the left, he will execute it according to the same principles 
 and by inverse means, and will give the following com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Bi/ platoon left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Platoon. 4. Halt. 
 5. Right — Dress. 6. FROiJT. 
 
 Post of Officers in Column. 
 
 412. In column hy company the captain is two paces in 
 front of the centre of his company ; the first sergeant on 
 the right of the front rank, and is the right guide of the 
 company ; the second sergeant on the left of the front 
 rank, and is the left guide of the company. 
 
 413. In cohimn by platoon the captain commands the 
 first platoon, the first lieutenant the second platoon ; each 
 two paces in front of the certre of his platoon; the first 
 sergeant is the guide of the first platoon ; the second ser- 
 geant is the guide of the second platoon ; they will be, un- 
 less otherwise ordered, on the left of the front rank of 
 their respective platoons, if the column is right in front, 
 aoi oa th2 ri^^bt, if tb? left is in front. 
 
kMiiiDl. OF THE COMPANT, 64 
 
 414. In column by section the captain commands the 
 first section ; the first lieutenant the third; the second 
 lieutenant the second ; the third lieutenant the fourth ; 
 each two paces in front of his section ; the first sergeant 
 is guide of the first section, the second sergeant is guide of 
 the fourth ; the third is guide of the third ; and the 
 fourth is guide of the second ; each on the left front rank 
 of his section, if the column be right in front, and on the 
 right if the left be in front. 
 
 415. In column b}' company, platoon or section, the file 
 closers not otherwise provided for, are in their proper 
 places behind the rear rank of their respeotire sub-divi- 
 sions. 
 
 To March in Column. 
 
 316. The company having broken by platoon, right (or 
 left) in front, the instructor wishing to cause the column 
 to march, will command : 
 
 1. Column forward. 2. Guide left (or right.) 3. March. 
 
 417. At the command march, promptly repeated by the 
 chiefs of platoon, th*^ whole will step ofi" together. 
 
 418. The men will each feel lightly the elbow of his 
 neighbor toward the guide, and conform himself to the 
 principles prescribed in the school of the squad. 
 
 419. The man next to the guide, in each platoon, will 
 take care never to pass him, and also to march always 
 about six inches to the right (or left) from him, in order 
 not to push him out of the directiofl. 
 
 420. The leading guide will observe, with the greatest 
 precision, the length and cadence of the step, and maintain 
 the direction of his match by means prescribed in No. 335. 
 
>?5 «t'HOUl, OP lUK t'CJilPASy. 
 
 421. The following guide will march exactly in the trace 
 of the leading one, preserving between the latter and him- 
 self a distance precisely equal to the front of his platoon, 
 and inarching in the same step with the leading guide. 
 
 422. If the following guide lose his distance from the 
 one leading (which can only happen by his own fault,) he 
 will correct himstlf by slightly lengthening oi^shortening 
 a few steps, in order that there may not be sudden quicken- 
 ings or slackenings in the march of his platoon. 
 
 423. The guide of each sub-division in column will be 
 responsible for the direction, distance and step. 
 
 424. The chief of each sub-division, will be responsible 
 for the order and conformity of his sub-division with the 
 movements of the guide, accordingly the chief will fre- 
 quently turn, in the march, to observe his sub-division. 
 
 425. In column the chiefs »f sub-divisions will always 
 repeat, with the greatest promptitude, the commands 
 march and halt; they will give no other command given by 
 the instructor, but may explain, if necer.sary, to their sub- 
 divisions, in an under tone, what they will have to exe- 
 cute, as indicated by the commands of caution. 
 
 To Change D'rection. 
 
 426. The changes of direction of a column while march- 
 ing, will be executed according to the pi-inciples prescri- 
 bed for wheeling on the march. Whenever, therefore, the 
 direction of the column is to be changed, the instructor 
 will change the guide^ if not already there, to the flank 
 opposite the side to which the change is to be made. 
 
 427. The column being in march i-ight in front, if it be 
 the wish of the instructor to change* direction to the right, 
 
* SCHOOL OF IHB COMPAN V. 86 
 
 he will give the order to the chief of the first platoon, and 
 immediately go himself or send a marker to tlie point at 
 which the change of direction is to be made ; the instruc- 
 tor or marker will place himself on the direction of the 
 guides, so as to present the breast to that flank of the 
 column. 
 
 428. The leading guide will direct hia march on that 
 person, so that, in passing, his left arm may just graze hia 
 breast. "When the leading guide shall have approached 
 near the marker, the chief of the platoon will cemmand: 
 
 1. Eight icheel. 2, March. 
 
 429. The first command will be given, when the platoon 
 is at the distance of four paces from the marker. 
 
 430. At the com in and march, which will be pronounced 
 at the instant the guide shall have arriveH opposite the 
 marker, the platoon will wheel to the right, conforming to 
 what has been prescribed in the school of the squad. 
 
 431. The wheel being almost completed, the instructor 
 will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 
 
 432. And when the wheel is finished, he will command : 
 
 4. March. 
 
 433. At which the platoon will march straight forward 
 in the new direction. 
 
 434. The second platoon will continue to march straight 
 forward till up with the marker, when it will wheel to the 
 riffht, ai'd i-e-take the direct march b}- the same commands 
 and the same means which governed the first platoon. 
 
 435. Should the instructor wish to change the direction 
 to the l.eft. Via will command rfuid'! right. At lhi« covi^- 
 
87 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 mand the two guides will move rapidly to the right of 
 their respective platoons, each passing in front of his sub- 
 division ; the men will take the touch of elbows to the 
 right ; the instructor conforming to what has been pres- 
 cribed. 
 
 436. The change of direction to the left will then 
 be executed according to the same principles as the change 
 ol direction to the right, but by inverse means. 
 
 437. When the change of direction is completed, the in- 
 structor will command, guide left. 
 
 438. The change of direction in a column left in front, 
 will be executed according to the same principles. 
 
 439. Each chief will observe that his subdivision arrives 
 at the point of change in a square with the line of direc- 
 tion; with this view, he will face to his subdivision when 
 the one wWch precedes has commenced to turn or to 
 wheel, and he will be watchful that it continues to march 
 squarely until it arrives at the point where the change of 
 direction is to cpmmence. 
 
 To halt the column and to form to the right or 
 left into line, either at a halt or on the march. 
 
 440. The column being in march, right in front, to halt 
 it the instructor will command : 
 
 1 Cohimn — 2 Halt. 
 
 441. At the second command, promptly repeated by the 
 chiefs of platoons, the column will halt; the guides also 
 will stand fast, although they C'^ay have lost both distance 
 and direction. 
 
 442. The instructor wishiHg to lorm ii into line will 
 place himself at platoon distance in frent of the leading 
 
StllOOL OF rUR COMPANT. Sft 
 
 guide, face to him and rectify, if necessary, the position 
 of the guide beyond J which being executed he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Left — Dress. 
 
 443. At this command, which will not be repeated by 
 the chiefs of platoon, each of them will place himself 
 briskly two paces outside of his guide and direct the 
 alignment of the platoon perpendicularly to the direction 
 of the column. 
 
 444. Each chief having aligned his platoon, will com- 
 mand Front, and return quickly to his place in the column. 
 
 445. The instructor having seen this disposition made, 
 will command : 
 
 1. Left i)ito line, wheel. 2. March. 
 
 446. At the command inarch, briskly repeated by the 
 chiefs of p atoon, the front rank man on the left of each 
 platoon will face to tlie left, and place his breast lightly 
 against the arm of the guid - by his side, who stands fast ; 
 the platoons will then wheel to the left on the principles of 
 wheels from a halt. 
 
 447. Each chief will turn to his platoon to observe its 
 movements, and wht?n the marching flank of his platoon 
 is three paces from the line, he will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 448. The chief of the second platoon having halted it, 
 will return to his place as file closer, passing Iround the 
 left of his subdivision. 
 
 449. The captain having halted the first platoon, will 
 move rapidly to the j^oint at which the rig^t of the com- 
 pany will revt in lino of battle, und command ; 
 
*J1 «CHt)Cr. <1P lUli COMBANY. 
 
 Right. Dress. 
 
 450. At this command, the two platoons will dress up on 
 the alignment. 
 
 451. The company being aligned, the captain will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Front. 
 
 452. The instructor seeing the company in line of battle* 
 will command: 
 
 Guides. Posts. 
 
 453. At this command, the covering sergeant will cover 
 the captain, and the left guide will return to his place as 
 file closer. 
 
 453. If the column be left in frorjt, and the instructor 
 wishes to form it to the right into line of battle, it will 
 be d»ne upon the same principals and bv inverse means. — 
 
 The instructor will command : 
 
 1. Right into line wheel. 2, March. 
 
 454. At the command mar^'h, the front rank man on 
 the right of each platoon will face to the right and 
 place his breast lightly against the left arm of the 
 guide by his side, who stands fast; each platoon will 
 wheel to the right, and will be halted by its chief, 
 when the marching flank has approached near the line of 
 battle ; for this purpose he will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 455. The pl^oon having halted, the chief of the second 
 platoon will return to hia place as file closer, and the cap- 
 tain will move briskly to the point at which the left of the 
 company is to rest? and command ; * 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 90 
 
 Ze/V. Dress. 
 
 456. At the command, the two platoons will dress up on 
 the alignment; the man on the left of the second platoon, 
 opposite the instructor, will place his breast lightly against 
 the right arm of this oflicer, and the captain will direct 
 the alignment from the left on the man on the opposite 
 flank of the company. 
 
 457. The company being aligned the captain will com- 
 mand: 
 
 Front. 
 
 458. The instructor seeing the company in line of battle» 
 will command : 
 
 Guides. Posts. 
 
 459. At the command, the captain will move to the 
 right of his company, the coyering sergeant will cover 
 him, ana the left guide will return to his place as file closer. 
 
 460. If the column be marching right in front, and the 
 instructor should wish to form it into line without halt- 
 ing the column, he will give the command prescribed in 
 No. 444, and move rapidly to platoon distance in front of 
 the leading guides. _ 
 
 461. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt short, the in- 
 structor, the chiefs of platoon, and the platoons will con- 
 form to what has been prescribed in No. 445. 
 
 462. If the column be in march left in front, the forma- 
 tion will be made, according to the same principles and by 
 inveise means. 
 
 463. If the column be marching right in front, to form 
 it into line without halting, and to march the company in 
 line to the front, the command is : 
 
SI SCHOOL or THE COMPAKT. 
 
 1, By lilatQonSfleft wTitel. 2. March. 
 
 464. At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
 chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt; the man next 
 to the left guide in each platoon will mark time; the 
 platoons will wheel to the left ; conforming to the princi- 
 ples of the wheel on a fixed pivot. 
 
 465. When the right of the platoons shall arrive near 
 the line of battle, the instructor will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide right (or left.) 
 
 466. At the fourth command, given the instant the 
 wheel is completed, the company will move promptly 
 together, the captain, the chief of the second platoon, 
 the covBring sergeant and the left guide will take their 
 positions as in line of battle. 
 
 467 At the fifth command, to be given immediitely 
 after the fourth, the captain and covering sergeant, if not 
 already there, will move briskly to the side on which the 
 guide is designated. 
 
 468. The same principals are applicable to a column 
 left in front. 
 
 To break tke company into platoons. 
 
 469. The company marching right in front and suppos 
 ed to make part of a column, to cause it to break by pla. 
 toon, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. Break into platoons. 2. March. 
 
 470. At the first command, the captain will place him- 
 self before the centre of the first platoon and give the 
 caution: 1. First -platoon. 2. Forward; the first lieu- 
 tenant will pass quickly around the left to the centre o*^ 
 
SCHOOL OF TSB COyTAYT. 92 
 
 hifl plato«n and give the cautioH. 1. iSnond platoon. 2, 
 Mark time. 
 
 471. At the command march, promptlr repeated bv the 
 captain and first lieutenant, the first platoon will continue 
 to march straight forward. — the covering sergeant, as 
 joon as the flank is disengaged will 5hift to the left fiank of 
 this platoon; the second platoon will begin to mark time 
 and its chief will immediatel.y add 1. Right ohliqxie. 2. 
 March. The last command will be given so that this 
 platoon may commence tobliquing the instant the rear 
 rank of the first platoon shall have passed. 
 
 472. The men will.shorten the step in (/bliqing, so that 
 when the command forioard march is given, the platoon 
 may have its exact distance. 
 
 473. The guide of the second plato»n being near the. di- 
 rection of the guide of the first, the chief of the second 
 will command Forward, and add March the instant that 
 the guide of his platoon shall cover the guide of the first. 
 
 474. In a column, left in front, the company will break 
 into platoons by inverse means, applying to the first pla- 
 toon all that has been prescribed for the second and reci- 
 procally. 
 
 475. In this case, the left' guide of the company will 
 shift to the right flank of the second platoon, and the cov- 
 ering sergeant will remain on the right of the first. 
 
 To reform the compcniy. 
 
 476. The column, by platoon, being in march, right in 
 front and the instructor wishing to form it into company 
 will command : 
 
 1. Form company, 2, Mabch. 
 
93 scnoOL OF the compakt. 
 
 477. At the first command, the captain will give ths 
 caution, 1. Firnt platoon; 2. Right oblique; the first 
 lieutenant will give the caution. 1. Second platoon. 2. 
 Foricard. 
 
 478. At the command march, promptlj repeated by tha 
 captain and first lieutenant, the first platoon will obligue 
 to the right in order to unmask the second — the covering 
 sergeant will return to the right of the company, and the 
 second will continue to inarch straight forward. 
 
 479. When the first platoon shall have nearly unmasked 
 the second, the captain will command : Mark time, and 
 at the instant the unmasking shall be complete, he 
 will add : 2. March. The first platoon will then cease t<> 
 oblique, and will mark time. 
 
 480. In the meantime the second platoon will have con- 
 tinued to march straight forward, and when it shall be 
 nearly up with the first, the captain will command, for- 
 toarc?, and at the instant the t^vo platoons unite, he will 
 add, March ; the first platoon will then cease to mark 
 time, the whole company stepping ofl:' together. 
 
 481. In a column left in front, the same movements will 
 be executed by inverse means, the chief of the second 
 platoon giving the command, foricard, and the captain 
 adding the command March, when the platoons are united. 
 
 482. The guide of the second platoon, on its right, will 
 pass to its left flank the moment the platoon begins to ob- 
 lique^ the guide of the first, on its right, remaining on 
 that flank of the platoon. 
 
 Being in column, to break files to the rear^ and 
 
 to cause (hem to re-enter into line. 
 
tCnutjU tiK TJIH (;(.iVPA!<V. SI 
 
 483. The company being in march, and constituting^ 
 part of a column, rigbt in front, the instructor will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Tuo files from left (o rear. 2, Maiich. 
 
 484. At the command march, the first two files on the 
 left of the- company will mark time, the others will con 
 tinue to march straitforvvard ; the two rear rank men of 
 the files will, as soon as the rear rank of the company 
 shall clear them, move to the right by advancing the outer 
 shoulder; the odd number will place himself behind the 
 third file from that flank, the even number behind 
 the fourth, passing for this purpose behind the odd num- 
 ber^ the two front rank men will, in like manner, move lo 
 the right when the rear rank of the company shall clear 
 them, the odd number tvill place himself behind the first 
 file, the eren number behind the second file, passing for 
 this purpose behind the odd number. 
 
 485. At the command march, the files already broken, 
 advancing a little the outer shoulder, will gain the spac^e 
 of t\vo files to the right, shortening «t the same time, the 
 step, in order to make room between themselves and the 
 rear rank of the company for the files last ordered to the 
 rear; the latter will break by the same commands and in 
 the same manner as the first. The men who double should 
 increase the length of the step in order to prevent dis- 
 tances being lost. 
 
 486; Should the instructor wish to break files from the 
 right, he will command : 
 
 1. Twojiles from right to rear. Maiich. 
 
 487. At the command march, the files will now move to 
 the left, advanciiiff the outer shoulder, thcpvi-n number of 
 
95 sCniOOL OF THE COlIfANY. 
 
 the rear rank will place himself behind the third file, the 
 odd number of the same rank behind the fourth ; the eren 
 number of the h-ont rank behind the second, the odd num- 
 ber for this purpose passing behind the even numbers. 
 
 489. When the front of the company is thus dirainifhed 
 by breaking off successive groups of two files, the rear files 
 must always be broken from the same side. 
 
 490. If the instructor wish the files broken ofl' to return 
 into line, he will command : 
 
 1. I'lco files into line. Makch. 
 
 490. At the command march, the first ten files of those 
 marching by the flank, will return brisklj- into line, as the 
 others will gain the space of two files by advancing the 
 Inner shoulder towards the flank to which they belong. 
 
 491. On the same principals any number of files may 
 be broken ofif togher, in which case the command will be ; 
 I. Four or six files from left {or right) to rear. 2. Mauch. 
 
 On the same principals any number of files jnay be bro- 
 ken ofi' together, in which case the command will be r 
 1, Fiyur or six files into line. 2. Mabch, 
 
 493. As often as files shall break off to rear, the guide 
 on that flank will gradually clase on the nearest front rank 
 man remaining in line, and he will also open out to 
 make roomfBr files ordered into line. 
 
 494. Whenever there is on the right or left of a subdi- 
 vision, a file which does not belong to a group, it will be 
 broken off and bi'ought into line singly. 
 
 The Coulumn in Rout^. 
 
 495. The r'ompany boino; in march, and supposed to 
 
"• £CHOOI. OF THE POMPA.VT, 'SJ 
 
 <'on3titute a part of a eoluinn, if the in3tructor wish io 
 tnarch it in the route step, he will command : 
 
 1. Botite step, 2. 'SIkv.cu. 
 
 496. At the command march, repeated by the captain, 
 the front rank will continue the step of twentj-eight inch- 
 es, the rear rank wiil take, by gradually shortening the 
 step, the distance of tvrenty-eipht inches from tlic front 
 rank, which distance will be computed from the breast of 
 Ibbe man io the rear rank to tho knapeack of the maa in the 
 front rank. 
 
 497. The men without further command, will immediate^ 
 ly carry their arms at will, ^.s has been prescribed in the 
 school of tlie squad. They will no longer be required to 
 inarch in the cadence step, or with the same foot, or re- 
 main silent. 
 
 498. The company marching in the route step, its front 
 may be diminished by breaking ipto piatoons or sections, 
 't)y the same G.^mro^^nds, and by the same means as if the 
 poinpany were marching in the cadence step. 
 
 499. When tl;e corapajay br^^^':^' ijito platoons, the chief 
 of each will more to tbe flank of his platoon, and will 
 take the place of tjie guide, who will step back into tfee 
 rear r.ank. 
 
 &0G. As so©n tts the platoons sUalJ be bri>]ten, each chie^ 
 flf section will place himself on its directing flank in the 
 front rank, and the Ifle closer will close up to within ono 
 pace of this rank. The moment the platoons are re-form- 
 ed, t )e chiefs of the left sections will rrtjjrn tp tbeir pUceai 
 ps til»; closera. 
 
 5.01. The f^<)iiij>;niv r»i.7i''!i:rRr in *};•' ^••M'^'^■|P/^• f<' ?'(|i!s« 
 i ' ' 
 
^ SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. ^ 
 
 it to paag to the cadenced step, the instructor will order 
 the pieces to be brought to the right shoulder, and cona- 
 inand : 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 502. At the command march, the men will resume the 
 cadence step, and will close so as to leave a distance of 
 sixtcn inches between the rear rank and the front. 
 
 503. The company marching in the route step, the in- 
 structor will cause it t© change direction, which will be 
 executed without formal commands, en a simple caution 
 from the captain ; the rear rank will come up to change 
 direction in the same manner as the front rank. 
 
 504. Each rank will conform itself to the piinciples 
 prescribed for the change in close ranks with this differ- 
 ence only ; that in wheeling the pivot man will take steps 
 of fourteen inches, instead of nine, to close the wheeling 
 point. 
 
 505. When the company marching in the route step 
 shall halt, the rear rank will close up at the command halt, 
 ftnd the whole will shoulder arms. 
 
 Counlermaj'ch, 
 
 506. The company being at a halt, and supposed to con- 
 stitute part of a column, right in front, when the instruc- 
 tor shall wish to cause it to countermarch, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Countermarch. 'I. Company, right Face. 3. By file 
 left. 4. March. 
 
 507.- At the second command, the company will face to 
 the right, the two guides to the right-about ; the captain, 
 will go to the right of his companr and cause two files to 
 
SCHOOI- OF THK CClM^AWT. 99 
 
 break to the rear, and then place hiin?olf by tbe side of the 
 front rank man row to conduct him. 
 
 508. At the command march, hoih guides will stand fast; 
 the company will step off smaKly ; the first file conducted 
 by the captain will wheel around the right guide, and di- 
 rect its march along the front rank so as to arrive behind, 
 and two paces from the left guide ; each file will come in 
 succession to wheel ok the same ground around the right 
 guide; the leading file having arrived at a point opposite 
 the left guide, tke captain will command: 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right-Dii.'Ess. 
 
 509. The first command will be given at four paces 
 from the point where the leading file is to halt. 
 
 510. At the second command, the company will halt. 
 611. At the third, it will face to the front. 
 
 512. At the fourth, the captain will step two paces out- 
 side of ttie left guide, now on the right, and direct the 
 Alignment, s» that the front rank may be enclosed between 
 the guides ; the company being aligned he will command, 
 Front, and place himself before the centre of the company 
 tis if in column ; the guides passing along the front rank, 
 will shift to their proper places, on the right and left of 
 that rank. 
 
 513. In a column by platoon, or section, the counter- 
 march will be executed by the same commands, and ac- 
 cording to the same principles; the guide of each 
 
 , platoon, or section, will face about, and its chief will place 
 himself by the side of the file on the right to conduct it. 
 
 614. In a column left in front, the countermarch will be 
 executed by inverse commands and means but according 
 to the same principles. Thus the movement will be made 
 
20U aCBOOL OV THE COMPAJSTT, 
 
 by the tigbt flank of subdivisions, if the right be in front, 
 and by the left flank if tbe left be in front ; in both casesj 
 the subdivisions will wheel by file ts the side of the front 
 rank. 
 
 Being m column hy jtlatoon, to form vn the right (or left) 
 into line of battle. 
 
 515. The column by platoon, right in front, being in 
 niarch, the instructor wishing to form it on the right into 
 line of battle, will command : 
 
 1. On the right into line. 2. Guide right 
 
 516. At the second command, the guide of each platoon 
 will shift quickly to its right flank; the column will con- 
 tinue to march straight forward ; the instructor will move 
 briskly to the point at which the right of the com. 
 pany ought to rest in line, and place himselt facing the 
 point of direction to the left which he will choose. 
 
 517. The head of the column being nearly opposite the 
 instructor the chief of the first platoon will command: 
 1. night turn ; and when exactly opposite to that point he 
 will add : 2. March. 
 
 618. At this command the first platoon will turn to tbe 
 right occording to the principles prescribed in No. lid, 
 its guide will so direct his march as to bring the front rank 
 man next on his left, opposite to the instructor ; the chief 
 Qf the platoon will march before its centre, and when the 
 guide shall be near the line of battle, he will command : 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt, 
 
 510. At this command, which will be given at the instant 
 the light uf the platoon ehall arrive at the distance ef 
 
SOtfOUL OF IHK f-'OMPANY. 10 1 
 
 ;hrce paces from the line of battle, the platoon will halt ; 
 the files not yet in line will come up promptly. 
 
 520. The guide will throw himself on the line of battle 
 opposite to one of the three left files of his platoon, and 
 face to the instructor, who will align him on the point of 
 direction to the left. 
 
 521. The chief of the platoon having at the same time, 
 gone to the point where the right of the company is to 
 rest, will, as soon as he sees all the files of the platoon in 
 line command : 
 
 Bight — Dress. 
 
 522. The second platoon will continue to march itraight 
 forward, until its guide shall arrive opposite to the left 
 file of the first; it will then turn to the right at the com- 
 mand of its chief, and march towards the line of battle, 
 its guide directing himself on the left file of the first pla- 
 toon. 
 
 523. The guide having arrived at the distance of three 
 paces from the line of battle, this platoon will be halted, 
 as prescribed for the first; at the instant it halts its 
 guide vvill spring on the line of battle, opposite to one of 
 the three left files of his platoon, and will be assured in his 
 position by the instructor. 
 
 524. The chief of the second platoon, seeing all his files 
 in line, and its guide established on the dii-ection, will 
 command : 
 
 Hight— Dress. 
 626. Having given this the command, he will return to 
 his place as file-closer, passing around the left; the second 
 platoon will dress up on the alignment of the first, and 
 when eetabliehed, the captain will command ; 
 
102 school of the company. 
 
 Front. 
 i26. The movetrient ended, the instructor will command! 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 527. At this comiBand the guides will return to their 
 places in line of battle. 
 
 528. A column by platoon, left in front, will form on the 
 left into line of battle according to the same principles, 
 and by inverse means, applying to the second platoon 
 what is prescribed for the first, and reciprocally. 
 
 529. The chief of the second platoon having aligned it 
 from the left, will return to his place as file closer. 
 
 630. The captain having halted the first platoon three 
 paces behind the Inie of battle, will go to the same point 
 to align this platoon, and then command : Front. At 
 the command, guides-posts, given by the instructor, the 
 captain will shift to his proper flank, and the guides take 
 their places in line of battle. 
 
 Formation of a company from, two ranks into 
 
 single rank, and reciprocally. 
 
 531. The company being in two ranks, and supposed to 
 make a part of a column, right or left in front, when the 
 instructor shall wish to form it into single rank, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. In one rank form company. 2. Makch. 
 
 532. At the first command the right guide will face to 
 the right. 
 
 533. At the command march, the right guide will step 
 off and march in the prolongation of the front rank. 
 
 534. The first file will step off at the satme time with the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANT. 103 
 
 guide ; the front rank man will turn to the right at the 
 first step, follow the guide, and be himself followed by the 
 rear rank man of his file, who will turn on the same spot 
 where he turned. 
 
 535. The second file, and all other files successirelj, will 
 Btep off as has been prescribed for the first, the frontVank 
 man of each file following immediately the rear rank man 
 of the file next on his right. The captain will superintend 
 he moTement, and when the last man shall have stepped oC, 
 he will halt the company, and face it to the front. 
 
 636. The file-closers will take their places in line of bat- 
 tle, two paces in rear of the rank. 
 
 637. The company being in single rank, where the in- 
 structor wishes to form it into two ranks, he will command: 
 
 1. In two ranks, form compani/. 2. March. 
 
 638. At the second command, the company will face to 
 the right ; the right guide and the man on tlio vi<rht will 
 remain faced to the front. " 
 
 639. At the command march, the men who hare faced to 
 the right will step off and form files in the following man- 
 ner ; the second man in the rank will place himself behind 
 the first to form the first file; the third will place him 
 selfby the side of the first in the front rank; the fourth 
 behind the t^hird in the rear rank. AH the others ,..7/ in 
 like manner place themselves, alternately, in the front and 
 rear rank, and will thus form files of two men, on the lott 
 of those already formed. 
 
 Formation of a compauf^ Jrun two ranks hito 
 four, and reciprocal} ij, at a halt andin march. 
 alO. The company being in two ranks, at a halt, and 
 
104 • SCHOpii Ot r»£ eO»[FA>'Y. 
 
 supposed to form part of a'coluinn right in front, when 
 the instructor shall wish to form it into four ranks, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Jn/our ranks, form company. 2. Company, left — Fl.CB. 
 3. March, {or double-quick — March.) 
 
 541. At the second command, the left guide wilLremain 
 faced to the front, the company will face to the left, the 
 rear rank will gain the distance of one pace from the front 
 by a side step to the left and rear, and the men will form 
 into four ranks as prescribed in the school of the squad. 
 
 542. At the command march, the first file of four men 
 will reface to the front without undoubling. All the oth- 
 er files of four will step off, and closing successively to 
 about five inches of the preceding file, will halt, and im- 
 mediately face to the front, the men remaining doubled. 
 
 543. The file closers will take their new places in line 
 of battle at two paces in rear of the front rank. 
 
 544. The captain will superintend the movement. 
 
 645. The company being in four ranks, when the in- 
 structor shall wish to form it into two ranks, ha will com- 
 mand : 
 
 I. In ttco ranks form company. 2. Company right — Face. 
 3. March, {or double-quick — March.) 
 
 646. At the second command, the left guide will stand 
 fast, the company will face to the right. 
 
 547. At the command march, the right guide will step 
 off and march in the prolongation of the front rank. The 
 leading file of four men will step off ac the same time, the 
 other files standing fast; the second file will step off when 
 there shall be between it and the first space soffioient to 
 form two rankp. 
 
««HOOL OF laE COMJ'AKr. lOo 
 
 548. The following files will execute successively whatha* 
 been prescribed for the second. As soon as the last file 
 shall have its distance, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. Company, 2. Halt. 3. Front, 
 
 549. At the cocimand/roMf, the company will face to the 
 front, and the files will undouble. 
 
 650. The company being in two ranks and marching to 
 the front, when the instructor shall wish to form it into 
 four ranks, he will command: 
 
 1. In/our ranH form company. 2. By the left, double 
 files. 3. March, {or double-quick— yikuca.) 
 
 651. At the command march, the left ffuide and the left 
 file of the company will continue to march straight to the 
 front ; the company will make a half face to the left, th« 
 odd numbers placing themselves behind the even numbers. 
 The even numbers of the rear rank will shorten their stepa 
 a little, to permit the odd numbers of the front rank to 
 get between them and the even numbers of that rank. 
 
 552. The files thus formed of fours, except the left'file, 
 will continue to march obliquely, lengthening their steps 
 slightly, so as to k^ep constantly abreast of the guides- 
 each file will close successively on the file next on its left, 
 and when at the proper distance from that file, will face 
 to the front by a half face to the right, and take'the touch 
 ol elbows to the left. 
 
 553. The company being i„ march to tV front in four 
 ranks, when the instructor shall wish to form it into two 
 ranks, he will command : 
 
 1. Ih (wo rank, form company. 2. By the right undonhU 
 
 .fif'f. Maeck, (or ffofihl€-p/i.ek—}4A-Rva.) 
 
100 8iH0(H. or THE COMPAJ<T. 
 
 554. At the command march, the left •j;uide and the 
 l'»f( file of the company will march straight to the front ; 
 the company will make a half face to the right and march 
 obliquely, lengthening the step a little, in order to keep 
 as near as possible abreast of the guide. 
 
 555. As soon as the second file from the left shall have 
 gained to the right the interTal necessary for the left file 
 to form into Wo ranks, the second tile will face to the 
 front by a half face to the left and march straight for- 
 ward; the left file will immediately form into two ranks, 
 and take the touch of elbows to the left. 
 
 656. Each file will execute successiyeiy, what has just 
 been prescribed for the file next to the left, and each file 
 will form into two ranks, when the file next on its right 
 has obliqued the required distance and faced to the front. 
 
 557. If the company be supposed to make part of a col- 
 umn, left in front, these different morements will be exe- 
 cuted according to the same principles and by inre "se 
 means, substituting the indication left for right. 
 
RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY MANUAL. 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Manual of Arms for Riflemen or Light Infantry. 
 
 Position of Shouldered Arms. 
 
 1 The recruit being placed as explained in the first part 
 of squal drill, the instructor will cause him to bend the 
 right arm slightl}', and to place the piece in it in the fol- 
 lowing manner, 
 
 2. The piece in the right hand —the barrel nearly rerti- 
 cal and resting in the hollow of the shoulder — the guard 
 to the front, < he arm hanging nearly at its full length, 
 near the bodv ; the thumb and forefinger embracing the 
 guard, the remaining fingers closed together, grasping 
 the swell of the stock just under the cock, which rests on 
 the little finger. 
 
 3. In learning the reoruits the manual of arms, the last 
 syllable ot the command will decide the brisk execution of 
 the fi''st motion of each time or pause, and the commands 
 tuo, three and four, will decide the brisk execution of the 
 other motions. 
 
 4. The manual of arms will be taught in the following 
 progression. The recruit having the piece at the shoulder, 
 the instructor will command : 
 
108 EIFLB AND LIGHT INTA.N'lur SiA^UVAt. 
 
 Suppert —AviMB. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 5. (First motion. ) Bring the piece, with the right hand, 
 perpendicularly to the front and between the eyes, the 
 barrel to the rear; seize the piece with the left hand at the 
 lower band, raise this hand as high as the chin, and seize 
 the piece at the same time with the right hand four inchei 
 below the cock. 
 
 6. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with the right 
 hand, the barrel to the front ; carry the piece to the left 
 shoulder, and pass the forearm extended on the breast be- 
 tween the right hand and the cock; support the cock 
 against the left forearm, the left hand resting on the right 
 breast. 
 
 7. (Third motion.) Drop the right hand by the side* 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 8. ( First motion.) Grasp the piece with the right hand 
 under and against the left forearm ; seize it with the left 
 hand at the lower band, the thumb extended ; detach the 
 piece slightlj» from the shoulder, the left forearm along 
 the stock. 
 
 9. (Second motion. ) Carry the piece vertically with 
 both hands, to the right shoulder, the rammer to the front, 
 change the position of the right hand so as to embrace the 
 guard with the thumb and forefinger, slip the left hand t» 
 the height of the shoulder, the fingers extended and joined, 
 the right arm nearly straight. 
 
 10. (Third motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by th« 
 «ld«. 
 
Pretent— AtU%. 
 One titnt and tte9 taotioHt. 
 
 11. (First naotioa.) With (he rigrht hand, briny the 
 piece erect before the centre of the body, the rammer to 
 the front ; at the same time seize the piece with the left 
 hand half way between the guide sight and lower band, 
 the thumb extended along the barrel and against the 
 stock, the forearm horizontal and resting against the body, 
 the hand as high as the elbow. 
 
 12. (Second motion. ) Grasp the small of the stock witk 
 the right hand belon and against tlie guard. 
 
 .S'^owWer— Akms. 
 One tune and ttco motion«. 
 
 13. (First motion.) Bring the piece to the right shoul- 
 vJer, at the 8»me time change the position of the right hand 
 so as to embrace the guard with the thumb and fore- 
 linger, slip up the left hand to the height of the shoulder, 
 the fingers extended and joined, the right arm nearly 
 straight. 
 
 H. (Second motion.) Drop the left hand guickly to 
 tiie side. 
 
 Order — Arms. 
 One dmt andtivo .mottont. • 
 
 15. (First motion.) Seize the piece briskly with the 
 left hand near the upper band, and detach it slightly from 
 Ihe shoulder with the right hand ; loosen the grasp of the 
 right hand, lower the piece with the loft, re-seize the piece 
 ivith the right hand above the lower band, the little fingec 
 io the repT of the barrel, the butt abautfour inohe? frons 
 
110' RirLF AJfD trSHT rNFANTRT MANUAI,, 
 
 « 
 
 mhe groirad, the right hand Bvvpported against the hip;. 
 drop the left hand by the side. 
 
 16. (Second position^) l>et the piece slip through the- 
 iright hand to the ground by opening slightly the finders, 
 and take 
 
 The posiiton of Order Arms^. 
 
 17. The hand lowr, the barrel between the thumb and 
 forefinger extended along the stock; the other fingers 
 extended and joined ; the muzzle asbout two inches from: 
 She right shoulder; the rammer in front; the toe (or 
 beak of the butt against and in a line ^th the toe of the 
 right foot, the barrel perpendicular. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two- motions, 
 
 18. (First motion.) Raise the peace verticariy with 
 the right hand to the height of the right breast, and op- 
 posite the shoalder, the elbow close to the body ; seize th-e- 
 piece with the left hand below the right, and drop qiUicklj 
 the right hand to grasp the pi^ce at the smafU of the stocky 
 the thumb and forefinger embracing the guard ; press the 
 piece against the shoulder with the left hand, the righit 
 arm nearly straight. 
 
 19. (Second motion.) I>i*op the left hand qutckly hj 
 the side. 
 
 Load in nine timei, 
 
 I. JLOAI>.* 
 
 20. Grasp the piece with the left hand as high as the 
 
 *(NoTE.) Whenever the loadings and firings are to be 
 executed, the instructor will cause the cartridge boxes to 
 18>e brought to the front. 
 
UIFLK ASU LIGHT INFASTRT MAHCAL. lU 
 
 right elbow, and bring it rertically opposite the middle of 
 the body, slip the right hand to the upper band, place the 
 butt between ike feet, barrel to the front ; seize it witX 
 the left hand near the muzzle, which should be three inch- 
 es from the body; carry the right ha«d to the cartrid|:« 
 box. 
 
 2. i/flMdie— CARTRIOaB. 
 
 0ns time and one mottoa. 
 2L Seize the cartridge with the thumb and next two 
 f.ngere, and place it between tftie teeth. 
 3. Tear— Cartridge. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 22. Tear tJie pap»r to the powder, hold ihe cartridge 
 upriglit between tJie th«mb and first two fingers, aear the 
 top ; in this position place it in front of and near the mux* 
 zle— the back of the hand to the front. 
 
 4. C'Aor^e— Cartribqb. 
 0*« time and one motion. 
 
 23. Empty tho powder into the barrel ; disengage the 
 ball from the paper with the right hand and the thumb 
 and first two fingers of the left ; insert it into the bore, 
 the pointed end uppermost, and press it down with the 
 right thumb ; seize the head of the rauiiaer with the thumb 
 and forefinger of the right hand, fhe other fingers closed, 
 ihe elbow near the body. 
 
 5. jDraip— Rammeu. 
 One time and three viotionn. 
 U. (First motion.) Half draw the rammer by extend- 
 in^. the right arm; steady it in this poiition with lefi 
 
t)iu«»b ; grasp the rammer near the muzzle with the riglk 
 hand, the little finger itpperm^wt, tfee nails to the front, 
 the thumb extended along the rammer. 
 
 25. (Second motion. ) Clear the rammer from the pipes 
 By again extending the arm : the rammer i-n the prolon- 
 gation of the pipes. 
 
 2G. (Third motion.) Turis the rammer, the little end' 
 of the rammer paBsiing near tbe left shoulder ; pfeec the 
 lead of the rammer on the ball, the back of the hand t» 
 the ft-ontv 
 
 G. Bam — CARiniDGE, 
 
 One time and ove matio^. 
 
 27. Insert the rammer as far as the-right, ffnd' steady ft 
 m this position with the thumb of the left hand ; seize the 
 rammer at the small end with the thumb and forefinger of 
 the right hand, tlje back- of tli« hsind to thte front j press 
 the ball home, the elbows nea;r tSie body, 
 
 7. Return — Rammer, 
 
 One time andtnree motions. 
 
 28. (First mstion. ) Draw the rammer half way oufe^ 
 and steady it in this position with the left thumb ; grasp it 
 aear the muzzle with the right band, the little ferefl-nger 
 uppermost, the nails to the front, the thumb along ih^e 
 rammer ; clear the rammer from the bore by extending 
 the arm, the nails to the front, the rammer in the proton- 
 gation of the bore. 
 
 29. (Second motion.) Turn the rammcT, the head of 
 the rammer passing near the left shoulder, and insert it in 
 the pipes until the right hand voachct? tt^e muzile, the nails 
 to the froftt. 
 
30. (Third motion.) Force tiie rammer home by plac- 
 ing the little finger of the right hand on the head of the 
 rammer ; pass the left hand down the barrel to the extent 
 of the arm, without depressing the shoulder, 
 8. Fbimb- 
 One time and two motinna. 
 
 SI. (First motion.) With the left hand raise the piece 
 until the hand is as high as the ej^e, grasp the small of the 
 Btock with the right hand ; half faeo the right ; place at 
 eamc time, the right foot behind and at right angles with 
 the left, the hollow of the right foot against the left heel. 
 Slip the left hand down to the lower band, the thumb 
 along the stock, the left elbow against the body ; bring 
 the piece to the right side, the butt below the right fore- 
 arm — the smafl of tbo stock against the body and two 
 inches below the right breast, the barrel upward, the muz- 
 zle on a IcTcl with the eye. 
 
 32. (Second motion.) Half cock with H)c thumb of tho 
 right hand, tho fingers supported against the guard and 
 pmall of the stock — remove the old cap with one of the 
 fingers of the right hand, and with the thumb and fore- 
 finger of the same hand, take a cap from the pouch, place 
 it on the nipple, and press it down with the thumb; seize 
 the small of the stock with the right hand. 
 
 9. Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 0;jfl time and two motion •;. 
 
 33, (First motion.) Bring the piece to the right shoul- 
 der and support it there with the left hand, face to the 
 front ; bring the right hand to the side of and on a line 
 with the left; grasp the piece with the li^ht hand as indl- 
 eated in the po.^ilion o( nhoi'hfrr nrmt. 
 
114 niFLK AND LIGHT INFANTRY HANtJAL, 
 
 34. (Se«ond motion.) Drop the left hand quickly to 
 the side. 
 
 Readt. 
 One time and three mottona. 
 
 35. (First motion.) Raise the piece slightly with the 
 right hand, raakingf a half face to the right on the left 
 beel ; carry the righ foot to the rear, and place it at right 
 angles to the left, the hollo\y of it opposite to and against 
 the left heel ; grasp the piece with the left hand at the 
 lower band and detach it slightly from the shoulder. 
 
 36. (Second motion.) Bring down the piece with both 
 Lands, the barrel upward, the left thumb extended 
 along the stock, the butt along the right forearm, th« 
 small of the stock against the body and two inches below 
 the right breast, the muzzle as high as the eye, the left el- 
 bow against the side; place at the same time, the right 
 thumb on the Jaead of the coek, the other fingers under and 
 against the guard.. 
 
 37. (Thir4 motion.) Cock and seize the piece at the 
 small of the stock, without deranging the position of the 
 butt. 
 
 Aim. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 38. Raise the piece with both hands, and support the 
 butt against the right shoulder ; the left elbow down, the 
 right nearly as high as the shoulder, incline the head upon 
 the butt so that the right eye may perceive quickly the 
 object aimed at ; the left eye closed, the right thumb ex- 
 tended along the .stock, the forefinger on the trigger. 
 
 39. The rear rank men, in aiming, will each carry the 
 
UIFLB AND LKjlHr INFANTRY MANIAL. 115 
 
 right foot about eight inches to the right, and towards the 
 left beelof the man next on the right, inclining the upper 
 part of the body forward. 
 
 FlKE. 
 
 40. Press the forefinger against the trigger, fire, without 
 lowering or turning the head, and remain in this position. 
 
 LOADk 
 
 One time and one motxoif, 
 
 41. Bring down the piece with both hand'^, at the same- 
 time face to the front, and take the position of load. Each 
 rear rank man will bring bis right foat by the side of the 
 left. 
 
 43. If, after firing, the instructor should not wish the 
 recruits to re-load, he will command : 
 
 Sho nlder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 43. Throw up the piece briskly with the left hand^ 
 and resume the position of shoulder arms, at the same time 
 face to the front, trarningon the left heel, and bringing the 
 right heel on a Tine with the left. 
 
 44. To accustom the recruits to wait for the camnfiand,. 
 Jlre, the instructor, when they are in the position ofaiiri^ 
 will command : 
 
 liecover — Arms. 
 One time ttnd orte motion. 
 
 45. At the first part of the command, withdraw the fin*- 
 ger from the trigger; at the command, arms, retake tfe^e 
 position of the third motion of rei%dy. 
 
116 RIFLE A.X9 LI6HX I^'FA^'TRr MAXPAL. 
 
 46. Tte recruits being in the position of the third mo- 
 tion ofrtady ; if the instructor should wish to bring them 
 to a shoulder, he will command : 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 47. At the com\na.nd shoulder, place the thumb upon the 
 cock, the forefinger on the trigger, half cock, and seize the 
 small of the stock with the right hand. At the command 
 arms, bring up the piece briskly to the right shoulder and 
 re-take the position o^ shoulder arms. 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 
 Onetime and three motions. 
 
 .48. (First motion.) Grasp the piece with the left hand 
 at the height of the shoulder, and detach it Blightly from 
 the shoulder with the right hand. 
 
 49. (Second motion.) Quit the piece with the right 
 hand, lower it with the left hand, opposite the middle of 
 the body, and place the butt between the feet without 
 shock, the rammer to the rear, the barrel vertical, the 
 muzzle three inches from the body ; seize it with the right 
 hand at the upper band, and carry the left hand reversed 
 to the handle of the sabre bayonet. 
 
 50. (Third motion.) Draw the sabre bayonet from the 
 scabbard and fix it on the barrel ; seize the piece with the 
 left hand, the aim extended, the right hand at the upper 
 band. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and two motiom^ 
 
 51. (First mcti«n,) Kaise the piece with the left hand, 
 
KIFIJk ANP LIGHT ISFiiNTRT MASUAL. 117 
 
 and place it against the right shoulder, the rammer to the 
 front ; seize the piece at the same time with the right 
 hand, at the small of the stock, the thumb and forefiger, 
 embracing the guard, the right arm nearly extended. 
 
 52. (Second motion.) Drop the piece briskly, the left 
 hand by the side. 
 
 Charge-^BxronsT. 
 
 One time and two motioiu, 
 
 53. (First motion. ) Raise the piece slightly with the 
 right hand, and make a half face to the right on the left 
 heel ; place the Lollow of the right foot opposite to, and 
 three inches from the left heel, the f«et square ; seize the 
 piece at the same time, with the left hand a little above the 
 lower band. 
 
 64. (Second motion. ) Bring down the piece with both 
 hands, the barrel uppermost, the left elbow against the 
 body; seize the small of the stock at the same time, with 
 the right hand, which will be supported against the hip ; 
 the point of the sabre bayonet as high as the eye. 
 Shoulder — Arms, 
 One time and two viotiona. 
 
 55. (First motion. ) Throw up the piece briskly with 
 the left hand, in facing to the front, place it against the 
 right shoulder, the rammer to the front; turn the right 
 hand so as to embrace the guard, slide the left hand to the 
 height of the shoulder, the right hand nearly extended. 
 
 66. (Second motion. ) Drop the left hand smartly by 
 the aide. 
 
 TratV— Arms. 
 Out tiiiie and ti»o motietit. 
 
118 RIKLE AND LIGHT IM^ANTRT MANUAL. 
 
 57. (First motion.) The same as the first motion of 
 Order arms. 
 
 58. (Second motion.) Incline the muzzle slightly to 
 the front, the butt to the rear and about four inches from 
 the ground. The right hand supported at the hip, will so 
 hold the piece that the rear-rank men may not touch with 
 their bayonet, the men in the front rank. 
 
 Shoulder — Ahms. 
 
 59. At the command shoulder, raise the piece perpendic- 
 ularly in the right hand, the little finger in rear of the bar- 
 rel. At the command arms, execute the two motions pre- 
 scribed for the shoulder, from the position of order arms. 
 
 Unfix — Bayonet. 
 
 One time and three motions, 
 
 60. (First motion.) The same as first motion of yiaj 
 hayonet. 
 
 61. (Second motion.) The same as second motion of_/?J5 
 bayonet, except, that the thumb of the right hand will be 
 placed on the spring of the sabre bayonet, and the left hand 
 will embrace the handle of the sabre bayonet and the 
 bai rel, the thumb extended along the blade. 
 
 62. (Third motion. ) Press the thumb of the right hand 
 on the spring, wrest off the sabre bayonet, turn it to the 
 right, the edge to the front, lower the guard until it touch- 
 es the right hand, which will seize the back and the edge 
 of the blade between the thumb and first two fingers, the 
 other fingers holding the piece; change the position of 
 the hand without quitting the handle, return the sabre 
 bayonet to the scabbard, and seize the piece with the left 
 band, the arm extended. 
 
RIFLE AND LIOHT INFANTRT MANUAL. 119 
 
 Shoulder — A BMS. 
 One time and two motiona. 
 
 63. (First motion.) The same as the first motion, from 
 fix bayonet. 
 
 (54. (Second motion.) The same as the second motion 
 in Jixbar/onet. 
 
 Secure — Alms. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 65. (First motion.) The same as the first motion of 
 support arms, except, with the right hand seize the piece 
 at the small of the stock. 
 
 6(5. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with both hands, 
 the barrel to the front ; bring it opposite the left shoulder 
 the butt against the hip, the left hand at the lower band, 
 the thumb as high as the chin and extended on the rammer; 
 the piece erect and detached from the shoulder, the left 
 forearm against the piece. 
 
 67. (Third motion.) Raise the piece, pass it under the 
 left arm, the left hand remaining at the lower band, the 
 thumb on the rammer to prevent it from falling out, the 
 little finger resting on the hip, the right hand falling at 
 the same time by the side. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One lime and three motions. 
 
 68. (First motion. ) Raise the piece with the left hand, 
 and seize it with the right hand at the small of the stock, 
 the piece erect and detached from the shoulder, the butt 
 against the hip, left foream along the piece. 
 
 69. (Second motion.) The same as the second motioB 
 of shoulder armn from a inpport. 
 
120 hlSin A^O U.UBI infantry MA.NCA-Ii. 
 
 70. (Third motion.) The same as the third motion of 
 shttuldtr arms from a support. 
 
 Right Shotilder Shift — Arms. 
 One time and two n\ptio7u. 
 
 7i. (First motion. ) Detach the piece perpendicularly 
 from the shoulder with the right hand, and raise it with 
 the left between the lower band and guide sight, raise the 
 piece, the left hand at the height of the shoulder and four 
 inches from it; place, at the same time, the right hand ou 
 the butt, the back between the first two fingers, the other 
 two fingers under the butt plate. 
 
 72. (Second motion.) Quit the piece with the left hand, 
 raiae and place the piece on the right shoulder with the 
 right hand, the lock plate upwards ; let fall, at the same 
 time, the left hand by the side. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and ttco motions, 
 
 73. (First motion.) Raise the piece perpendicularly by 
 extending the right arm to its full length, the rammer to 
 the front, at the same time, seize the piece with the left 
 hand between the lower band and guide sight. 
 
 74. (Second motion.) Quit the butt with the right 
 hand, which will immediately embrace the guard, lower 
 the piece to the position of shoulder arras, slide up the left 
 hand to the height of the shoulder, the fingers extended 
 and closed. Drop the left hand by the side. 
 
 75. The men being at support arms, the instructor will 
 sometimes causfe the pieces to be brought to the right shoul- 
 der. To effect this, he will command : 
 
ElfLS i^'D LieHX UfFAlTTKT MAXUAX. 121 
 
 Bight Shoulder Shift — Ariis. 
 One time and tico motiont. 
 
 76. (First motion.) feize the piece with the right hand, 
 below and near the left forearm, place the left hand under 
 the butt, the heel of the butt between the first two fingers. 
 
 77. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with the left hand, 
 the lock plate upward, carry it to the right shoulder, the 
 left hand still holding the butt, the muzzle elevated ; hold 
 the piece in this position and place the right hand upon 
 the butt as is prescribed in No. 71, and let fall the hand 
 by the side. 
 
 Support — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 78. (Finst motion. ) The same as the first motion of 
 »houlder arms, No. 73. 
 
 79. (Second motion. ) Turn the piece with both hands, 
 the barrel to the front, carry it opposite the left shoulder, 
 slip the right hand to the small of the stock, place the left 
 forearm, extended, on the breast and let fall the right hand 
 to the side. 
 
 Arms — At Will. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 80. Carry the piece at pleasure on either ghoulder, 
 with one or both hands, the muzzle elevated. 
 
 Shoxdder— Arms. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 81. Retake quickly the position of shoiUder armt. 
 
 Ground— Aniiis. 
 Oiif. time aitd twH vwtion-fi. 
 
122 EIl-LB AND LIGHT INFANTUy MANUAL. 
 
 82. (First motion.) As prescribed in heavy infantry 
 manual, (squad drill.) 
 
 83. ( Second motion. ) As prescribed in heavy infantry 
 manual, (sqaad drill.) ^ 
 
 Raise — Aries. 
 One time and two motions, 
 
 84. (First motion. ) As prescribed in heavy infantry 
 manual, (squad drill. ) 
 
 85. (Second motion.) As prescribed in Aeavy tn/a»try 
 manual, (squad drill. ) 
 
 86. The recruits being at order arms, and having the 
 sabre bayonet in the scabbard, if the instructor wishes to 
 cause an inspection of arms, he will command, 
 
 Inspection — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 87. (First motion. ) Seize the piece with the left hand 
 below and near the upper band, carrj it with both hands 
 opposite the middle of the body, the butt between the feet, 
 the rammer to the rear, the barrel vertical, the muzzle 
 about three inches from the body ; carry the left hand re- 
 versed to the sabre-bayonet, draw it from the scabbard 
 and fix it on the barrel ; grasp the piece with the left hand 
 below and near the upper band, seize the rammer with the 
 thumb and forefinger of the right hand, bent, the other 
 fingers closed. 
 
 88. (Second motion.) Draw the rammer, as has been 
 explainednn loading, and let it glide to the bottom of the 
 bore, replace the piece with the left hand, opposite the 
 right shoulder, and take the position (»f order arms. 
 
 89. The instructor will then inspect in sur-rogiion. the 
 
RTFLE AND LIGHT INFA.NTRT MANUAL. 123 
 
 piece of each recruit, in passing along the front of the rank, 
 in conformity with the principles prtscribed in squad drill 
 for the inspection of arms 
 
 90. When the instructor shall have passed him, each re- 
 cruit will retake the position prescribed at the command 
 insjyection armn. 
 
 91. The men being at order arms, the instructor will 
 command, 
 
 Stack — Arms. 
 
 92. At this command, the front rank man of every even 
 numbered lile will pass his piece before him, seizing it 
 with the left land near the upper band ; will place the butt 
 a little in advance of the left toe, the barrel turned toward 
 the body, and draw the rammer slightly from its place , 
 the front rank man «f every odd numbered file will also 
 draw the rammer slightly, and pass his piece to the man 
 next on his left, who will seize it with the right hand near 
 the upper band, and place the butt a little in advance of . 
 the right toe of the man next on his right, the barrel turn- 
 ed to the front ; he will then cross the rammer of the two 
 pieces, the rammer of the piece of the odd numbered man be- 
 ing inside; the rear rank man of evry even file will also draw 
 his rammer, lean the piece forward, the lock plate down- 
 ward, advance the right foot about six inches, and insert 
 the rammer between the rammer and the barrel of the piece 
 of his front rank man ; with his left hand he will place the 
 butt of his piece on the ground, thirty-two inches in rear 
 of and perpendicular to the front rank, bring back his 
 right foot by the sids of the left ; the front rank man of 
 every even file, will at the same time lean the stock to the 
 rear, quit it with the right hand and force all the rammers 
 
. l",iI4 a.l?LK AHl} lilUHI t^trANlAT MANUAL. 
 
 down. The stack being thus fbrmed, the rear rank man of 
 every odd file will pass his piece into his left hand, the 
 barrel to the front, and inclining it forward, will rest it 
 on the stack. 
 
 93. The men of both ranks having taken the position of 
 the soldier without arms, the instructor will command 
 
 1. Break ranks — 2. March. 
 To Resume Arms. 
 
 94. Both ranks beinc: reformed in rear of their stacks, 
 the instructor will command : 
 
 Take — Arms. 
 
 96. At this command, the rear rank man of every odd 
 numbered piece, will withdraw his piece from the stack ; 
 the front rank man of every even file, will seize his own 
 piece with the l«ft hand, and that of the man on his right, 
 with his right hand, both above the lower band ; the rear 
 rank man of the even file will seize his piece with the right 
 band below the lower band ; these two men will raise up 
 the stack to loosen the rammers ; the front rank man of 
 every odd file, will facilitate the disengagement of the ram- 
 mers, if necessary, by drawing them out slightly with the 
 left hand, and will receive his piece from the hand of the 
 man next on the left ; the four men will retake the position 
 of the soldier at order arms. 
 
 formation of a Regiment in line of Battle or in 
 
 line, 
 
 96. A Regiment is composed of ten companies, which 
 will habitually be posted from right to left, in the follow- 
 ing 6rder: first, «iith, fourth, ninth, third, eighth, fifth. 
 
Rffi/B AND LIOHT INFAWTRT JMNCAL. 125' 
 
 ^tenfh, seteath, second, according to the p»nk cf captains. 
 
 07. With a less numbar of companies tlio same principle 
 trill be observed, viz : the first captain will command the 
 right company, the second captain the left company, the 
 third captain the right centre company, and so on. 
 
 98. The companies thus posted will be designated from 
 right to lcft,^r«< company, eecond company, etc. This 
 designation will be observed in the mancriivrcs. 
 
 09. The first two companies on the right, whatever their 
 denomination, will form the Jirst division ; the next two 
 companies the second divistom ; and so on, to the left. 
 
 100. Each company will be divided into two equal parts 
 which will be designated as the first and second platoon, 
 countine from the ri}.ht; and each platoon, in like man- 
 ner, will be subdivided into two sections. 
 
 101. In all exercises and mancevres, every rcgin-ent, or 
 part of a regiment, composed of two or moro companies, 
 will be designated as a battalion. 
 
 102. The color, with a guard to be hereinafter designated, 
 will be posted on the left of the right centre battalion 
 company. That company and all on its right, will be 
 denominated the right wing of the battalion ; the remain- 
 ing companies the left tviiig. 
 
 103. The farmation of a regiment is in two ranks ; and 
 each company will be formed into two ranks, in the fol- 
 lowing manner : the corporals will be posted in the front 
 rank, and on the right and left of platoons, according to 
 height ; the tallest corporal and the tallest man will form 
 the first file, the next two tallest men will form the second 
 file, and so on to the last file, which will be eompoeed of 
 the shortest corporal and the shortest man. 
 
126 RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY MANUAL. 
 
 104. The odd and even files, numbered as one, two, in the 
 company, from right to left, will form groups of four men, 
 who will fee designated comrades in battle, 
 
 105. The distance from one rank to another will be thir- 
 teen inches, measured from the breasts of the rear rank 
 men to the backs or knapsacks of the front rank men. 
 
 106. For manoeuvring, the companies of a battalion will 
 always be equalized, by transferring mea from the strong- 
 est to the weakest companies. 
 
 Posts of Field Officers and Regiment'/ 1 Staff. 
 
 107. The field officers, colonel, lieutenant-colonel and 
 major, are supposed to he mounted, and on active service 
 shall b« on horseback. The adj utant, when the battalion 
 is manoeuvring, will be on foot. 
 
 108. The colonel will take post thirty paces in rear of the 
 file closer, and opposite the centre of the battalion. This 
 distance will be reduced whenever there is a reduction im 
 the front of the battalion. 
 
 ,109. The lieutentant-eo!onel and the major will be oppo- 
 site the centres of the right and left wings respectively, 
 and twelve paces in rear of the file closers. 
 
 110. The adjutant and sergeant major will be opposite 
 the right and left of the battalion, respectively, and eight 
 paces in the rear of the file closers, 
 
 111. The adjutant and sergeant-major will aid the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel and major, respectively, in the manoeuvres, 
 
 112. The colonel, if absent, will be replaced by the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel, and the latter by the ihajor. If all the field 
 officers be absent, the senior captains will command the 
 battalion 3 but if either be present, he will not fl^U the 
 
RIftK AND LKJHT IXKANTR MA.NfAL. 127 
 
 senior captain to act as field officer , except in case of evi- 
 dent necessity. 
 
 113. The quarter-master, surgeon, and other staff oflScers, 
 in one rank, on the left of the colonel, and three paces in 
 his rear. 
 
 114. The quarter-master sergeant on aline with the front 
 rank of the field music, and two paces on the right. 
 
 Posts of Field Music and Band. 
 
 115. The buglars will be drawn up in four ranks, and 
 
 posted twelve paces in rear of the file closers, the left op- 
 posite the centime of the left centre company. The senior 
 principle musician will be two paces in front of the field 
 musie, and the other two paces in the rear. 
 
 116. The regimental band, it there be one, will be drawn 
 up in two or four ranks, according to its numbers, and 
 posted fiye paces in rear of the field music, having oqe of 
 the principal musicians at its head. 
 
 Color- Guard. 
 
 117. In each battalion the color-guard will be composed 
 of eight corporals, and posted on the left of the right 
 centre company, of which company, for the time being, 
 the guard will make a part. 
 
 118. The front rank will be composed of ajsergeant, to be 
 selected by the colonel, who will be calied, for the time, 
 color-barer, with the two ranking corporals, respectively, 
 on his right and left; the rear rank will be composed of 
 tlie three corporals next in rank ; and the three remaining 
 corporals will be posted in their rear, and on the line of 
 file closers. The left guide of the color «^f>inpany, when 
 
these three last nanced corporals are iu the rank of fiit- 
 closers, will be immediately on their left. 
 
 119. In battalions with less than five companies proaont, 
 there will be no color-guard, and no displaj of colors, e*- 
 cept it may be at reviews. 
 
 120. The corporals for the color-guard will be seiected 
 from those most distinguished for regularity and percisioc, 
 as well in their positions under arms as in their marching. 
 The latter advantage, and & just carriage of the person, 
 are to be more particularly sought for in the selection of 
 the color-bearer. 
 
 Getierai Guides. 
 
 121. There will be two general guides in each battalion, 
 •elected, for the time, by the colonel, from among the ser- 
 geants (other than first sergeants) the most distinguished 
 for carriage under arms and accuracy in marching. 
 
 122. These sergeants will be respectively denominated, 
 in the manoeuvres, right general guide and left general 
 guide, and be posted in the line of file closers; the first in 
 sear of the right and the second in rear of the left fl^ulf of 
 the batt»lioa. 
 
SKIRMISH DRILL AND BATONET EXERCISE. 
 
 PART FOURTH. 
 
 INSTRUCTIOX FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 General principle.^ and division of the iiisiruction» 
 
 1. The movements of skirmishers should be subjected to 
 such rules as will give to the commander the means of 
 moving them in any direction with the greatest prompti- 
 tude. 
 
 2. It is not expected that these movements should be exe 
 cuted with the same precision as in closed ranks, nor is it 
 desirable, as such exactness would materially interfere 
 with their prompt execution. 
 
 3. When skirmishers are thrown out to clear the way 
 for, and to protect the advance of the main corps, their 
 movements should be so regulated by this corps as to keep 
 it constantly covered. 
 
 4. Every body of skirmishers should hare a reserve, the 
 strength and composition of which will vary according to 
 circumstances. 
 
 5. If the body thrown out be within sustaining distance 
 
 5 
 
S3'0 !»KlltMlftiH DKIH, ANU BAVUNKV KXEROISfi. 
 
 of the main corps, a very small reserre will be sufFicienfc 
 for each company, whose duty it shall be to fill vacant pla- 
 ces, furnish the line with cartridges, relieve the fatigued,, 
 and serve as a rallying point for the skirmishers. 
 
 6. If the main corps be at a considerable distance, be- 
 sides the compan}' reserves, another reserve will be re- 
 quired, composed of entire companies, which will be em- 
 ployed to sustain and reinforce such parts of the line as 
 may be warmly attacked ; this reserve should be strong 
 enough to relieve at least half the companies deployed as 
 skirmishers. 
 
 7. The reserve should be placed behind the centre of the 
 line of skirmishers, the company reserves at one hundred 
 and fifty, and the principal reserve at four hundred paces. 
 This rule however, is not invariable. The reserves, while 
 holding themselves within sustaining distance of the line, 
 should be, as much as possible, in a position to afford each 
 other mutual protection, and must carefully profit by any 
 accidents of the ground to conceal themselves from the 
 view of the enemy, and to shelter themselves from his fire. 
 
 8. The movements of skirmishers will be executed in 
 quick, or double quick time. The run will be resorted to 
 only in cases of urgeant necessity. 
 
 9. Skirmishers will be permitted to carry their piefcs 
 in the manner most convenient to them. 
 
 10. The movements will be habitually indicated by the 
 sounds of the bugle. 
 
 11. The officers, and, if necessary, the non-commisaioned 
 officers, will repeat, and cause the commands to be execu- 
 ted, as soon as they are given ; but to avoid mistakes, 
 when the signals arc employed, thvy r\iii wait until the 
 
•SkinMI^H DRILT, ANT) HAYONRT LXKUPI.SK. ISl 
 
 last bugle note is sounded befvsrc commencing the move- 
 ment. ^ 
 
 12, When skirmishers are «9rdercd to more rapidly, the 
 officers and non-commissioned officers will sec that the 
 men econemize their strength, keep cool, and profit bj- all 
 thr" advantages which the ground may offer for cover. It 
 is (>nly by this continual watchfulness on the part of all 
 grades, that a line of skir'mij-hers can attain success. 
 
 13. This instruction will bcdivdedinto five article.', ano! 
 subdivided as follows : 
 
 Article First. 
 
 1- To deploy forward. 
 
 2. To deploy by the flank, 
 
 ij. To extend interval.-. 
 
 4. To close ijitervals. 
 
 f>. To relieve skirmishers. 
 
 Aktici.k Skooki^. 
 
 1. To advance in line, 
 
 2. To reteat in line. 
 
 3. To change direction. 
 
 4. To march by the flank. 
 
 Article Thihi>. 
 
 i. To fire at a halt. 
 
 ■2; Tn fire marcfoiii^.. 
 
132 SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAYONET EXERCISE. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 1. The rally. 
 
 2. To form coIuihh to march in any direction, 
 
 3. The assembly. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 1. To deploy a battallion as skirmishers. 
 
 2. To rally the battalion deployed as skirmishers, 
 
 14. In the first four articles, it is supposed that the 
 juovemente are executed by a company deployed as skir- 
 mishers, on a front equal to that of the battalion in order 
 of battle. In the fifth article, it is supposed that each com- 
 pany of the battalion, being deployed as skirmishers, oc- 
 cupies a front of one hundred paces. From these two 
 examples, rules may be numerically deduced for all cases^ 
 whatever may be the strength of the skirmishers, and the 
 extent of ground they ought to occupy. 
 
 Article First. 
 J)ejjloi/?nents. 
 
 15. A company may be deployed as skirmishers in two 
 ways : forward and by the flank. 
 
 16. The deployment forward will be adopted when the 
 company is behind the line on which it is to be established 
 as skirmishers: it will be deployed by the flank, when it 
 fipd? itself already on thj^t line. 
 
SKIUMT.«H DRILL iND 8AY0SET EXKKCI8E. 133 
 
 17. Whenever a company is to be deployed as skirmish- 
 ers, it will be divided into two platoons, and each platoon 
 will be subdivided ioto two sections ; the comrades in bat- 
 tle, forming groups of four men, will be careful to know 
 and to sustain each other. The captain will assure him- 
 Belf that the files in the centre of each platoon and section 
 are designated. 
 
 18. A company may be deployed as skirmishers on its 
 right, left, or centre file, or on any other named file what- 
 soever. In this manner, skirmishers may be thrown for- 
 ward with the greatest possible rapidity on any ground 
 they may be required to occupy. 
 
 19. A chain of skirmishers ought generally to preserve 
 thoir alignment, but no advantage which the ground may 
 present should be sacrificed to attain this regularity. 
 
 20. Tile interval between skirmishers depends on the 
 extent of ground to be covered ; but in general, it is not 
 proper that the groups of four men should be removed 
 more than forty paces from each other. The habitual 
 distance between men of the same group in open grounds 
 will be five paces ; in no case will they lose sight of each 
 other. 
 
 21. The front to be occupied to cover a battalion com- 
 prehends its front and the half of each interval which 
 separates it from the battalion on its right and left. If a 
 line, whose wings are not supported, should be covered by 
 skirmishers, it will be i»ecessary either to protect the flanks 
 with skirmishers, or to extend them in front of the line so 
 far beyond the wings as effectually to oppose any attempt 
 which might bo made by the er emy's skirmishers to di.v- 
 *urb the flank?. 
 
134: SKi-HMlSH ©KILL AJ<D BArOiiET SXEECISfi. 
 
 To deploy forward. 
 
 22. A company being at a halt or in march, when tho 
 captain shall wish to deploy it forward on the left file of 
 the first platoon, holding the second platoon in reserve, he 
 will command: 
 
 1. First platoon — as skirmishers. 
 
 2. On the left file — take intervals. 
 
 3. March {or double qiiich — JIarch.) 
 
 23. At the first command, the second and third lieuten- 
 ants will place themselves rapidly two paces behind the 
 centres of the right and left sections of the first platoon ; 
 the fifth sergeant will move one pace in front of the centre 
 of the first platoon, and will place himself between the two 
 sections in the front rank as soon as the movement begins ; 
 the foul th sergeant will place himself on the left of the 
 front rank of the same platoon, as soon as he can pass. — 
 The captain will indicate to this sergeant the point on 
 which he Vi'ishes him to direct his march. The first lieu- 
 tenant, placing himself before the centre of the second 
 platoon, will command: • 
 
 Second platoon hachicard — March. 
 
 24. At this command, the second platoon will step three 
 paces to the rear, so as to unniiisk the flank on the first 
 platoon. It will then be halted by its chief, and the se- 
 cond sergeant will place himself on the left, and the third 
 sengeant on the right flank of this platoom 
 
 25. At the 0*1 m"<m Iliad rnnrch. the left eronp of four men. 
 
SKIRMISH t>niLL AN'O EATONCT EXERCI.'E. 135 
 
 conducted by the fourth fergeant, will direct itself un thu 
 point indicated ; all the other groups rf fours throwing 
 forward briskly the left shoulder, will moyd.'diagonally to 
 the front in double quick time, so as to, gain to the right 
 the space of twenty paces, which shall be the distance be- 
 tween each group and that immediately on its left. "When 
 the second group from the loft shall arrive on a line with 
 and twenty paces from the first, it will march straight to 
 the front, conforming to the gait and direction of the 
 first, keeping constantly on the same alignment and at 
 twenty paces from it. The third group, and all the others, 
 will conform to what has just been prescribed (or the se- 
 cond ; they will arrive successively on the line. The right 
 guide will arrive with the last group. 
 
 26. The left guide having reached the point where the 
 left of the line i^hould rest, the captain will command the 
 skirmishers to halt; the men composing each group of 
 fours will then immediately deploy at five paces from each 
 other, and to the right and left of the front rank man of 
 the even file in each group, the rear ^ank men placing 
 themselves on the left of their file leaders. If any groups 
 be not in line at the command halt, they will move up rap- 
 idly, conforming to what has just been prescribed. 
 
 27. If, during the deployment, the line should be fired 
 upon by the enemy, the captain may cause the groups of 
 fours to deploy, as they gain their proper distances. 
 
 28. The line being formed the non-commissioned officers 
 o& the right, left and centre of the platoon will place 
 themselves ten paces in rear of the line, and opposite the 
 position they respectively occupied. The chiefs of sections 
 will promptly rectify any irrrgularitie?, and then place 
 
136 SMRMISH DRILL AND BATO^iET KXBRCISB. 
 
 themselves twenty-five or thirty paces in rear of the centre 
 of their sections, each having with him four men taken 
 from the reserve, and also a bugler, who will repeat, if 
 necessary, the signals sounded by the captain. 
 
 29. Skirmishers should be particularly instructed to take 
 advantage of any cover which the ground may offer, and 
 should lie flat on the ground whenever such a movement 
 is necessary to protect them from the fire of the enepiy. 
 Regularity in the alignment should yield to this important 
 advantage. 
 
 30. When the movement begins, the first lieutenant,^ 
 will face the second platoon about, and march it promptly, 
 and by the shortest line, to about one hundred and fifty 
 paces in rear of the centre of the line. He will hold it 
 always at this distance, unless ordered to the contrary. 
 
 31. The reserve will conform itself to all the movements 
 of the line. This rule is general. 
 
 32. Light troops will carry their bayonets habitually in 
 the scabbard, and this rule applies equally to the skirmish- 
 ers and the reserve ; whenever bayonets are required to 
 be fixed, a particular signal will he given. The captain 
 will give a general superintendence to the whole deploy- 
 ment, and then promptly place himself about eighty paces 
 in the i ear of the centre of the line. He will have with 
 him a bugler and four men taken from the reserve. 
 
 „ 33. The deployment may be made on the right or the 
 centre of the platoon, by the same commands, substituting 
 the indication right or centrcy for that ofleft file. 
 
 34. The deployment on the right or the centre will be 
 made according to the principles prescribed above ; in this 
 latter case, the centre of the platoon will be marked by 
 
5KIRMWH DRILL AND BIYOXKT KIERCIS-B. 137 
 
 the right group of fours in the second section ; the fifth 
 sergeant will place himself on the right of this group, and 
 serve as the guide of the platoon during the deployment. 
 
 35. In whatever manner the'deployment be made, on the 
 right, left or centre, the men in each group of fours will 
 alvvays deploy at five paces from each other, and upon the 
 front rank man of the even ijumbered file. The deploy- 
 ments will habitually be made at twenty paces interval ; 
 but if a greater interval be required, it will be indicated 
 in the command. 
 
 36. If a company be thrown out as skirmishers, so near 
 the main body as to render a reserve unnecessary, the en- 
 tire company will be extended in the same manner, and 
 according to the same principles, as for the deployment of 
 a platoon. In this case, the third lieutenant will command 
 the fourth section, and a non-commissioned oflicer desig- 
 nated for that purpese, the second section ; theJifth ser- 
 geants will act as centre guard ; the file closers will place 
 themselves ten paces in the rear of the line, and opposite 
 their places in line of battle. The first and second lieu- 
 tenant will each have a bugler near him. 
 
 To deploy by thefianh. 
 
 37. The company being at a halt, when the captain shall 
 wish to deploy it by the flank, holding the first platoon in 
 reserve, he will command : 
 
 1. Second platoon — as shirmhhers. 2. By the right /lank 
 — take intervals. 3. Marcu, {or douhle quick — March.) 
 
 iJ8. At the first command, the first and third lieutenants 
 
l')S SKIRMISH DraLL AXD BAYOKET EXEROISE. 
 
 will place themselves, respectively, two paces behind the 
 centres of the first and second sections of the second pla- 
 toon ; the fifth sergeant will place himself one pace in 
 front of the centre of the second platoon ; the third serge- 
 ant, as soon as he can pass, will place himself on the right 
 of the front rank of the same platoon. The captain will 
 indicate to him the point on which he wishes him to direct 
 his march. The chief of the first platoon will execute what 
 has been prescribed for the chief of the second platoon, 
 IVos. 23 and 24. The fourth sergeant will place himself 
 on the left flank of the reserve, the first sergeant will re- 
 main on the right flank. 
 
 39. At the second command, the first and third lieuten- 
 ants will place themselves two paces behind the left group 
 of their respective sections. 
 
 40. At the command march, the second platoon will face 
 to the right, and commence the movement; the left group 
 of fours will stand fast, but will deploy as soon as there is 
 room on its right, comforming to what has been prescrib- 
 ed, No. 26 ; the third sergeant will place himself on the 
 left of the right group, to conduct it ; the second group 
 will halt at twenty paces from the one on its left, the third 
 group at twenty paces from the second, and so on to the 
 right. As the groups halt, they will face to the enemy, 
 and deploy as has been explained for the left group. 
 
 41. The chiefs of sections w'ill pay particular attention 
 to the successive deployments of the groups, keeping near 
 the group about to halt, so as to rectify any errors which 
 may be committed. When the deployment is completed, 
 they will place themselves thirty paces in rear of the cen- 
 tre ef tkeir sections, as has been heretofore prescribed. 
 
SHBIlMiSn DRILL AND B.VTONET HXERGISE. 13§ 
 
 The non-commissioned officers will also place themselves 
 as previously indicated. 
 
 42. As soon as the movement connnencos, the chief of 
 the first platoon, causing it to face about, will move it as 
 indicated, Xo. 30. 
 
 43. The deployment may be made by the left flank ac- 
 cording to the same principles, substituting left flank for 
 right flank. 
 
 44. If the captain should wish to deplo}' the company 
 upon the centre of the platoons, he will command : 
 
 1. Second platoon — an skirmishers. 2. By the right and 
 left flank — take intervals. 3. March {or double piick — 
 March.) 
 
 • 
 
 45. At the first command, the ofllcers and non-commis- 
 sioned oflicers will conform to what has been prescribed, 
 No. 38. 
 
 46. At the second command, the first lieutenant wil 
 place himself behind the left group of ihc right section of 
 the second platoon, the third lieutenant behind the right 
 group of the left section of the same platoon. 
 
 47. At the command march, the right section will face 
 to the right, the left section will face to the lelt, the group 
 on the right of this latter section will stand fast. The two 
 sections will move oft" in opposite directions ; the third 
 sergeant will place himself on the left of the right file to 
 conduct it, the second sergeant on the right of Ihe left file. 
 The two groups nearest that which stands fast, will each 
 halt at twenty paces from this group, and each of the oth- 
 er gfroups will halt »t twenty- paces from the group which 
 
140 BUrRJUSH PRILL AND BATONBT BXBRCISE. 
 
 is in rear of it. Each group will deploy as heretofore pre- 
 scribed, No. 40. 
 
 48. The first and third lieutenants, will direct the move- 
 ment, holding themselves always abreast of the group 
 which is about to halt. 
 
 49. The captain can cause the deployment to be mado 
 on any named group whatsoever ; in this case^ the fifth 
 sergeant will place himself before the group indicated, 
 and the deployment will be made according to the princi- 
 ples heretofore prescribed. 
 
 60. The entire company may he also deployed, accord- 
 ing to the same principles. 
 
 To extend intervals. 
 
 51. This movement, which is employed to extend a line 
 of skirmishers, will be executed according to tke principle* 
 prescribed for deployments, 
 
 62. If it be supposed that the line of skirmishers is at a 
 halt, and that the captain wishes to extend it to the left, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Bif the left Jlanh, {so inany 2^(^ce8), extend intsrvaU. 
 2. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 53. At the command inarch, the group on the right will 
 stand fast, all the other groups will face to the left, and 
 each group will extend its interval to the prescribed dis- 
 tance by thecaeans indicated, No. 40. * 
 
 54. The men of the same group will continue to preserve 
 between each other the distance of five paces, unless the 
 satur« ©f the ground should render it necessary tliat they 
 
SEIBMISU DRlJ.L ANU BAYOXfcf F.XtRClSE. I4l 
 
 should close nearer, in order to keep in sight of each other. 
 The intervals reler to the spaces between the groups, and 
 re>t to the distances betw'een the men in each group. The 
 intervals will be taken from the right or left man of the 
 neighboring group. 
 
 56. If the line of skirmishers be marching to the front, 
 and the captain should wish to extend it to the right, he 
 will command: 
 
 1. On the left group {to many paces), extend inM-vals, 
 2. M-xncii {ov double qtiick — March.) 
 
 5*5. The loft group, conducted by the guide, will contin- 
 ue to march to the point of direction ; the other groups 
 throwing forward the left shoulder, and taking the double 
 quick step, will open their intervals to the prescribed dis- 
 tance, by the means indicated, No. 25, conforming also to 
 what is prescribed. No. 54. 
 
 57. Intervals may be extended on the centre of the line, 
 according to the same principles. 
 
 58. If in extending intervals, it be intended that one 
 company or platoon should occupy' a line which had been 
 previously occupied by two, the men «f the company or 
 platoon which isto retire will fall successively to the rear 
 as they are relieved by the extension of the intervals. 
 
 To close intervals^ 
 
 59. This movement, like that of opening intervals, will 
 be executed according to the principles prescribed for the 
 deployments. 
 
 60. If the line of skirmishers be halted, and ths cap- 
 
14.2. SKIttMISII DKILIi ANU BAVONET KXEUCISE, 
 
 tain should wish to close intervals to the left, he will coui- 
 manil : 
 
 1. Z?v th-^ left Jlank {no many paces) dose inlervalt, 
 2. March {or doulle quick— '}iI.j\.vi.ch.) 
 
 61. At the command march, the left group will stand 
 fast, the other groups will face to the left and close to the 
 prescribed distance, each group facing to ih-e enemy as it 
 attains its proper distance. 
 
 62. If the line be marching to the front, the captain wiU 
 command : 
 
 1. On the left fp'oup {so many paces) clo^e intercaU^ 
 2. Marsh (or double qHicfc— March.) 
 
 63. The left group, conducted by the guide, will contin- , 
 ue to move on in the direction previously indicated ; the 
 other groups, advancing the right shoulder, will close ta 
 the left, until the intervals are reduced to th<e prescribed 
 distance. , 
 
 64. Intervals may be closed on the riglit, or o-u tht> centre, 
 according to the same principles. 
 
 G5. When intervals are to be closed up, in order to reiu- 
 foFce a line of skirmishers, so as to cause two companies 
 to cover the ground which had been previously occupied 
 by one, the new company will deploy so as to finish its 
 movement at twenty paces in rear of the line it is to occu- 
 py, and the men will successively move upon that lino, as 
 they sliall be unmasked by the mon of the old company. 
 The reserves of the two companies will unite behind the 
 centre of the line. 
 
.nKIRMISII UUU.L and liAYONKT K XKIUMSI- . U^f 
 
 To relieve a company deployed as skirmishers. 
 
 6G. When a company of ?kirmidicrs is to bo relieved, 
 the captain will be advised of the intention, which he will 
 immediately communicate to his first and second lieuten- 
 ants. 
 
 67. The new company will execute its deployment for- 
 xvard, so as to finish the movement at about twenty paces 
 in rear of the line. 
 
 C8. Arrived at this distance, the men of the new compa- 
 ny, by command of their captain, will advance rapidly a 
 few paces beyond th6 old line at halt ; the new line being 
 established, the old company will assemble on its reserve, 
 taking care not to get into groups of fours until they are 
 beyond the fire of the enemy. 
 
 (59. If the skirmishers to bo relieved, are marching in 
 retreat, the company thrown out to relieve them will de- 
 ploy by the fiank, as i)rescribed. No. 38, and following. 
 The old skirmishers will continue to retire with order, 
 and having passed the new line, thej will form npnn the 
 reserve^ 
 
 Atjticlk Seconb. 
 
 To advance. 
 
 To advance in line, and to retreat in line. 
 
 70. When a platoon or a company, deployed as skirmish- 
 ers, is marching by the front, the guide will be habitually 
 in the centre. No particular indication to this effect need 
 ha given in the commands, but if on the contrary it be in- 
 
144 SKIRMISH DRILI. AND BAYONET EXKRCISK. 
 
 tended that tbe directing guide should be on the right, or 
 left, the command guide right, or guide I'^ft, will be given 
 immediately after that of forward. 
 
 71. The captain, wishing the line of skirmishers to ad- 
 Tance, will command ; 
 
 1. Foricard. 2. March (or dotihle quick — March.) 
 
 72. This command will be repeated with the greatest 
 rapidity by the chief of sections, and in case of need, by the 
 sergeants. This rule is general, whether the skirmishers 
 march by the front or by the flank. 
 
 73. At the first command, three sergeants will move 
 briskly on the line, the first on the right, the second on the 
 left, and the third in the centre. 
 
 74. At the command march, the line will more to the 
 front, the guide charged with the direction, will move on 
 to the jx>int indicated to him, the skirmishers will hold 
 themselves aligned on this guide, and preserve their inter- 
 vals toward him. 
 
 75. The chiefs of sections will march immediately behind 
 their sections, so as to direct their movements. 
 
 76. The captain will give a general superintendence to 
 the movement. 
 
 77. When he shall wish to halt the skirmishers, he Avill 
 comraniand : 
 
 IlAtT. 
 
 78. At this command, briskly repeated, the line will halt. 
 The chiefs of sections will promptly rectifj' any irregulari- 
 tv in the alignment and -intervals, and after taking every 
 
SKIRMIJ^H DRILL AND BATONBT SXERCISK. 145 
 
 possible advantage which the ground may oflfer for pro- 
 tecting the men, they, with the three sergeants in the line, 
 viil retire to their proper places in rear. 
 
 79. The captain, wishing to march the skirmishers in 
 retreat, will command : 
 
 1. Jn retreat. I. March (or double quick — March. 
 
 SO. At the first command, the three sergeants will more 
 on the line as prescribed, No. 73. 
 
 81. At the command march, the skirmishers will face 
 about individually, and march to the rear, conforming to 
 the principles prescribed. No. 74. 
 
 82. The officers and sergeants will use every exertion 
 to preserve order. 
 
 83. To halt the skirmishers, marching in retreat, the 
 captain will command : 
 
 Halt. 
 
 8-J. At this command, the skirmishei's will halt, and im- 
 mediately face to the front. 
 
 85. The chiefs of sections and the three guides, will each 
 conform himself to what is prescribed. No. 7S. 
 
 To chang^e direction. 
 
 86. If the commander of a line cf skirmishers shall wish 
 to cause it to change direction to the right, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Right tcTt eel. 2. Mkv.(TSi{(si' double quick — Mauok.) 
 
T46 SKrRMf:;H BRir.i aw bayonet exep.\;i-;e. 
 
 87. At the eominand march, the right guide will mark 
 time in his place ; the left guide will move in a circle to 
 the right, and that ho may properly regulate his morc- 
 ments, will occa-jionally east his eyes to the right, so as to 
 observe the di'fction of the line, and tiie nature of the 
 ground to be passed over. The centre guide will also 
 inarch in a circle to the right, and in order to conform his 
 movements to the general direction, will take care that his 
 fite"""' are only h.i.lf the length of the steps of the guide on 
 t' Joft 
 
 88. The skirmishers will regulate the length of their 
 steps by their distance from the marching flank, being less 
 as they approach the pivot, and greater as they are re- 
 moved from it ; they will often look to the marching flank^ 
 fio as to preserve the direction and their intervals. . 
 
 89. When the commander of the line shall wish to re- 
 sume the direct march, he will command : 
 
 1. Foricard. 2. Marod. 
 
 90. At the command inarch, the line willcease to wheel, 
 and the skirmi.<hers will move direct to the front; the cen- 
 tre guide will march on the point which will be indicated 
 to him. 
 
 91. If the captain should wish to halt the line, in place 
 of moving it to the front, he will command : 
 
 Halt. 
 
 92. At this command, the line will halt. 
 
 93. A changt" of direction to the left will be made ac- 
 cording to the ?ame principles, and by inverse means. 
 
\ SKlIlKISfl «)RILIi AND BATONKT EXERCISE. 147 
 
 # 
 
 y-l. A line of skirmishers marching in retreat, will 
 change direction by the same means, and bj the same 
 c^^mmands, as a line marching in advance; for example, 
 if the captain should wish to refuse his left, now become 
 the right, he will command : 1. Left ivli eel. 2. MARcn. 
 At the command halt, the skirmishers will face to the 
 cnemv. 
 
 95. But if, instead of halting the lino, the captain should 
 wish to continue to march it in retreat, he will, when he 
 judges the line has wheeled sufficiently, command ; 
 
 1. In retreat. 2. March. 
 To inarch by the flank. 
 
 96. The captain, wishing the skirmishera to march by 
 the right flank, will command : 
 
 1. Bi/thcriffhJlanJc. 2. MAncfi {or double r/vick — MARfn.) 
 
 97. At the first ccmmand, the three sergeants will place 
 themselves on the Hne. 
 
 98. At the command mnrck, the skirmishers will face to 
 the right, and move off"; the right guide will place him- 
 self by the side of the leading man on the right to conduct 
 liim, and will march on the point indicated ; each skir- 
 misher will take care to follow exactly in the direction of 
 the one immediately preceding him, and preserve his dis- 
 tance. 
 
 99. The skirmishers may be marched by the left flank^ 
 according to the same principles, and by the same com- 
 asands, substituting' left for ri'jkf ; Wi? l.i't g-uide wil! 
 
148 SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAtONET EXERCIIB. 
 
 place himself by the side of the leading man to conduct 
 him. 
 
 100. If the skirmishers be marching by the flank, and 
 the captain should wish to halt them, he will command : 
 
 Halt. 
 
 101. At this command, the skirmishers will halt and 
 face to the enemy. The officers and sergeants will con- 
 form to what has been prescribed, No. 78. 
 
 102. The reserve should execute all the movements of 
 the line, and be held always about one hundred and fifty 
 paces from it, so as to be in position to second its opera- 
 tions. 
 
 103- When the chief of the reserve shall wish to march 
 it in advance, he will command : 1. Platoon, forward. 
 2. Guide left. 3. March. If he should wish to march it 
 in retreat, he will command : 1. In retreat. 2. March. 
 8. Guide right. At the command halt, it will re-face to 
 the enemy. 
 
 104. The men should be made to underLtand that the 
 elgnals or commands, such ix^ forward, mean that the skir- 
 mishers shall march on the enemy ; in retreat, that they 
 shall retire, and to the right or left flank, that the men 
 must face to the right or left, whatever may be fheir po- 
 sition. 
 
 105. If the skirmishers be marching by the flank, and 
 the captain should wish to change direction to the right 
 (or left) he will command: 1. By file right (or left) 2. 
 MaIvCh. These movements will be executed bv the signali 
 Xes. 11 and I.'), 
 
ffiriaMKH DRILL AKB BATONBT EZERCISR. l40 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 The firinga. 
 
 106. Skirmishers will fire either at a halt or marching. 
 
 To fir eat a halt. 
 
 107. To cause this fire to bo executed, the captain will 
 command : 
 
 Commence — FiRINO. 
 
 108. At this command, briskly repeated, the men of the 
 front rank will commence firing ; they .will reload rapid- 
 ly, and hold themselves in readiness to fire again. During 
 this time the men of the rear rank will come to a ready, 
 and as soon as their respective file leaders hare leaded, 
 they will also fire and reload. The men of each fire will 
 thus continue the firing, conforming to this principle, that 
 the one or the other shall always hare his piece loaded. 
 
 109. Light troops should be always calm, so as to aim 
 with accuracy; they should, moreover, endeavor to esti- 
 mate correctly the distances between themselves and the 
 enemy to be hit, and thus be enabled to deliver their fire 
 with the greater certainty of success. 
 
 110. Skirmishers will not remain in the same place 
 whilst reloading, unless protected by accidents in the 
 ground. 
 
 To fire marching. 
 
 111. This fire will bo executed by the nam* a^raroandg 
 as 1%« fir^ at a halt. 
 
150 SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAy0NET EXERCISE. 
 
 112. At the command commence firing, if the line be 
 advancing, the front rank man of every file will halt, fire, 
 and reload before throwing himself forward. The rear 
 rank man of the same file will continue to march, and after 
 passing ten or twelve paces beyond his front rank man, 
 will halt, come to a ready, select his object, and fire when 
 his front rank man has loaded ; the fire will thus continue 
 to be executed by each file ; the skit-mishiirs will keep 
 united, and endeavor as much as po.ssible to preserve the 
 general direction of the alignment. 
 
 113. If the line be marching in retreat, at the command 
 commence Jiring, the front rank man of every file will halt, 
 face to the enemy, §re, and then reload whilst moving to 
 the rear j the rear rank man of the same file will continue 
 to march, and halt ten or twelve paces beyond his front 
 rank man, face about, come to a ready, and fire when his 
 front rank man has passed him in retreat and loaded ; after 
 which he will move to the rear and reload ; the front rank 
 man in his turn, after marching briskly to the rear, will 
 halt ten or twen#)' paces from the rear rank, face to the 
 enemy, load his piece and fire, conforming to what has 
 just been prescribed , the firing will thus be continued. 
 
 114. If the company be marching by the right flank, at 
 the command, commence Jlring , the front rank manof eve- 
 ry file will face to the enemy, step one pace forward, halt, 
 and fire; the rear rank man will continue to move for- 
 ward. As soon as the front rank man has fired, he will 
 place himself briskly behind his rear rank man and reload 
 whilst marching. When he has loaded, the rear rank man 
 will, in his turn, step one pace forward, halt, and fire ; 
 and returning^ to the ranks, will place himself behind 
 
SKIRMI?!! DRILL AND BAYONET SXERCISE. 151 
 
 his front rank man ; the latter, in his turn, will act in 
 the same niannor, observing the same principles. At the 
 comrmnd, ceanefirinj, the men of the rear rank will re- 
 take their original positions, if not already there. 
 
 115. If the company be marchincj by the loft flank, the 
 fire will be executed accordinc^ to the same principles, but 
 in this case, it will be the rear rank men who will fire first. 
 
 116. The following ruks will be observed in the cases to 
 which they apply. 
 
 117. If the line be firing at a halt, or whilst marching 
 by the flank, at the command, Forxcard — March, it will 
 be the mbn whosj pieces, are loaded, without regard to 
 the particular rank to which they belong, who will move 
 to the front. Those men whose pieces have been discharg- 
 ed, will remain in their places to load them. before moving 
 forward, and the firing will be continued agreeably to the 
 principles prescribed, No. 112. 
 
 118. If the line be fii-ing cither at a halt, advancing, or 
 whilst marching by the flank, at the command. In re- 
 treat — March, the men whose pieces are loaded will re- 
 main faced to the enemy, and will fire in this position; 
 the men whose pieces are discharged will retreat loading 
 them, and the fire will be continued agreeably to the prin- 
 ciples prescribed, No. 113. 
 
 119. If the liiie of skirmishers be firing either at a halt, 
 advancing, or in retreat, at the command, By the rijlit 
 (or lej't)JIanh — March, the men, whose pieces arc loaded, 
 will step one pace out of the general alignment, fact to the 
 enemy, and fire in this position ; the men whose pieces are 
 unloaded will face to the right (or left) and march in 
 the direction indicated. The men who stepped out of 
 
152 SKIRMISH BRILL A:sD TATO'BT EXERCI6E. 
 
 the ranks will place themselves, immediatelj after firing, 
 upon the general direction, and in rear of their front or 
 rear rank men, as the case may lie. The fife will be 
 continued according to the principles prescribed, No 114. 
 
 120. Skirmishers will be habituated to load their pieces 
 whilst marching ; but they will be enjoined to halt always 
 an instant, when in the act of charging cartridge and 
 priming. 
 
 121. They should be practised to fire and load kneeling, 
 lying down and sitting, and much liberty should be allowed 
 in these exercises, in order that they may be executed in 
 the manner found to be most convenient. Skirmishers 
 should be cautioned not to forget that, in whatever posi- 
 tion they may load, it is important that the piece should 
 be placed upright before ramming, in order that the entire 
 charge of powder may reach the bottom of the bore. 
 
 122. In commencing the fire, the men of the same rank 
 should not all fire at once, and the men of the same file 
 should be particular that one or the other of them be aU 
 ways loaded. 
 
 123. In retreating, the officer commanding the skir- 
 mishers should seize on every advantage which the ground 
 may present for arresting the enemy as long as possible., 
 
 124. At the signal to cease firing, the captain will see 
 that the order is promptly obeyed; but the men who may 
 not be loaded, will load. If the line be marching, it will 
 continue the movement; but the man of each file who 
 happens to be in front, M'ill wait until the man in rear shall 
 be abreast with him. 
 
 125. If a line of skirmishers be firing advancing, at tho 
 ♦ommand/irt?/, the line will re-form upon the ^kirmisUevs 
 
AKIRUISU DRILL i.N'D BATQ^'ET EZEROISB. Ibo 
 
 who are in front ; when the line ia retreating, upon the 
 skirmisherB who are in rear. 
 
 126. Officers should watch with the greatest posaiblo 
 Tigilance over a line of skirmishers; in battle they should 
 neither carry a rifle or fowling piece. In all the firings, 
 they, as well as the sergeants, should see that order and 
 silence are preserved, and that the skirmishers do not 
 wander imprudently ; they should especially caution them 
 to be calm and collected ; not to fire until they distinctly 
 perceive the objects at which they aim, and are sure that 
 those objects are within proper range. Skirmishers should 
 take advantage promptly, and with intelligence, of all 
 eheltcr, and of all accidents of the ground, to conceal 
 themselves from the view of the enemy, and in protect 
 themselves from his fire. It may often happen that inter. 
 vals are momentarily lost when several men near each other 
 find a common shelter ; but when they quit this position, 
 they should immediately resume their intervals and their 
 places in line, so that they may not, by crowding, needless- 
 ly expose themselves to the fire of the enemy. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 THE RALLY. 
 
 To form column, 
 
 127. A company deployed as skirmishers, is rallied in 
 order to oppose the enemy with better success ; the rallies 
 are made at a run, and with bayonets fixed ; when ordered 
 to rally, the gkirmishors fix bayonets without command. 
 
154 SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAYONET KXERflgE. 
 
 128. There are several ways of rallying, which the chief 
 of the line will adopt according to circumstances. 
 
 129. If the line, marching* or at a halt, be merely dis- 
 turbed by scattered horsemen, it will not be necessary to 
 fall back oji the reserve, but the captain will cause bayo- 
 nets to be fixed. If the horsemen should, however, ad- 
 vance to charge the skirmishers, the captain will com- 
 mand, rally hy fours. The line will halt, if marching, and 
 the four men of each group will execute this rally in the 
 following manner : the front rank man of the even num- 
 bered file will take the position of guard again't cavalry ; 
 the rear rank man of the odd numbered file will also take 
 the position oi guard agmmt cavalry, turning his back to 
 him, his right foot thirteen inches from the right foot of 
 the former, and parallel to it ; the front fank man of the 
 odd file, and the rear rank man of the even file, will also 
 place themselves back to back, taking a like position, and 
 between the two men alreadly established, facing to the 
 right and left ; the right feet of the four men will be 
 brought together, forming a square and serving for mutu- 
 al support. The four men in each group will come to a 
 ready, fire as occasion may oflfcr, and load without moving 
 iheir feet. 
 
 130. The captains and chiefs of sections will each cause 
 the four men who constitute his guard to form square, the 
 men separating so as to enable him and the bugler to place 
 themselves in the centre. The three sergeants will each 
 promptly place himself in the group nearest him in the 
 line of skirmishers. 
 
 131. When ever the captain shall judge these squares too 
 weak, but should wish to hold his position by strengthen- 
 
 n^: his lin-v h* v ill ce;nmand : 
 
SKIRMISH BRILL A!» BAYONET EXERCISS, 155 
 
 Jially hy sections. 
 
 132. At this command, the chiefs of sections will more 
 rapidly on the centre group of their respective sections, 
 or on any other interior group whose position might offer 
 a shelter, or other paiticul.ir advantage; the skirmishers 
 will collect rapidly at a run on this group, and without 
 distinction of numbers. The men composing the group on 
 which the formation is made, will immediatel}' form square, 
 as heretofore explained, and elevate their pieces, the bayo- 
 nets uppermost, in order to indicate the point on which 
 the rally is to be made. The other skirmishers, as they ar- 
 rive, will occupy and fill the open angular spaces between 
 these four men, .and successiTcly rally around this first 
 nucleus, and in such manner as to form rapidly a complete 
 circle. The skirmishers will tjrke, as they arrive, the po- 
 sition of charge bayonet, the point of the bayonet more 
 elevated, and will cock their pieces in this position. The 
 movement concluded, the two exterior ranks will fire as 
 occasion may offer, and load without moving their feet. 
 
 133. The captain wifl move rapidly with his guard, 
 wherever he may judge his presence most necessary. 
 
 134. The officers and sergeants will be particular to ob- 
 serve that the rally is made in silence, and with prompti- 
 tude and order ; that some pieces in each of their subdi- 
 visions be at all times loaded, and that the fire is directed 
 on those points only where it will be most effective. 
 
 135. If the reserve should be threatened, it will form in- 
 to a circle around its chief. 
 
 136. If the captain, or commander of a line of skirmish- 
 ers formed ofmanv platoon?, should judge that the rally 
 
156 tKlRUlSe DRILL ANP BAYONET EXBaCISi;. 
 
 by sections does not offer sufficient resistance, he will 
 cause the rally by platoons to be executed, and for this 
 purpose, will command : ^ 
 
 Rally by platoons^ 
 
 137. This movement will be executed according to the 
 same principles, and by the same means, as the rally by 
 sections. The chiefs of platoons will conform to what has 
 been prescribed for the chiefs of sections. 
 
 138. The captain wishing to rally the skirmishers on the 
 reserve, will command : 
 
 Rally on the reserve. 
 
 139. At this command, the captain will, move briskly on 
 the reserve ; the officer who commands it will take imme- 
 diate steps to form square ; for this purpose, he will cause 
 the half sections on the flanks to be thrown perpendicular- 
 ly to the rear ; he will order the men to come to a ready. 
 
 140. The skirmishers of each section, taking the run, 
 will form rapidly into groups, and upon that man of each 
 group who is nearest the centre of the section. These 
 groups will direct themselves diagonally toward each oth- 
 er, and in such manner as to form into sections with the 
 greatest possible rapidity while moving to the rear ; the 
 officers and sergeants will see that this formation is made 
 in proper order, and the chiefs will direct their sections 
 upon the reserve, taking care to unmask it to the right 
 and left. As the skirmishers arrive, they will continue 
 and complete the formation of the square begun by the re- 
 serve, closing in rapidly upon the latter, without regard 
 i« their place? in line t thoV will come to a ready without 
 
KIRVISB DRir.I. ANB BATONEI SIEF.CI8S. IdT 
 
 eommand, and fire upon the enemy ; which will also be 
 done by the reserve as soon as it is unmasked by the skir- 
 mishers. 
 
 141. If a section should be closely pressed by cavaly 
 while retreating, its chief wiU command halt ; at this com- 
 mand, J,he men will form rapidly into a compact circle 
 around the otficer, who will re-form his section and resume 
 the march, the moment be can do so with safety. 
 
 14'2. The formation of the square in a prompt and effi- 
 cient manner, requires coolness and activity on the part 
 of both officers and sergeants. 
 
 143. The captain will also profit by every moment of 
 respite which the enemy's cavalry may leave him ; as soon 
 as he can, he will endeavor to place himself beyond the 
 reach of their charges, either by gaining a position where 
 he may defend himsef with advantage, or by returning to 
 the corps to which he belongs. For this purpose, being in 
 square, he will cause the company to break into column 
 by platoons at half-distanee ; to this effect, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Foi'ni column. 2. March. 
 
 144. At the command march, each platoon will dress on 
 its centre, and the platoon which was facing to the rear 
 will face about without command. The guides will place 
 themselves on the right and left of theirj respective pla- 
 toons, those of the second platoon will place themselves at 
 half distance from those of the first, counting from the 
 rear rank. These dispositions being made, the captain can 
 move the column in whatever direction he may judge 
 proppr. 
 
158 SKlEiHSH DRILL iJST) BAYONET EXERCISE. 
 
 145. If he wishes to march it in retreat, he will com- 
 mand : ' 
 
 1. In retreat. 2. March (or douhle .^jucA;— March. ) 
 
 146. At the command march, the column will immedi- 
 ately face by the rear rank, and move off in the opposite 
 direction. As soon as the column is in motion, the captain 
 will command : 
 
 3. Guide right (or left.) 
 
 147. He wiU indicate the direction to the leading guide, 
 the guides will march at their proper distances, and the 
 men will keep aligned. 
 
 148. If again threatened by cavaly, the captain will 
 command : 
 
 1. Form square. 2. March. 
 
 149. At the command march, the column will halt ; the 
 first plotoon will face about briskly, and the outer half sec- 
 tions of each platoon will be thrown perpendicularly to 
 the rear, so as to form the second and third fronts of the 
 square. The officers and sergeants will promptly rectify 
 any^irregularities which may be committed. 
 
 150. If he should wish to march the column in advancGj 
 the captain will command : 
 
 ], Form column. 2. March. 
 
 151. Which will be executed as prescribed, No. 174. 
 
 152. The column being formed, the captain will com- 
 mand ; 
 
^fMBMlSU OTHtt ANI> BATUNEt ElKRtTSE, 153 
 
 1, Forward. 2. Mahgh (or doable fjJtlck — March. ) 
 Guide left (or right.) 
 
 lo3. At the second command, the calunui will move for- 
 ward, and at the third command, the nicii will take the 
 touch of elbows to the side of the guide. 
 
 lot. Iftlic captain should wish the column to gain 
 ;:;round to the right or left, ho will do so by rapid wheels 
 to the side opposite the guide, and for tlii? purpose, will 
 change the guide whenever it maj be neces5ary. 
 
 155. If a company be in column by platnnn, at half dis- 
 tance, right in front, the captain can dci)lc)y the first pla- 
 toon as skirmishers by the means already ?xplained ; but 
 if it should be the wish to deploy the second platoon for- 
 ward on the centre file, leaving the fir^t platoon in reserve, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Second platoon — as tikinnixhcrH. '1. On the centre file — 
 tftlce intervals. 3. March (or fZoi(6?c quick — MAUcn.) 
 
 156. At the first command, the chief of the first platoon 
 will caution his platoon , to stand fast; the chiefs of sec- 
 tions of the second platoon will place them.sclvcs before 
 the centre of their sections ; the fifth sergeant will placo 
 himself one pace in front of the centre of the second pla- 
 toon. 
 
 157. At the second command, the chief of the right sec- 
 tion, ::ccond platoon, will command : Section, right face ; 
 the chief of the left secticn : Section, left face. 
 
 158. At the command march, the-so sections will move 
 ott" briskly in opposite directions, and having unmasked the 
 the fir'-'t platoop, the chief ff fcct-ions will respectively 
 
160 »S.1KMISH KDILL ANB B.VTOiiET EXERCISK. 
 
 command: Jiy the left flank — March, and By the right 
 Jlank — March; and as soon as the sections arrire on the 
 alignment of the first platoon, they will command : Jin 
 «kirmisher8 — MAucn. The group will then deploy accord- 
 ing to prescribed principles, on the right group of the left 
 section, whicli will be directed by the fifth sergeant on the 
 point indicated. 
 
 159. If the captain should wish the deployment made by 
 the flank, the second platoon will be moved to the front by 
 the means above stated, and haltea after passing some steps 
 beyon the alignment of the first platoon ; the deployment 
 will then be made by the flank according to the princi- 
 ples prescribed. 
 
 160. When one or more platoons are deployed as skir- 
 mishers, and the captain should wish to rally them on the 
 battalion, he will command : 
 
 Rally on the, battalion. 
 
 IGl. At this command, the skirmishers and the reserve 
 no matter what position the company to which they belong 
 may occupy in order of battle, will rapidly unmask the 
 front of the battalion, directing themselves in a run to- 
 ward its nearest flank, and then form in its rear. 
 
 162. As soon as the skirmishers have passed beyond the 
 line of file closers, the men will take the quick step, and 
 the chief of each platoon or section will re-form his sub- 
 division, and place it in column behind the wing on which 
 it is rallied, and at ten paces from the rank of file closers. 
 These subdivisions will not be moved except by order of 
 the commander of the battalion, who may, if he thinks 
 
•) ^^opcT, throw tliem into line of battl- at the extremities of 
 the line, or in the intervals between the battalions. 
 
 163. If man}' platoons shonid be united behind the same 
 ^inp; of a battalion, or behind any shelter whatsoever, 
 they shouW be fornaod ahray« into cloce column, or into 
 ct>lamn at half distancf. 
 
 104. V.'hen a battalion, covcrod by a company of skir- 
 wiii-hers, .«hall be formed into square, the platoooaand sec- 
 tions of the covering company will be directed bj their 
 chiefs to the rear of the square, which will be opened at 
 the angles to receive the skirmishers, who will be then 
 formed into close column by platoona in rear of the first 
 front of the square. 
 
 165. If circumstances should prevent the angles of the 
 square from being opened, the pkirmi.'licri? will throw 
 themselves at the feet of the front rank men, the right, 
 knee on the ground, the butt of the piece testing on the 
 thigh, the bayonet in a threatening position. A part may 
 also place themselves about the angles, where they can 
 render good service by defending the ?cctiuos without fire. 
 
 166. If the battalion on which the skirmishers are ral- 
 lied be in column ready to form square, the skirmisher-- 
 will be formed into cloee column by platoon, in rear of the 
 centre of the third division, and at the command. Form 
 «quarc — Mabch, they will move forward and close on thy 
 buglers. 
 
 107. When skirmishers have been r.illicd by platoon (»i 
 section behind the wings of a battalion, and it be wished 
 to deploy them again to the front, they will be marched 
 by the flank toward the intervals on the wings, and be 
 then deplovod so at* to cover the front of the battalion. 
 6 ' ' 
 
I(t3 SKIKUISH DRILL A}M> BATOMEX SXHRCISK. 
 
 168. When platoons or sections, placed in the interior 
 ©f squares and columns, are to be depToyed, tkey will be 
 inarched oat by the flanks, and then thrown forward, as is 
 prescribed, No. 157 ; as soon as they shall have unmasked 
 the column or square, they will be deployed, the one od 
 the right, the other on the left file. 
 
 The assmhly. 
 
 169. A company deployed a3 skirmishers will bd assem- 
 bled when there is no longer danger of being disturbed } 
 the assembly will be made habitually in quick time. 
 
 170. The captain wishing to assemble the skirmishers oa 
 the reserve, will command ; 
 
 Jiaaemhle on the reterve. 
 
 171. At this eommand, the skirmishers will assemble by 
 groups of fours ; the front rank men will place themselves 
 behind their rear rank men ; and caeh groap cf foars wiU 
 direct itself on the reserve, where each will take its proper 
 place in the ranks. When the company is re-formed, it 
 will rejoin the battalion to which it belongs. 
 
 172. It may be also proper to assemble the skismishers 
 «n the centre, or on the right or left of the line, either 
 inarching or at a halt. 
 
 175. If the captain should wish to assemble them on the 
 centre whilie marching, he will command : 
 
 Asetmhle ©u the centre, 
 
 174. At this command, the centre guide will continu© 
 to march directly to the front on the point indicated ; the 
 front rank nxaa of the directing file vnW follow the guide, 
 
and be corered by hia rear rank man ; the oth»r two com- 
 radec of this irroup. and likewise thope on their left, will 
 march diagonally, advancing tlie \-eft shoulder and accele- 
 rating the gait, so as to re-form the groups while drawing 
 nearer and nearer the directing file; the men of the right 
 section will unite in (he same manner into groups, and 
 then upon the directing file, throwing forward the righ^ 
 shoulder. As they succesi'ivcly unite on th« centre, tho 
 men will bring their pieces to the right shoulder. 
 
 175. To assemble on the right or left will be executed 
 according to the samo principles. 
 
 176. The assembly of a line marching io retreat will alsa 
 be ejcecuted a<vording to the came principles, the front 
 rank men inarching behind their rear rank men. 
 
 177. To assemble the line of nklrraishers at a halt, and 
 on the line they occupy, the captain will gire the same 
 commands ; the pkirmisherg will face to the right or left, 
 aopording as they should inarch by the right or left flank, 
 re-form the groups w bile marching, and thus arrive on the 
 file which ecrvcd as the point of formation. As they sue- 
 ceesiTely Ririre, the skirmiflhers will support arm«. 
 
 Article Fii-TJf. 
 
 T<'> deploi/ a battalion a$ ihirmtHherft, and Io rally this bat- 
 talion. 
 
 To deploy iha battalion ns ekirmiihert. 
 
 178. A battalion being in line ot battle, if the comman- 
 irt<T ?bou!d wish to depley it on tJie right of the eixth com- 
 
pany, holding tbe three right companies in reserve, will sig- 
 nify hiri intention to the lieutenant-colonel and adjutant, 
 and also to the major, wlio will be directed to take charge 
 of the reserve. He will point out to the lieutenant-colo- 
 nel the direction he wishes to give the line, as well aa the 
 point where he wishes the right of the siztb company to 
 rest, and to the commander of the reserve tbo place he 
 may wish it established. 
 
 179. The lieutenant-colonel will move rapidly in front 
 of the right of the 8ixth company, and the adjutant in 
 front of the left of the same compacy. The commander 
 of tbe reserve will dispose of it in the mat>nf»r to be herc- 
 ioafer indicated. 
 
 180. The colonel will command : 
 
 1. First (or second) i^latoons — c? skirmiihetf^, 
 
 2. On the right of the sixth company — tala: intcrvah, 
 
 3. Map.CK (or double quicJc) — Mabch. 
 
 181. At the second command, the captains of the fifth 
 and sixth companies v/ill prepare to deploy the first pla- 
 toons of their respective companies, the sixth on its right, 
 the fifth on its left file. 
 
 182. The captain of the fourth company will face it to 
 the right, and the captains of the seventh and eight com- 
 panies will face ihcir respective companies to the left. 
 
 183. At the command march, the movement will com- 
 mence. The platoons of the tifth and sixth companies 
 will deploy forward ; the right guide of the sixth will 
 march on the point which will be indicated to him by the 
 lieutenant colonel. 
 
 ]8i. The company which ha? faci>d ^o the rig-bt. and 
 
aUo the companies uhich bare faced to the left will march 
 straight forward. The fourth company will take an in- 
 terval of one hundred paces counting from the left cf the 
 fifth, and its chief will deploy its first platoon on its left 
 file. The seventh and eighth companies will each take au 
 Interval of one hundred paces, counting from the first file 
 of the company, which is immediately on its right ; and the 
 chiefs of these comjianies will afterward deploy their first 
 platoons on the right file. 
 
 186. The guides who conduct the filee on which the de- 
 ployment is made, should be careful to direct themselves 
 toward the outer man of the neighboring company, al- 
 ready deployed as tkirmishers ; or if the company has not 
 finished its deployment, they will judge carefullv the dis- 
 tance which ma3-^till be required to place all these filesin 
 line, and will then march on the i)oint thus marked out. 
 The companies, as they arrive on the line, will align thcni- 
 aelvcs on those already deployed. , 
 
 186. The lieutenant-colonel and adjutant will follow the 
 deployment, the one on the right, the other on the left; 
 the movement concluded, they will place themselves near 
 the colonel. 
 
 1S7. The reserves of the companies will he established 
 in echellon in the following manner : the reserve of tlj<» 
 sixth company will be placed one liundred and fifty paces 
 in rear of the right of this company ; the reserves of the 
 fourth and fiflli companies, unined, opposite the centre of 
 their line of skirmi.-iherp, and thirty paces in advance of 
 the reserve of the sixth company ; the reserves of tlie 
 seventh and eighth companies, also united, opposite the 
 <rntrc of their line of .'lji;j!ii?h."r?, and thittv paofp far- 
 
ther to the rear than the reserve of the eixth compaay. 
 
 188. The major comniandir.g the companies compoeiug 
 the reserve, on receiving an order from the colonel to that 
 effect, will march these companiee thirty paces to the 
 rear, and will then deploy them into column by company, 
 at half distance ; after which, he will conduct the column 
 to the point which shall have been indicated to him. 
 
 189. The colonel will have a pjeneral superintendence of 
 the movement ; and when it it finished, will move to a 
 point in rear of the line, whence his view may best em- 
 brace all the parts, in order to diiect their movements. 
 
 190. If, instead cf deploying forward, it be desired to 
 deploy by the; flank, the sixth and fifth companies will be 
 moved to the front ten or twelve paces, halttd, and deploy- 
 ed by the flank, the one on the right the other on the left 
 file, by the means already indicated. Each of the other 
 companies will be marched by the flank; and as soon as - 
 the last file of the .company; next toward the direction, 
 phall have taken its interval, it will be moved upon the line 
 established by the fifth and sixth companies, halted and 
 deployed. 
 
 191. In the proceeding example, it has been eupposcd 
 that the battalion was in order of battle ; but if in column, 
 it would be deployed as skirmishers by the same command* 
 and according to the same principles. 
 
 192. If the deployment is to be ma.de fortcard, the di- 
 rectino" company, as soon as it is unmasked, will be moved 
 ten or twelve paces in front of the head of the column, 
 and will be then deployed on the file indicated. Each of 
 the other companies will take its interval to the right or 
 Irft. and detploy aff °^oob 9^ it is tak«T». 
 
ffivtn?Mas vtAL Jijct 9k f SMI E:siR«nT. 16V 
 
 193. If the deployment in to be made by the flank, the 
 directing company Tvill be moved in the same manner to 
 the front, as soon as it is unmasked, and will then be halted 
 and deploy«!d by the flank on the file indicated. Each of 
 the other companies will be marched by the flank, and when 
 its interval is taken, will be moved on the line, halted, and 
 deployed as foon as the company next towards the direction 
 shall have finij-hed its dt-ployment. 
 
 194. It has been prescribe! to place the reserves in 
 echellon, in order that they may, in the event of a rally, 
 be able to protect themselves without injuring each other; 
 and the reserves of two contiguous companies have been 
 united, in order to diminish the number of the ecbellons, 
 and to increase their capacity for resisting cavalrr. 
 
 195. Theechellons, in the example given, descend from 
 right to left, but they may, oh an indication from the colo- 
 nel to the effect, be posted on the same principle, so as to 
 descend from left to right. 
 
 196. When the color-company is to be deployed as skir- 
 mishers, the color, without its guard, will be detached, and 
 remain with the battalion reserve. 
 
 The rally. 
 
 197. The colonel may cause all the various movements 
 prescribed for a company, to be executed by the battalion, 
 and by the same commands and the same signals. When 
 he wishes to rally the battalion, he will cause the rally on 
 the battalion to be sounded, and will so dispose his reserve 
 as to protect this movement. 
 
 198. The companies deployed as skirmishers will be ral- 
 lied ia pqutrts ©n their resper live rwerres : each rsfervf 
 
168 SXJPvMtSH DRILL A^D BATUNET BXBRCI68, 
 
 of tw"0 contipfuous companies will form the first front of 
 the square, throwing to the rear the sections on the flanks ; 
 the skirmishers who arrive first will complete the lateral 
 fronts, and the last the fourth front. The officers and ser- 
 geants will superintend the rally ; as fast as the men ar- 
 rive, they will form them into two ranks, without regard 
 to height, and cause them to face outward. 
 
 199. The rally being effected, the commanders of square 
 will profit by any interval of time the cavalry may allow 
 for putting them in safety, either by marching upon the 
 battalion reserve, or by seizing an advantageous position ; 
 to this end each of the squares will be formed into column, 
 and march in this order ; and if threatened anew, it will 
 halt, and again form itself into square. 
 
 200. As the captains successively arrive near the battal- 
 ion-reserve, each will re-form as promptly as possible, and 
 without regard to designation or number, take place in 
 the column next in rear of the companies already in it. 
 
 201. The battalion reserve will also form square, if it- 
 self threatened by cavalry. In this case, the companies in 
 marching toward it will place themselves promptly in the 
 sectors without fire, and thus jiiarch on the squares. 
 
BAYONET EXEltriSR. 
 
 1. lu teaching the men these exercises, the instructor 
 fihould cause them to form in one rank, with an interval 
 of four paces between each man, so that in the execution 
 of the movements, they may not come in conflict with each 
 other. 
 
 2. The instructor seeing the recruits in the proper po- 
 sition, and at alight infantry shoulder, will command: 
 
 Take- Gvxnx). {Fig. 1.) 
 
 One time and txco motions. 
 
 3. (First motion. ) Make a half face to the right, keep- 
 ing the heela together ; turn the left toe square to the 
 front, the feet forming a right angle, and at the same time 
 raise a little the piece with the right hand. 
 
 4. (Second motion.) Carry the right foot about eigh- 
 teen inches backward, the right heel on the prolongation 
 of the left, the body erect and perpenriicular on both legs, 
 no that the weight of the body is divided equally between 
 them, the knees bent, and take the position of charge 
 bayonet. 
 
 5. The instructor wishing to allow the recruits a rest 
 when on guard, will first command : 
 
 Shoulder— \u-H9. 
 Ci. At this command, spring the muekct up smartly into 
 the h'.lloiv of the ri|jlit ^llOulf^»^. and ret.;'r.e (he poHitioH 
 
7, The instructor will then command Rrst, at which 
 command the piece will be brought to the position oi'order 
 arms, and the men are no longer required to remain im- 
 movable or to preserve silence. 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 fOdiiion of the (Juard. 
 
 8. The instructor wishing to resume the position of 
 guard, will first bring the squad to ativntlon, and com- 
 mand, Shott^cfvr — Akm», wUioU boing done, ha will com- 
 isand : 
 
Take — Gtaru. 
 
 9. At this command, raise the piece quicklj with the 
 right hand, seizing it with the left, at the height of the 
 right breast, and at the same time grasp the small of tho 
 etock with the right hand, taking the guard, a? before ex- 
 plained. 
 
 DEVELOP AN'D VOLTS. 
 
 10. The recruit being in the pof^ition of guard, the in- 
 structor will command: 
 
 Z)crc7o/»— March. (Fij. 2.) 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 11. At the command mrrrcA, advance quicklv the left 
 foot about twelve inch(.'s, the left leg vertical and the knee 
 perpendicular with the ankle ; the right foot flat on the 
 ground, the right kg extended and straight, the body re- 
 maining erect. 
 
 12. At the command Guahd, re-take the position of 
 guard by bringing back the left foot to its former position. 
 
 13. The instructor will then command: 
 
 Advance — Makch. 
 On* time and tico mottom. 
 
 14. (First motion. ) At the commaad marcA, carry the 
 right foot against the left heel. 
 
 15. (Second motion. ) Advance the left foot nbnut eigh- 
 teen inches, preserving the po&ition of the piece and the 
 body. 
 
 /?e^rca«— Makoh. 
 
 9r« ''*n* mnm '»^« m9''.»f>t. 
 
172 
 
 SRfKMIsin »RjLl> AM» i<ATO.N.Sr HXSKVISU. 
 
 16. (First motion. ) Bring back the left foot agaicst iha 
 rij^ht. 
 
 17. (Second motion.) Carry the right foot eighteen 
 inches to the lea.". 
 
 /V^. 2. 
 
 Dcveloj). 
 One pace to right — March. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 18. ( First motion. ) Carry th(5,ri^hfc foot about eighteen 
 inches t© tfee ri«rht in thp same directiea. 
 
lilHUttH DRILL aJSP BaTOXET CX£hil€S. K-i 
 
 10, (Second motion,) Bring Immediately the leftfoo: 
 the game (listfloce, and to the ««*me reiative position to ib' 
 rijflit, that it before occupied. 
 
 One pace to (he /c//— Mauck. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 20. (First motion.) Carry the left foot about cigTitocn 
 inches to the left. 
 
 21. (Second motion. ) Bring- back immediately the rigKt 
 foot to it/* distance, and in its position- 
 
 Jiight—V uLT. 
 
 Oi'C titnc and one nioiin-.u 
 
 I'l. Turn to the right on the toe of the left foot, (tl.«, 
 ripht f(»ot dcscribinjj the quarter of an arc of a circle ; 
 plant the right foot in its proper place and distance, kceii- 
 u\% tlio piece in the position of guard. 
 
 Left — Volt. 
 
 23. Turn to the left on the toe of the left foot, (tt- 
 right foot describing the quarter of an arc of a circle) , 
 plant the rigfht foot in its proper place and distance, kee;i- 
 ing the piece in the position of gnrird. 
 
 'ii. The instructor should explain to the men that ther o 
 movements are the same as right or left face in squad dnll, 
 except that the position of guard is always maintained. 
 
 R'ght rear — Vor.T. 
 
 2j. At thif command, turn on the toe of the left fo€f, 
 (the right foot dccfcribiug the half on an arc of a circle- 
 
prant the foot in its proper place and distance; keeping the 
 pice© in the position of guard. 
 
 Left rear— YoLT, 
 
 26. Tnrn on the too of the left foot, (the right foot de- 
 acriblng the half of an arc of a circle,) plant the foot in its 
 proper place and distance, keeping the piece in the posi- 
 tion h{ guard. 
 
 27. In all the volts, the instructor shall be careful to ex- 
 plain to the men, that when the word right, is used, they 
 must carry the right foot, in turnins:, in the directien of 
 their rear, and when Uft is used, in the direction of their 
 front. In the right or left rear volt, the recruit faces qoicft- 
 ly to tho full rear, as in ahoutface. 
 
 1. Pasaade — 2. March. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 26. (First motion.) Throw the right foot eighteen incb^ 
 es in fVont of the left, the inside of it kept to the front. 
 
 20. (Second motion.) Carry quickly the left foot eigh- 
 teen inches in front of the right, preserving the guard. 
 
 1. Leap to the rear — 2. March. 
 
 0/jft time and twa nioiiofis, 
 
 30. Threw the weight of the body on the left Tog, an^ 
 spring backward as far as possible, lighting on the toes 
 and preserving the guard. 
 
 COMBINATION OF THE MOVEMENTS, 
 ai. "When the men are perfectly acquainted with th-e 
 above movements, the instructor will cause them to exe* 
 t'uie the various movements put together, at the com- 
 suiaQ March, Example : 
 
SKIRMISH DMLL A.SD BATOSBT BXBB6ISS. 17» 
 
 I. Hight Tear voJt and develop— 2^ Mi.ECa. 
 
 32. At this command the men will execute what hai 
 been prescribed in right rear— Volt No. 25, and after fao 
 ing to the rear they will extend the left foot as haa been 
 prescribed in Dbvblop No. 11. 
 
 1. Left rear voU and develop — 2. Marck« 
 
 33. At tho command march, first execute aa has beea 
 prescribed in No. 26, then execute what is prescribed in 
 No. 11, preBcrring the guard ia both cases. 
 
 1. Paimde audd€velop^2. MinCH. 
 
 34. At the command march, first execute what has beea 
 prescribed in Passabb No. 28, and then what is prescribed 
 in No 11. 
 
 1.- Right rear volt, paaaaJe, and develop — 2. Marcb. 
 
 One time and three motio»f, 
 
 35. (First motion.) Execute what has been prescribel 
 for right rear voltj No. 27. 
 
 3G. Second motion. ) Execute what has been prescribed 
 for Passadk No. 28. 
 
 37. (Third motion.) Execute what has b-jen prescribed 
 for Develop No. 11. 
 
 38. The instructor may vary these movements as he 
 sees proper, but should see that the men understand them 
 and can execute them promptly at tho word of command. 
 
 39. When the men understand these movements tibor- 
 oughly they will be taught the «ee of their weapon for at- 
 tack an(i d<^fen<^e. 
 
ITG s&rKuisu bXitLh an» BAyoNEr exkroisb. 
 
 PARRIES AND THRUSTS. 
 
 ' 40. Them^u being well-established in the principles and 
 -mechanism of the guard, and being in that position, the 
 instructor ■will command ; 
 
 1. Ill curie jHiVrtf. 2, Akms. 
 
 . 41. At the second command, raise the muzzle of the 
 piece twelve inches with the left hand, without moving 
 the right; at the aame time move the piece about six 
 inches to the left, and remain in that position. 
 f- 42. The men will, after the execution of each of the fol- 
 lowing; in -ivementS;, resume the position of guard / to effect 
 this the instructor will, after each motion, command i 
 
 Take. — GuAiip. 
 
 43. At which Ihc^men will resume quickly the position 
 of the guard. 
 
 1. In iierce 2iart y. 2. Aums. 
 
 44. Raise) quickly the muzzle of the piece twelve incUca 
 ■ with the left hand, without moving; the right ; at the same 
 
 time move the piece with the left hand six inches to the 
 'right, and remain In that position until the command re- 
 ' iutna (jv.ard : 
 
 I. In prime parry. 2. Arms. 
 
 Kh. \\i'\?<i th»» pifc? with hMh hand-^, th? arnja fullr ftt. 
 
« >»i*« t'K I t. 
 
 tt-ndfd, ibe piece cororing the head, the lock plate turufd 
 to'A'ard^ the body, the barrel grasped by the thumb and 
 fore-fingor ofthe left hand, the bayonet menacing, although 
 slightly inclined to the lef*., the tail band at the top of the 
 hat. 
 
 1. hi prime right ot left) parri/^ 2. AnMS. 
 
 Hi. Advance the left shoulder for the ripht abo«lUer) 
 and parry I'as explained in 45) to the right or the left. 
 
 ]. Li rnric thrust. 3. Arvs. 
 
 <7. At the second command, throw the '.veight of tUe 
 hody forward ; bend the left knee and etraighten the 
 right; extend the left arm in full, the fin£r:'r3 of the Ifft 
 handjjeing open and maintaining the piece ; bringing the 
 butt before the left breast, the lock-plate turned down- 
 ward ; and reiiiain in that posltidn until tlio ei>nimand. tnhe 
 fftiard . 
 
 I. In tieic thrufif. 2. Ahm-;. 
 
 48. Bring the upper part of the body forward ; straight- 
 en the right knee and bend the left; fully extend the loft 
 arm, the fingers of the left hand being open and maintain- 
 ing the piece, the lock-plato turned i;pwnrd, the butt be- 
 lure tho right b»ca?t : 
 
 1. In prime thrust. -. Aum5. 
 
 ■t;>. Elerat? the pleee with holh listed?, the ormi b«it)!» 
 jKle'ndcd. lk« trijfjtiv guard un\v;):d, tk« l.arr-.'l hotwecra 
 
the thumb and fingers of the left hand ; bepd the left knee 
 and straighten the right, thurst at the same time the piece 
 at the adrersary, directing the blow at the height of a man 
 on horseback. 
 
 1. In prime to the right (or left) thrust. 2. Arms. 
 
 50. Advance the left shoulder (or the right shoulder,) 
 advance to the right (or left) as explained in No. 49. 
 
 1. Lunge. 2. Arms. 
 
 51. At the second comnaand, throw the upper part of the 
 body forward, by bending the left knee and straightening 
 the right ; thrust rapidly the piece at the adversary, fully 
 extending the right arm, leaving off with the left hand 
 when thrusting, which is kept extended to receive th« 
 piece, and resume guard. 
 
 62. When the men are on guard against infantry, they 
 will thrust at the height of the breast of a man ; when on 
 guard against cavalry, they will aim the blow at the 
 height of the horses head, or of the sides of the horse- 
 man. 
 
 63. When tJie instructor shall wish to bring the men to 
 the position of guard against infantry, or cavalry, from 
 fihoulder arms, he will command : 
 
 1. Guard against Infantry — 2. Guard. {Fig. ^.) 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 54. (First motion.) Make a half face to the right on 
 both heels, ths^ feet square ; rai.se at the same time the 
 piece a little, and seize it with the left band below MXJ 
 »i»ar tlio middle )tini. 
 
rmiRMrsK ikul a!t» batoxit bxcrciik. 
 
 17> 
 
 l»5. (Second motion.) Bring the right l<gto the rear 
 p'^rpondicularLy, about eighteen inches, th? right heel ou 
 the same line with the left ; the knees a little bent, the 
 weight of the body bearing equally on both legs ; lower 
 the piece with both hands, the barrel upward, the left el- 
 
 rirj. 3. 
 
 m 
 
 bow pressing against the body ; sicze at the same time the 
 piece below the trigger guard with the right band; the 
 arms hauj^iny natarally, th* fff>lBt of th* bayonet sliy'h't- 
 It elpvat^H. 
 
IbQ 
 
 Ki!;^U^a Ur-n.!, A\» BATO.NKr UXttCtfl*?. 
 
 One time ami ons motion. 
 50. Raise the piece with the left haud ; l)iiug at the 
 «amc time the right heel on the alignmyiii of tho U-ft, and 
 face to the front. 
 
 1. Guard ngain^t C'lcahi/ — 2. GuARO. {Fi<j. ■{.) 
 One time and tico mo'ions. 
 
 57. Tho lirst and second motions as in guard ai,'aiu«t ia- 
 fantry, with the'exceptien that the right hand will be fit- 
 (Ficj.L) . 
 
 Guard against Qavolri;. 
 od at thf hip. and the bavonet aa higli a.? ihe r_x p a? Ih tk** 
 )w.>,silion oi' (iMv^? havn((f»t- 
 
KKUiMISB Vnil.L \^}i BATUMI EXEr.c;**. 181 
 
 jt<. When tlie men arc perfectly acquainted with thcdi- 
 veri paces, parries and thrusts, the instructor will causo 
 them to execute these motions put together, at the com- 
 mand jnarck. Example : 
 
 1. Paanade forward, in prime pdrry and thrii*t. — 2 
 MAHcn. 
 
 55. At the second command the men will ticcuto \v1i«i 
 Has been prciciibed for paseade, parry in prime, and thruit 
 in prime. 
 
 60. These morcmcnta and combinations maj be varied 
 as the instructor may think proper, but he ehould always 
 execute some movement that will be useful to the nicn in 
 either attack or dcfonfic, and should explain to th»m iti 
 object. 
 
1|2 |1T;t!lt> 91A.MSir/; STt. 
 
 i 
 
 MANUAL OF THE SWORD OR SABRE, FOR 
 OFFICERS. 
 
 POSITION or THE SWORD OR SABRE, UNDER ARMS. 
 
 The carry. The gripe is in the right hand, which will 
 be supported against the right hip, the back of the blafde 
 against the shoulder. 
 
 TO SALUTE WITH THE SWORD OR SABRE. 
 
 Threetimei (or pautei.) 
 
 One. At the distance ot six paces from th» persen to bt 
 saluted, raise the sword or sabre perpendicularly, th« 
 point up, the flat of the blade opposite to the right eye, 
 the guard at the height of the shoulder, the elbow sup* 
 ported on the body. 
 
 Ttco. Drop the point of the sword or sabre by extending 
 the arm, so that the right hand may be brought to the 
 side of the right thigh, and remain in that position until 
 the person to whom the salute is rendered shall be passed 
 or shall hare passed, six paces. 
 
 Three. Raise the sword or sabre smartly, and place th« 
 back of the blade against the right shoulder. 
 
 COLOR-SALUTE. 
 
 In the ranks, the color-bearer, whether at a halt sr ia 
 TMarcTi, will iRlw»;Tg ^ari't tVe h«?«1 ff tlie «^lcfr-!aB'<J» *o>- 
 
poitdd at the right hip, the right hand generally placed 
 on the lance at the height of the shoulder, to hold it stead j. 
 When the color has to render honors, the color-bearer will 
 salute as follows : 
 
 At the distance of six paces slip the right hand along the 
 lance to the height of the eye ; lower the lance by straight- 
 ening the arm to its full extent, the heel of the lance re- 
 maining at the hip, and bring back the lance to the ha- 
 bitual position when the person saluted shall be passed, or 
 flhall have passed, six paces. 
 
 MANUAL 
 FOR RELIEVING SENTISELS. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 Throw the piece diagonally across the body, the lockt» 
 the front, seize it smartly at the same instant with both 
 hands, the right at the handle, the left at the lower band, 
 the two thumbs pointing toward the muzzle, the barrel 
 sloping uoward and crossing opposite the point of the left 
 shoulder, the butt propoitionally lowered. The palm of 
 the right hand will be above, and that of the left under 
 the piece, the naila of both hands next to the body, to 
 which the elbows will be closed. 
 
 Shot IJcr — Abms. 
 ^ . One time anl tno motions. 
 
 ( /Tnrf >w.»fa oil. ) Brinj {\9 pieces enntrttr t« t>« m^bt 
 
184 
 
 HKUKYl-Ntf .«iKNTJ.N.K}.S. Kit. 
 
 shoulder, placing the right hand aa in the position of 
 shoulder arma, slip the left hand to the height of the shoul- 
 der, the fingers extended. 
 
 {Second motion. ) Drop the left had smartly by the side. 
 
 Being on parade and at order arms, if it be wished to 
 give the men reat, the command will be : 
 
 Parade — Rest. 
 
 At the command rest, turn the piece on the heel of the 
 butt, the barrel to the left, the muzzle in front of the cen- 
 tre of the body ; seize it at the same time >vith the left 
 hand just above, and with the right at the upper band ; 
 carry the right foot six inches to the rear, the left knee 
 elightly bent. .; 
 
 INSTRUCTION 
 
 FOR THE CHIEF BUGLER AND DRUM-MAJOR. 
 
 The posts of the field music and band have been given, 
 Title I, for the order in battle. 
 
 In column in manauvre, the field music and band will 
 march abreast with the left centre company, and on the 
 fide opposite the guide. 
 
 In column in route, as well as in passage of defiles, to 
 the front or in retreat, they will march at the head of their 
 respective battalions. 
 
!Ss'fntCilt»> FOR tHIEF BCGl/ER, R1». lib 
 
 GENERAL CALLS. 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. The general. 
 
 3. The atscmbli/. 
 
 4. To the color. 
 
 5. The recall. 
 f>. Quick time. 
 
 7. Double quick time. 
 
 8. The charge. 
 
 9. The reveille. 
 
 10. Retreat. 
 
 11. Tattoo. 
 
 12. To extinguishliyhtu, 
 
 13. A^f^enihly of the buglent. 
 It. ^^Hficmhly of the guard. 
 
 15. Orders for orderly sergeanta. 
 IG. For ojjicers to take their placet 
 in li7ie after firing. 
 
 17. r/ic dixjierse. 
 
 18. Officers' call. 
 
 19. Breakfast call. 
 
 20. Dinner call. 
 
 21. ^icfc ca?/. 
 
 22. Fatigue call. 
 
 23. C^«rc^ ca«. 
 
 24. Drill call. 
 2-5. School tall. 
 
1^^ XNftTAV«T>MJ? DfJt aklZr nVtlkKSi, BTC> 
 
 CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 1. Fix bayonet. 
 
 '1. Uiijlx bayonet. 
 
 3. Quick time. ^ 
 
 ■4. Double quick time. 
 
 6. The run. 
 
 6. Deploy a,a tkirmishert. 
 
 7. Forward. 
 
 8. In retrtat. 
 
 9. Halt, 
 
 10. ^y <A« right Jlanh. 
 
 11. J?y «/»« leftfianh. 
 )fi. Commence firing f 
 
 13. Cease firing. 
 
 14. Change direction to (he right. 
 
 15. Change direction to the left. 
 
 16. Xitf down. 
 
 17. iZtse «p. 
 
 18. Rally by fonrt. 
 
 19. Rally by sections. 
 
 20. Rally by platoons. 
 
 21. Rally on the reserve. 
 
 22. i?a?Zy on ^Ae battalion. 
 
 23. Assemhlt on the batalion. 
 
 Note. — When the whole of the troops, in the same 
 camp or garrison, are to depart, the general, the asvtmbly 
 and to the color, will be beaten or sounded, at the proper 
 intervals, in the order herein mentioned. At the first, the 
 troops will prepare for the movement ; at the second, they 
 vrill ftrm >»v fOBparr, ^^A ti ttie thir^ tiBU»lrr IniHtIi*!': 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATION, 
 
 PART FIFTH. 
 
 I. Field "WonKS arc any constructions which h«ve for 
 Ihoir object to impedo the advance of an enemy, or to en- 
 ible an inferior force to maintain their position agaioit 
 ihc attack of a superior number. 
 
 3. The name of Field Forfificnfion is applied to a work 
 which is composed of an embankment of earth called a 
 'parapet," and an cxcavati(tn called a "ditch," on the 
 exterior side, which last furnishes the earth for the em- 
 jankment. / 
 
 3. The general appellation of IntreuchmemU it applied ^ 
 o all fit'ld works, and a position strengthened by them, ia 
 laid to be Intrenched. 
 
 i. The outline or form of the work varies with tho char- 
 
 cter of the ground, ths circumstances under which it \% 
 
 soBstructed, the stiength of the force, and particular 
 
 character of the defence. The profile or shape of the ©m- 
 
 sankment or parapet is usually the same in all cases. 
 
 6. When the ground about a work within eflective 
 •ango of the firearms of the attacking party is quite flat, 
 he height called tho "command" of the work, must be 
 It least 7 I'eet, 6 inches, in order that the defenders may 
 )e covered from the fire of men on horseback— that class 
 )f men being able to dipeharge tJiwlr arme at 7 fi?»?* % Jw*- 
 
0. Uniaiportrtiit works, or such as arc situated on }iigfe- 
 cr ground than that within effective artillery range, m»/ 
 have their parapets as low as C feet or even 5 feet. 
 
 7. Sometimes the parapet is tornied of earth taken from 
 an excavation or trench inside of it ; in this case the par. 
 apct may bo as low as 3 feet, because then, the defenders 
 standing in the trench of equal depth, and close behind 
 the parapet, are sufficiently covered by it. 
 
 [Remarks.] In this manner cover for troops may be very 
 fiuickl}' obtain^id, with the advantage of having the pow- 
 er to advance over tho parapet in order of battle when cc- 
 casion offers. 
 
 8. The general form of a parapet and ditch may be un- 
 derstood by the followihg explanations : {Fig. 1.) 
 
 A B C D E F IS the profile of the Parapet. 
 
 G H I K the profile of the Ditch. 
 
 L M X the profile of the Glacis. 
 
 A B the Banquette Slopes. 
 
 B C Tread of the Banquette. 
 
 C D the Interior Slope. 
 
 D E the Superior Slope. 
 
 E F the Exterior Slope. 
 
 F G the Berm. . 
 
 G n the Scarp. 
 
 H I the Bottom of tho Ditch. 
 
 I K the Counterscarp. 
 
 A the Foot of the Banquette Slope, 
 
 B the Crest of the Banquette. 
 
 C the Foot of the Interior Slope. 
 
 D the Interior Crest. 
 
nA\.» hmr. MMV.A IION. 
 
 JFi« 
 
*?« , rtSL* StRTIJICAtlON. 
 
 E the Extorior Crest. 
 
 F the Foot of the Exterior Slope. 
 
 G the Crest of the Scarp. 
 
 n the Foot of the Scarp. 
 
 I the Foot of the Counterscarp. 
 
 K the Crest of the Counterscrp. 
 
 M the Crest of the Glacis, 
 
 N Foot of the Glacis. , 
 
 9. The inferior slope is the part of the parapet towards 
 the enemy; it is usually made with thp same slope that 
 the earth, when first thrown up, naturally takes. 
 
 10. The top of the parapet, denominated the superior 
 tlope, is the line along which the assailed fire on the eae- 
 my. 
 
 11. The intsrior slope, sometimes denominated the breast 
 height, is the part against which the assailed naturally 
 lean in the act of firing. 
 
 12. The banquette is a small terrace on which the 8ol« 
 dier stands to deliver his fire ; the top of it is denominated 
 the tread, and the inclined plane by which it is ascended, 
 the slope. 
 
 13. The tersn creai is applied to those points of the profile, 
 where a salient angle is formed; and when a re-entering 
 angle h formed by two lines, the term foot is applied to 
 the point, in connexion with the name of the superior 
 line ; thus, foot of the exterior slope ; foot of the iTUericf 
 »Iope, &c. 
 
 14. Theberm is a horizontal space left between the par- 
 apet and ditch, to prevent the earth from yielding. 
 
 15. The slope of the ditch next to the parapet is the 
 
16. The glacis is a small mound of earth raised in front 
 of the ditch; it is seldom used in field \rork?. therefore is 
 not a constituent part of their profile. 
 
 17. Should there be ground near the position to be for- 
 tiied, higher than that on which the parapet stands, 
 the latter must have a greater command than 7 feet 6 
 inches, but in the more simple kind of field works the 
 command does not exceed 12 feet ; for as soldiers cannot 
 taxily throw dirt with a shorel to a greater height thau 
 6 feet, and as other means are generally wanting in the 
 field, it is evident that the height of a paiapet for such a 
 work, must be limited by the capability of executing it 
 with shovels and pick axes by two parties of men, one 
 standing on a level 6 feet above the other. The same 
 reason determines the greatest depth of ditch to We 12 
 feet, a scaffolding being necessary at 6 fet-t above the bot- 
 tom of the ditch to receive the earth which is thrown from 
 thence; the earth is then thrown up to the level of the 
 ground, by other laborers placed on the scailblding. 
 
 18. In the construction of field works it should always 
 be recollected that a great command of parapet not only 
 requires additional means, trouble, and time to throw up 
 the earth, but also renders necessary an increased mass of 
 earth for the banquette, which may thus encumber the 
 interior of the work. 
 
 19. To obviate as much as possible, the latter evil, it is 
 usual to mount the banquette, by step?, whjn the parapet 
 has a greater command than 8 feet. 
 
 20 The thickness of the parapets of field works must be 
 regulated by the description of arms likely to be employ- 
 ed against th«ni ; in ord»r, therefore, that they aa-y af- 
 
1811 TiBI.U rORllFX'oATIuy. 
 
 ford a reasonable degree of resistance to repeated firiu^. 
 the thickness of parapets must somewhat exceed the pen- 
 etration of the hhot which may be used against tbcm in 
 the attack. 
 
 Penctralloi of shot. Thickness of jjonipeU 
 
 Musket ball, 10 to 18 inches, 3 feet. 
 
 G-pounder, 3^^ to 4 feet, 6 feet. 
 
 9-pounder, 63-^ to 7 feet, 8 or 9 feet^ 
 
 12-pounder, 8>^ to 10 feet, 10 or 12 feet. 
 
 31. It is found by experiment that loose earth resists 
 the penetration of shot just as well as that which has becH 
 rammed together. 
 
 22. Although a musket ball penetrates, at most, only 18 
 inches into earth, musketry parapets require to be made 
 3 feet thick, in order that they may be sufficiently sub- 
 stantial to preserve the requisite hei.S(ht, notwithstanding 
 the action of the weather. 
 
 23. Heavier g'uns than 12-pcunders are rarely brought 
 into the field, consequently 12 feet may be considered uo 
 the greatest thickness of a parapet 5 and it has been shown 
 that, for the simpler works, 12 feet is the greatest com- 
 mand of a parapet, and likewise the greatest depth of a 
 ditch. 
 
 24. The exterior side of a parapet is formed with a 
 slope which has a base equal to its height, that being the 
 inclination which ordinary earth assunies when thrown 
 up loosely ; and, therefore, it is the most advantageous 
 form for a mass of earth whose sides are supported. 
 
 25. The interior slope of a parapet has a base not great- 
 er than one-third or one-fourth of its height, in order to 
 allow the men to approach near the crest, and fire ovor 
 the parapet with ease. 
 
VIELB KOKllKiCAliUN. 183 
 
 MANNER OF THROWING UP A WORK. 
 
 26. The following wKl describe the manner of laying 
 the work out on the field, which is called profiling ; tho 
 distribution of the workmen to excavate the ditch, and 
 form the parapet ; and the precautions to be observed in 
 the construction. 
 
 27. Poles having been planted at the angles of the work, 
 and the height of Ihe interior crest marked on them, a 
 line is traced on the ground with a picks, showing fifae di- 
 rection of the interior crests. At suitable distances, say 
 from twenty to thirty yards apart, cords are stretched be- 
 tween two stout pickc ts, in a direction perpendicular to 
 the line marked out by the pick ; these cords should be 
 exactly horizontal. The thickness of the parapet is meas- 
 ured on the cord, and a picket driven into the ground to 
 mark the point. The base of the interior slope, and the 
 tread of the banquette, are set off in a similar manner • 
 and a slip of deal is nailed to each of the pickets. 
 
 28. The height of the interior crest, and the tread of the 
 banquette, are easily ascertained, from the position of tho 
 cord, and the interior crest ; these points having been 
 marked on their respective slips, the outline of the para- 
 pet is shown by connecting them by other slips, which are 
 nailed to the uprights ; the banquette slope and the exte- 
 rior slop •, V, :!l be determined by a similar process. 
 
 29. From the profiles thus formed perpendicular to the 
 interior crests, the oblique profiles at the angles can be 
 readily set up, by a process which will suggest itself uitli . 
 out oxplauation. 
 
 7 
 
IH FIELD FCKTrFrCATms. 
 
 30. Having compl^ied t&e profiling, the foot of the ban- 
 qnette, and that of the exterior slope, are marked out 
 with a pick, and also the crests of the scarp and coianter- 
 scarp. All the arrangements preparatory to commencing 
 the excayatfon are now complete. 
 
 DISTRIBUT1®'N OF TBS WORKING PARTY. 
 
 31. DiTide the men into 6 equal parts, 3 of which are to be 
 provided with pick axes and shovels, 2 are to have shovels- 
 ©nly, and the remainder are to be furnished with ram- 
 mers only. 
 
 32. The party is then marched to the ground, and the 
 men, having both pick-axes and&hovels (viz : the diggers,) 
 are to be stationed from 43^ to 6 feet apart, (so as to not 
 foe in each others way,) on the ground when the ditch is 
 to be dug along the berme line, and facing the work. 
 
 33. The excavation of the (iitch is now begun, the men 
 Srst loosening the earth with their pick-ases, and thea 
 shoveling it to the place where the parapet is to stand ; 
 here the rest of the party are posted, and as the earth is 
 thrown up to them, the men with shovelfi spread it in lay- 
 ers, while the remainder, with their rammers, beat ife 
 down to a firm mass ; and ais the work is raised, they give 
 it the form indicated by the profiles. 
 
 34. In making the parapet, eare should be taken to 
 form a drain^ at some suitable point, to carry off the water 
 from the interior ixito the ditch. It can be done by dig- 
 ging a trench across the ground where the parapet is to , 
 he raised, and plank the sides so as to form a gutter. A 
 gutter of boards should also be made to prevent the water 
 from running down the scarp, as it would soon destroy it. 
 
FIKLB FORTiriCATIOX. 195 
 
 35, For tbs facility of entering the ditch, whilst work- 
 ing, the offset at the scarp and counterscarp, maj be form- 
 ed into Ht^ps, with a rise of eighteen inches each ; and if 
 the ditch is deeper than sii feet, an offset about four feet 
 broad should be left at the scarp, about mid-depth of the 
 <litch, to place a relay of shovels to throw the earth on 
 the berme. In some cases, a scaffold of plank is raised in 
 the ditch for the same purpose. 
 
 36. When the ditch has been excavated to the bottom, 
 the offsets are cut way, and the proper slopes given to the 
 sides. The earth furnished by the offsets, if not required 
 to complete the parapet, may be formed into a small glacis. 
 
 37 When near the surface, in soil requiring but little 
 use of the pick-axe, an excavation of sir cubic yards in a 
 day of eight hours, would be a fair task for a soldier, who, 
 in general, is little accustomed to the use of the pick-are 
 and shoTcl. 
 
 38. In calculating the time required to throw up a field 
 work, the following data may be assumed ; in light, dry, 
 sandy soil, that can be easily dug without the aid of a pick- 
 axe, a man can, in a day of eight hours, load from nineteen 
 to twenty cubic yards of earth on barrows. If a pick-axo 
 be required, two men can do the same quantity of work. 
 
 3J>. If the w hole ma«6 must be first moved with the pick* 
 axe, three or four men should be allowed. 
 
 40. A man can wheel 20 cubic yards of earth per day to 
 a distance of 30 yards on level ground, or 20 yards on a 
 ramp. 
 
 41. Twenty cubic yards of earth will Gil 500 wheelbar- 
 rows. 
 
 42. A lior.ss ran do as much work as 7 men ; he can c^r- 
 
196 VlKLh FOHTfKie.VTIOX. 
 
 ry 300 lbs. 20 miles per day, or 200 lbs. 30 miles ; he csn 
 draw 1,600 lbs. on a plain, and from 1,200, to 1,300 lbs. on 
 irregular ground, when the roads are in good (Jrder. 
 
 43. Newly moved earth will not remain very well at 
 such a steep slope as the "interior slope" of the parapet 
 assumosj consequently artificial means have to be rcsortsd 
 to, to retain it in that state ; these are called revetments. 
 
 REVETMENTS. 
 
 44. A J'et'c/rue/if consists ^of a facing of stone, wood, sods 
 of turf,^ or any other material, to sustain an embankment; 
 •when it receives a slope steeper than the natural slope. 
 
 45. In field vvoi'ks revetments are used only for the inte- 
 rior slope of the parapet and for the scarp ; for the first, 
 sods, hurdles, fascines, gabions, and plank are used j and 
 for the last, timber. 
 
 46- Jlevctment of sods. Sod work forms a strong and 
 durable revetment, and as they are generally procurable 
 on the spot, they are much used in field works. The sods 
 should be cut from a well clothed sward, with the grass of 
 a fine, short blade, and thickly matted roots. If the grass 
 be long, it should be mowed before the sod is cut. 
 
 47. Sods are of two siiics, one termed stretchers, ai*e 
 twelve inches square and four and a half inches thick : the 
 pthc.r termed headers, are eighteen inches long, twelV'e 
 inches broad, and four and a-half inches thick. 
 
 48. The sod revetment is commenced as soon as the para- 
 pet is raised to the level of the head of the banquette ; the 
 course consists of two stretchers and one header altsrnating, 
 the end of the header laid to the front. The grass side is 
 l2.id downward; and tho,«od? should protrude .*^ )ij[ tie be vontj 
 
TrF-i.D FoaTiriOATrov. 197 
 
 the line of the interior slope, for the purpose of trimming 
 thfc course even at the top, before laying another, and to 
 make the interior slope regular. The course is firmly set- 
 tled, by tapping each sod as it is laid with a spade or a 
 wooden mallet ; and the earth of the parapet is packed 
 closely behind the course. 
 
 49. A second course is laid on the first, so as to cover 
 the joints, or, as it is termed, to break joints with it, using 
 otherwise the same precautions as with the firr,t. The top 
 course is laid with the grass up; and in some cases pegs 
 are driven through the sods of two courses, to connect the 
 whole more firmly, which i.«, however, by no means nee- 
 cessary to form a strong sodding. 
 
 50. When cut from a wet soil, the sods should not be 
 lain until they are partially dried, otherwise they will 
 shrink, and the revetment will crack in drying. In hot 
 weather the revetment should bo watered frequently, until 
 the grass puts forth. The sods are cut rather larger than 
 required for use ; and arc trimmed to a proper size from a 
 model sod. 
 
 51. Fascine revetment. A Fascine, is a bundle of twigs 
 closely bound up. There are two sizes of fascines ; one 
 size nine inehes in diameter, and about ten feet lon^ ; the 
 other which is generally termed a soucisson, is twelve 
 inches in diameter and twenty foot long ; it is chiefly used 
 for the revetments of battel ies. 
 
 52. To make a fascine, straight twigs are selected, be- 
 tween the thickness of the little finger and thumb, the lon- 
 ger the btter ; they should be stripped of the smaller 
 twigs. A machine, termed &/asciue horse, is put up, by 
 tirivino- two ttaut pole* intri the o-rnund obliquely, .^hout 
 
lUS vmiu FORI irij irrox. 
 
 two feet, 30 as to cross each other about two feet above the 
 ground, where thej are firmly tied together; as many of 
 these supports as may Le required, are put up in a straight 
 line, about eighteen inches apart; this forms the horse, 
 on which the twigs are laid to be bound together. 
 
 53. Another machine termed a. fascine choker, is formed 
 of two stout levers, about five feet long, connected near 
 their extremities b}'- a chain or strong cord, which would 
 b3 long enough to past; once around the fascine, and be 
 drawn tight by means of the levers. 
 
 54 The twigs are laid on the horse, with their large and 
 small ends alternating ; "the choker is applied to bring them 
 to""ether ; and they are bound by loiths or gads, made of 
 tough twigs, properly prepared by untwisting the fibres 
 over a blaze, so as to render them pliant, or else stout rope 
 varn may be substituted for them. The gads are placed 
 twelve inches apart, and every third or fourth one should 
 be made with an end three or four feet long, having a loop 
 at the extremity to receive a picket through it; this pick- 
 et is termed an anchorinc/ 2n(-'kct, its object being to secure 
 the fascine firmly to the parapet. 
 
 55, To form the revetment, the first row of fascines is 
 imbedded about half its thickness below the tread of the 
 Jbanquette, and is secured by means of the anchoring pick- 
 ets, and also by several pickets driven through the fascine 
 itself about twelve inches into the earth. The knots of the 
 wythes are laid inside, and the earth of the parapet is well 
 packed behind the fascine. A second row is laid on the 
 first, so as to give the requisite interior slope; it should 
 break joints with the first row, and be connected with it 
 
FIELD roiiiirieAiioJ.'. 139 
 
 by several pickets driven through them both. The other 
 rows arc laid with similar precautions ; and the parapet 
 is usually finished at the top by a course of sods. 
 
 56. Hurdle revetment. This revetment is made by driv- 
 ing poles in the same direction as the interior slope, into 
 the banquette, about eighteen inches below the tread, and 
 then forming a wicker-work, by interlacing the twigs be- 
 tween them in a similar manner to basket work. 
 
 57. The poles should be nine inches apart, their diameter 
 al)ont one and a half inches. They should be secured to 
 tlui ])arapet by long withes and anchoring pickets. The 
 tojt twigs should bo bound together by withes. 
 
 58. Gabion revetment. Gabions are strong cylindrical 
 baskets without top or bottom, two feet in diameter, and 
 two feet nine inches high. These are placed in rows along 
 the line of work at an inclination corresponding to the 
 required slope, and then filled with earth. To make a ga- 
 bion, from eight to fourteen pickets, three feet six inches 
 long, are fixed upright in the ground, at equal distances, 
 in the circumference of a circle, one foot eleven inches in 
 diameter ; flexible twigs (or rods) arc then interwoven 
 with the upright pickets, commencing with three rods at 
 the bottom, and weaving each in succession outside of two 
 pickets and inside of one; as the twigs (or rods) are ex- 
 pended, others are added, and the basket work continued 
 to the height of two feet nine inches ; this work, which is 
 called the web, is sewn in three or four parts, from top to 
 bottom; withes, (called gads,) or spun yarn being used 
 for that purpose, in order to keep it from coming off the 
 pickets ; the ends of these are then cut off about an inch 
 from the web. A gabion, thus made, stands three feet 
 
200 riKLD FORTIIiei-lION. 
 
 high in the reretment, and weighs from thlrtr-six to forty 
 pounds. The best wood for the web, and particularly fov 
 the gads, is willow and hazel. 
 
 59. The gabion revetment is seldom used except for the 
 trenches in the attack of permanent works, where it i? de- 
 sirable to place troops speedily under cover from the ene- 
 my's case shot and musketry. 
 
 60. Plank revetment. This revetment may be made by 
 driving pieces of four-inch scantling about three feet apart, 
 two feet below the tread ©f the banquette, giving them the 
 same slope as the interior slope. Behind these pieces, 
 boards are nailed to sustain the earth. 
 
 61. Sand-hags are bags of coarse canvass, measuring, 
 when laid flat, two feet eight inches by one foot four inch- 
 es; they contain, when quite full, a bushel of earth : but 
 when tied and placed in revetment, only three-quarters of 
 a bushel. In building a revetment with them, they are 
 arranged with their ends and sides presented alternately to 
 the front in each course, and with the joints in the succes- 
 sive courses broken, like brick-work. Sixteen sand-bags 
 buiffl ten square feet of revetment ; they ought to be tar- 
 red, if the revetments are to laat a considerable time ; if 
 not tarred, they rot in two months. An empty sand-bag 
 weighs 1 lb. 2 oz., and when tarred, 1 lb. 12 oz. 
 
 62. Filled sand-bags are musket-shot proof, and are fre- 
 quently . placed on a parapet one across two others, the 
 latter being a short distance asunder, in order that the 
 intervals may serve as loop-holes. 
 
 63. When sand-bags or gabions are made use of to revet 
 the cheeks of embrasures, they should be covered with raw 
 hides, to prevent them f»©m being damaged by the flash 
 aad th§ eoneussion caused bj tbs dicchargc of the gun. 
 
i\f.nt iCianiicxnQs. 201 
 
 OBSTACLES. 
 
 64. The means employed ns acccsssry, usually consists 
 of artificial obstacles, s.o arranged as to detain the enemy 
 in a position where he will be greatly cut up by the fire of 
 the work. The proper disposition, therefore, of obstacles, 
 is in advance of the ditch within short musket range. 
 
 65. In placing the ground around a work in a defeusire 
 attitude, every means should be taken to reduce to the smal- 
 lest possible number, the points by which the enemy may 
 approach ; so that by accumulating the troops on the weak 
 points, a more rigorous defense may be made. In making 
 this arrangement, equal care should be given to avery thing 
 that, affording a shelter to the enemy, would enable him 
 to approach the work unexposed to its fires. To prevent 
 this, all hollow roads, or dry ditches, which are not enfi- 
 laded by the principal works, should be filled up or else be 
 watched by a detachment, covered by advanced work. 
 All trees, underwood, hedges, enclosures, and houses with- 
 in cannon range, should be cut down and leveled, and no 
 stumps be allowed higher than two feet,. Trees beyond 
 cannon range should not be felled ; or, if felled they should 
 be burnt to prevent the enemy's movements being con- 
 cealed. 
 
 65. If there are approaches, such as permanent bridges, 
 fords and roads, which may bo equally serviceable to the 
 assailed and to the enemy, they should be gurded with pe- 
 culiar care ; and be exposed to the enfilading fire of a work 
 ospocially erected for their defence. 
 
 67. The principal aviificial obstacles ara Tr9iie-(hIou2), 
 
202 viEin rouTiiicAxiux. 
 
 or military 2^^^^ j ahattis ; palisades ; /raises ; stockades; 
 ckevaux-de-frise ; small pickets ; entanglements', crows 
 feet ; inundations ; and mines. 
 
 68. Trous-de-lovp. These are pits in the form of an in- 
 verted truncated cone, or quadrilateral pyramid, and are 
 generall}'- made about 6 feet wide and 6 feet deep ; a point- 
 ed stake is phmted firmly in the bottom to prevent the 
 enemy from using them as rifle pits. In order to form an 
 effectire obstacle, they should be disposed checkerwise in 
 three rows, a few yards in front of the ditch with inter- 
 vals of about 10 feet between them ; the earth taken from 
 them is spread over the ground between them, and is form- 
 ed into hillocks to render the passage between them as dif- 
 ficult as possible. If bru.h-wood, or light hurdles, can be 
 procured, the ditch may be made narrower, and covered 
 with hurdle, over which a layer of earth is spread. Trous- 
 de-loup are sometimes placed in the ditch ; in this case, 
 their upper circles touch. 
 
 09. This obstacle is principally serviceable against cav- 
 alry. 
 
 70. Jibatti^. The large limbs of trees are selected for an 
 nbattis. The smaller branches are chopped ofi", and the 
 ends, pointed and interlaced with some care, are presented 
 towards the enemy. The large end of the lirjib is secured 
 to the ground by a crotchet-picket, and should be covered 
 with earth, well rammed, to prevent its being torn up. 
 
 71. One of the best methods of forming an abattis, and 
 which is peculiarly adapted to strengthen the skirt of a 
 wood, occupied b}^ light troops, is to fell the trees so that 
 their branches will interlace, cutting the trunk in such a 
 way that the tree will hang to the stump by a portion un- 
 
FlilLU iORIIFlCAriON. 203 
 
 cut. The stumps may be left high enough to corer a man 
 in the act of firing. 
 
 72. Abattis are placed in front of the ditch ; in this po- 
 sition, they must be covered from the enemy's fire by a 
 small glacis, so that they may not bo seen and destroyed 
 at a distance by artillery. 
 
 73. Abattis is an excellent obstacle in a wooded country, 
 and admits of a good defence, if a slight parapet is thrown 
 up behind it. The parapet may be made of trunks of trees 
 laid on each other, with a s hallow ditch or trench behind 
 them ; the earth from which is thrown against the trunks. 
 In an open position it may be relied on as a security against 
 surprise, particularly of cavalry. 
 
 74. A detachment of 90 men can make 750 feet of abattis 
 in a day. 
 
 75. Palisades. A palisade is a stake about 10 feet long, 
 and of a triangular form, each side of the triangle being 8 
 inches. The trunks of straight trees should be selected for 
 palisades. The diameter of th(? trunk should be from six- 
 teen to twenty inches. The trunk is sawed into lenghts 
 often and a-half feet, and is split up into rails, each length 
 furnishing from 5 to 7 rails. The palisade is pointed at 
 the top, the other extremity may be charred if the wood 
 is seasoned ; otherwise the charring will be of no service. 
 A ijaUsading is a row of palisades set in the ground either 
 vertically, or slightly inclined towards the enemy. Each 
 palisade is nailed to a strip of thick plank, termed a riband, 
 placed horizontally about one foot below the ground; 
 another riband is placed eighteen inches below the top. — 
 To plant the palisade, a trench is dug 3 feet deep ; they 
 
 are th^'n placed about 3 inches aeunder, with an edge to- 
 nart^s the eRemv. 
 
204 FIBL» FORXJFICATIO?;. 
 
 76. Palis&des are only used in ths ditches, and to close 
 the gorges of field works, and are not as in permanent 
 works, placed on 'he banquettes ; when in the ditch, their 
 best position is at the foot of the counterscarp, and slightly 
 inclined towards it ; for thus placed, they are more secure 
 from a direct fire of artillery, and they detain the enemy 
 at the caunterscarp under the deadly aim of the garrison ; 
 also it makes it difficult for the assailants to cut them 
 down, there being no room between them and the counter- 
 scarp to stand and wield an axe. 
 
 77. Fraise. This obstacle is formed of palisades placed 
 in juxtaposition, either horizontally or slightly inclined. 
 The best position for a fraise is on the berme, or a little be- 
 low it, so as to be coTered by the counterscarp crest. The 
 part of the fraise under the parapet is termed the tail, 
 and is about 5 feet long. To make a fraise, a horizontal 
 piece of four inch scantling, termed a cushion, is first laid 
 parallel to the berme ; each palisade is nailed to this, and 
 a thick riband is nailed on the top of the fraise near the 
 end . 
 
 78. The point of fraise sho^ild be at least 7 feet above 
 the bottom of the ditch, and should not project beyond 
 the foot of the scarp, so as not to shelter the enemy from 
 logs, stones, &c., rolled from the parapet into the ditch. 
 
 79. Stockade. Trunks of small trees from 9 to 12 inches 
 in diameter and 12 feet long, are selected to form a stock- 
 ade. They are planted in juxtaposition, in a similar man- 
 ner to a palisading, and are used for the same purposes. 
 
 SO. Chevaiix-de-frise, are beams of wood from 6 to 10 
 feet long, which are cut in a square or hexagonal form, 
 and havs pointed *t-akes or sword blades inserted in th« 
 
HELD tOHX/Fli'A'l'lON. ' U05 
 
 ijices ; when several arc used, in one.length, they are chain- 
 ed together to provcnt the enemy from removing them ; 
 and they are made of the lengths just mentioned in ovd^v 
 that they may be portable. 
 
 81. They are employed as t^mporiiry. barriers to impeda 
 the passage of a breach, the entrance into a work, to block 
 up a street, &c. ; they are occasionally placed at the foot? 
 of the counterscarp of the ditch, and, also on the berme ; 
 in the latter situation, they must be covered fr«m the view 
 and fire of the enemy by a small glacis. 
 
 82. Pointed Stctlccs are frequently fixed in the ground, 
 at any place at which the enemy might occupy at tlnj 
 time of an assault ; as on the bermes of works, the edges 
 of trous-de-loup, and in the spaces between them. They 
 must be firmly planted in the ground, and if they arc 
 pointed before insertion, two mallets must be u?ed, one oC 
 which is provided with a conical hole to receive the point 
 «f the stake, while the blQ'.vs are struck with the other; 
 thcBC pickets may be conveniently formed of the small 
 branches cut from the trees intended \'qi' abattis. 
 
 INUNDATI02xS. 
 
 83. It frequently occurs in the field that small streams 
 or rivulets are met with, which of themselves offer no 
 impediment to the advance of an enemy, but which, by- 
 judicious management, may bo made effectually to check 
 his attack on certain points where the water may be col- 
 lected- 
 
 84. It is done by damming back a shallow water course 
 so as to make it overflow its valley. To be effective, an 
 inuudaliou should be six feet deep. When this depth cau- 
 
206 MBLD lORTinCATluX. 
 
 Bot be procured, trous-de-loap, or else short ditches, placed 
 in quincunx order, are dug, and the whoi'e is covered 
 with a sheet of water, which, at the ditches, must be at 
 least six feet in depth. 
 
 85. A dam may be formed in the following manner : 
 after constructing an embankment of earth on each side of 
 th« stream, perpendicular to its leiigth, as far as the hanfc^ 
 atones and gravel should be thrown into the water to- di- 
 minish its depth : then two heaps of earth are prepared, 
 one on each bank, aud as many workmen being set on as 
 can be employed without impeding each other ; the earth 
 from those heap^s is thi'owninto the stream, over the stones 
 and grave), as rapidly as possible, until the embankments 
 previously formed, arc connected together across the 
 stream. 
 
 86. It rarely occurs that sufTicient means ai e to be 
 found in the field to allow of a dam being made more than 
 ten feet high; and suppaeing tbas heisght to be given, the 
 difference o-f level between any two dams should be five 
 feet, in order that the shallowest part of the inundation 
 may be five feet deep, and therefore not fordable. 
 
 87. The distance at which dams shoiild be placed from 
 one another, will depend upon tbe faVl of t^e bed of the 
 stream., and must be determined by leveling. The thick- 
 aess of th.e dam at the top, may be made equal to the 
 depth of water intended to be retained, but if it is liable 
 to be battered by artillery, it should be ten feet thick at 
 the top. The exterior slope of the dam> may be left at the- 
 aatural s-lopo, of the earth, while to that opposed to the 
 
 stream, a base of not less than double its height should h& 
 i^ifen. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICAWOX. «V4 
 
 «8. A sluice or weste weir should be prorided at the 
 height to which it is desired the water should rise, oth- 
 erwise, the water being allowed to flow over every part,* 
 the dam would be destroyed. These openings, or waste 
 weirs must be rivetted with fascines or timber, and ought 
 to be completed before the dam w carried up to Ub full 
 
 height. 
 
 €9. Artificial inundations seldom admit of being turned 
 to an efiective use, owing to the difficulties in forming 
 them, and the ease by which tiiey can be drained by tho 
 enemy. But when it is practicable to procure only a 
 shallow sheet of water, it it should not be neglected, as it 
 will cjtuse some apprehension to the enemy. In some 
 -cases by damming back a brook, the water may be raised 
 ■to a level sufficient to be conducted into the ditches of the 
 work, and render some parts unassailable. The ditches in 
 5Uoh cases should be made very wide, and to hold about 
 the depth of sIk feet. During freezing weather the ice 
 should be broken in the middle of the ditch, and a chan- 
 nel of at least twelve feet be kept open, if practicable.— 
 The ice taken out should be piled up irregularly on eadL 
 side of the channel; and, as a farther precaution against 
 « surprise, water should be thrown ob the parnpet t« 
 freeze. 
 
 MIXES. 
 
 90. Attempts at applying mines to field works have 
 seldom proved successful, owing to the rapid character 
 of the assault, from which the mines are usually sprung 
 too soon or too late ; so that the only eficct that can be 
 counted upon for their use, is the panic they may create. 
 
20$ FiET.» FQP.TIFICATieS. 
 
 91. There is one species of ciine denominated a '»tons 
 fougasse, which it is thought might be snceessfv^ly applied 
 
 *to the defence of the ditches and the salients-^f the field 
 ■vvorks. To make this mine, an inclined funnel-shaped 
 excayation is made to the depth of five or six feet, at the 
 bottom of the funnel, a bor containing 55}bs. ofpowdar ia 
 jdaced Avith which !i powder-hose communicates. 'A strong 
 .''hield of wood, formed of battens well nailed together, is 
 placed in front of the box ; and three or four cubic yards 
 of pebbles, or an equal wsight of brick-bats, or other ma- 
 terials, are filled in against the shield. Earth is then 
 well rammed around the shield on top and behind, to pre- 
 vent the explosion from taking place in the wrong direc- 
 tion. A fougasse of this size, when sprung, will scatter 
 the pebbles oyer a surface of sixty yards in length and 
 seventy yards in breadth. 
 
 92. A good method of discharging fougasses at th$ mo- 
 ment required, is to place a loaded musket with the muz- 
 xle in the priming of the fougasse, and a wire attached to 
 the trigger; the Vv'ire can be led in any direction, in the 
 same manner as the hose, and being pulled at the proper 
 moment, the explosion will take place. 
 
 THE OUTLINES OF FIELD WORKS. 
 
 93. Tlic direction which a parapet is made to assume in 
 order to enclose or partiall}'- enclose the ground to be for- 
 tified, is called the outline of a work. 
 
 94. The following are general principles to be observed 
 in determining the outlines of field works : 
 
 1st. There should be a reciprocal defense between all the 
 parts of works, so that the ground over whirh an ene- 
 
FIBL» ro.RTTFTfATION*. 209 
 
 tnj must pass to the attack, should, if possible, be seen 
 b©th in front and in flank. 
 
 2dly. The " lines of defence" must not exceed th« eftec- 
 tire range of muskets, viz : about 160 yards. 
 
 3dly. Re-entering angles, (via : flanking angles,) ought 
 never to be less than 90° and seldom more than 100° ; for 
 if less than 90°, the men on the flanking parts would fire 
 against each other ; and if more than 100°, the fire of the 
 flanking parts would diverge too far from the salient to be 
 flanked. 
 
 4tlilj. The salient angles of works should be as obtuse 
 as possible, and never lest than G0°, otherwise the interior 
 space might become too contracted ; the angle would be 
 so sharp as to be quickly worn away by the weather, and 
 would be easily battered down ; also the undefended* sec- 
 toral space in front of the salient angles (which is tko sup- 
 plement of the angle) would become very great ; and 
 
 5thly. The outline of a field work should bo proportion- 
 ed in length to the number of men and guns intended for 
 its defence. One man occupies a space of three feet. 
 
 95. The names of the works most commonly employed 
 infield fortification, are Redans; Lunettes; Redouts; 
 Star-Forts ; Bastion-Forts, <&c,, and works used mostly 
 for lines of intrenchment, such asTKNAfLLES and Cuemaii- 
 
 LEKKS. 
 
 *NoTE. — Undefended by direct fire. To prevent the 
 enemy from approaching the work on these undefended 
 sectors the salients should be directed towards gome natu- 
 ral obstacle, such as a marsh, &c. ; or if this cannot be 
 done, then artificialobst^rles should be fti.^poRPd in their 
 front. 
 
210 
 
 FIELD FORTIFICATION. 
 
 •96. The Redabt, {Fig. 2.) is a work consisting of two 
 faces, wliicii form witli each otiier a salient angle, the 
 rear being open. When the faces are not more than 20 
 jards in length, the work is sometimes called a fleche. 
 
 97. The redan is in the m<?5t advantageous position, 
 
 when the ground before the salient angles and approaches 
 
 to the gorge are inaccessible, or when the work can bo 
 
 saipported by troops ; for example, when with obstacles 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Itedan^ 
 In its front, it is employed as an advanced work to defend 
 lioUow grpund which cannot be seen from the principal 
 work— to protect a bridge, a dam, a road, a defile, or to 
 ■cover a guard, an advanced post, <fec. 
 
 98. The weak points of this work are : that it has an 
 open gorge, and that its ditch, and the ground in front of 
 the salient angle, are undefended either by direct or flank- 
 in^ fir©. 
 
PlELli FORTiriCATlON'. 211 
 
 99. On account of its having an open gorge, it is seldom 
 advisable to co"nstruct a redan as an isolated work ; its 
 rear should be exposed to the fire of some collateral work, 
 or have free communication with a body of troops in its 
 rear, to whom it may form an advanced post, or outvrork ; 
 o-r otherwise the faces should terminate on a river, a marsh 
 or any inaccessible ground, which would prevent it from 
 being turned. 
 
 100. The hrst defect, viz : that of having an open gorge, 
 may be remedied in a slight degree bv placing along 
 the gorge, abatti?, trous-de-loup, Ac, (or palisades, if 
 time and material abound); as for the second defect, a 
 direct fire may be bi'ought iu front of the salient angle by 
 rounding the latter, or cutting off the angle by a short 
 face not less than G yards long. A [flanking fire may be 
 procured for the ditch and salients, by forming auxilliary 
 flanks, which may be placvd either towards the middle or 
 at the extremities of the faces ; such a flank 5Ught not to 
 he less than 12 yards long, that there may bo at least 12 
 iiien firing from it. 
 
 101. Double Redans consists of two redans joined to- 
 gether, their exterior faces being generally longer than 
 the others ; the French call a work of this kind a queue 
 d'hyronde. 
 
 102. A Triplh Redak consists of three redans joined 
 together, the exterior faces of these are .<ilso, in general, 
 longer than the others. 
 
 103. A Lunette {Fifj. 3.) is a large redan with flanks 
 •parallel or* nearly parallel to the capital ; as a general 
 
 rule,, the flanks are traced perpendicularly t^? th? intended 
 
•212 
 
 TiZLV rosTiriTAfior;. 
 
 line of fire, for the purpose of bringing on certain spots a 
 more direct fire than could be made from the faces of the 
 work. 
 
 104. It is often desirable to secure gorges of these works 
 
 against surprise ; this maj be done by disposing across 
 
 the gorges a single or double row of palisades, or a stock- 
 
 -ads work, in the form of a front fortification or of a ten- 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 Lunette. 
 aille j there sliould be a banquette to it, that the defend- 
 ers may have comm&nd over the assailants, and a ditch to 
 prevent the enemy from getting close, and cutting, burn- 
 iog, or blowing down the obstacle. Troua-de-loup, abat- 
 tis, and chevaus-de-frize are DOiretimes disposed acros3 
 iJae gor^? for the saias purpose. 
 
FIBL» r9RlirX01TIt>'. 213 
 
 105. A Redout is a closed work, the parapet of which 
 does not form re-entering angles ; it maj be quadrilateral, 
 polygonal, or circular. 
 106. Circular redoubts, although ther have no undefend- 
 ed sectors, and enclose a greater space than any other re- 
 dout with an equal lentrth of perapet, are seldom formed 
 cn accouut of the diffiulty of their construction, and also 
 because their ditches are incapable of any flanking defense: 
 the lines of fire diverging from the parapet, any one spot 
 on the ground is very imperfectly defended. 
 
 107. A four sided figure is the best and most usual form 
 for a redout, because it is of simple construction; th3 
 ditches are more easily flanked, and there are not so many 
 points of attack as in a redoubt of a greater number of an- 
 gles. Redouts being closed works, are better able to 
 stand detached than redans or lunettes, and are, therefore, 
 constructed when a small work is required without aay 
 immediate protection from the gorge- the armed party 
 being strong enough to complete and man a four-sided 
 redout, each side of which is not less tha^ 15 yards long] 
 
 103. The size depends on the number of men who are to 
 garrison it, and upon the number of guns which it is to 
 contain ; also upon the length of time during which it is 
 to be oocupied; this may t^e for a few hours only, (as on a 
 field of battle) or for a period of weeks or months. 
 
 109. If wanted only for a few hours, it will be suflicieut 
 to allow 3 feet in length of parapet lor every man of tho 
 detachment ; or for every two men, if they are to be 
 formed in double rank. If guns are to be placed in the 
 work, 16 fe^t of parapet must h% jfiven to each, in order 
 
214 IIKLK FoKtlKICAllON, 
 
 that the gunners may hare sufficient room on each side to 
 work it. 
 
 110. But when the redout is dc-?tined to contain a body 
 of men for a considerable length of time, it becomes nec- 
 cessary for them to have room to lie down within the ban- 
 quette with their arms and packs; supposing one-third to 
 be on guard, patrolling, Ac, two square yards in addition 
 to the slope of the banquette, are sufficient for each man, 
 and 36 square yards for each gun and its appointments. 
 
 111. The rule, consequently, far a square redoubt is : to 
 multiply the given number of men by 2, and number of guns 
 by 36, for the number of square yards which the work 
 ought to contain within the foot of its banquette, the 
 squarft root of the product will be the length in yards of 
 the side of the square forming that area ; adding to this 
 result the breadth of two interior slopes, and of two ban- 
 quettes with their slopes, (about 7 yards altogether,) we 
 shall have the side of the square formed by the crest of the 
 parapet. 
 
 112. A square redout ought not to be traced with less 
 extent of sides than 15 yards ; for, by employing the cal- 
 culation explained above, it will be found that such a 
 work is only just sufficient to contain the number of men 
 necessary for its defense ; on the other hand, it is usual to 
 make a square redout with a longer side than 40 yards, 
 because it would require a garrison more suitable to a 
 work of a stronger outline. 
 
 113. The imperfections of redoubts are, that they are 
 entirely without a Hanking Gre for the defense of the 
 ground in front of their faces, also that their ditches and 
 
Mtl.S l«KriKH'ATfON. 2lf> 
 
 the sectoral spaces before the angles, are without any fire 
 whatcvei" for their defense. 
 
 114. A flanking^ defense for the ditches may be obtain- 
 ed b}' placing palisade or stockade caponnieres in thera, 
 either at the angles or in the middle of the faces ; by 
 tambours in a like position, or by loopholed galleries un- 
 der the counterscarp at the salients of the work. 
 
 115. A ditch caponniere is an oblong structure formed 
 with palisades, or with structure work, loop-holed, and 
 roofed over with planks and earth to secure the men from 
 the effects of shell, and a plunging fire from the counter- 
 scarp. It ought, if possible, to be flanked with musketry, 
 to prevent an enemy from closing on it, and getting un- 
 der cover. 
 
 116. The best position for a caponniere in the ditch of 
 a redoubt, is at the salient angle, as then one caponniere 
 flanks two branches of the ditch. It should be separated 
 from the counterscarp by an enlargement of the ditch, to 
 prevent the enemy from using it as a bridge to cross the 
 ditch, and it ought to have a wicket to allow of sallies into 
 the ditch. 
 
 117. To lessen the destructive effect of shell, traverses 
 should be placed in all closed works when those missiles 
 are likely to be employed against them. 
 
 118. the countei'scarp <7oZiery consists of a frame work, 
 covered at the top with a sheeting, which is placed within 
 the counterscarp at the salients. The front of the gallery 
 is made of 9 or 10 inch scantl'ng, placed upright, and ar- 
 ranged with loop-hole defences ; these pieces are connect- 
 ed at the top by a cap sill. Cross pieces are notched on 
 the cap sill about three feet apart ; they are supported by 
 
2!K yinLt r«)iTWi9AViO.\. 
 
 ahalves placed four feet from the front piece. The cross 
 pieces may project three feet beyond the shaWcs, and, if 
 necessary, be braced from the shalves. The gallery is cov- 
 ered on top by one and a-half inch shoeting and behind in 
 a similar manner, but only to the height of 5 feet abore 
 the bottom. This arrangement gives a free space be- 
 hind the back sheeting for the play of the rammer in 
 loading. The height of the gallery may be only 7 feet, its 
 •width, accorning to the foregoing arrangements, is 4 feet. 
 It should be covered on top by at least 3 feet of earth. The 
 level of the gallery should be the same as the ditch; and 
 there should be a small ditch in front of it, to prevent 
 the enemy from closing on the loop-holes, or obstructing 
 their fire by filling the ditch in front of them by means of 
 sand bags, fascines, &c. ' The entrance to the gallery is 
 by a narrow door. 
 
 POWDER MAGAZINES. 
 
 119. The main objects to be attended to iu a powder 
 magazine are, to place it in a position least exposed to the 
 enemy's fire; to make it shot proof; and to secure the 
 powder from moisture. 
 
 120. If there are traverses, such for example, as are used 
 in defilemrjnt, the magazines may bo made in them ; or 
 they may be placed at the foot of a barbette ; or, in dry 
 soil they may be made partly under ground. 
 
 121. The magazine should be at least G feet high,-and 
 about the same width within ; its length will depend on the 
 quantity of aiiimuiiilion. It may be contitructed of fas- 
 cines, gabions, or coff <■■)•■ work, or any means found at hand 
 may be used which will afloet tk» end In view. 
 
FJELB f 01 Tiri«Ari©N. 217 
 
 122. If fascines are used, the sides should dope out to 
 resist the pressure of the earth ; the fascines should be per- 
 fectly secured bj pickets ani anchoring withes. The top 
 may be formed by a row of joists, of 6 inch scantling, placed 
 about two and a-half feet apart; these should be covered, 
 by two layers of fascines laid side by side, and the whole 
 covered in by at least 3 feet thickness" of earth. The 
 bottom should be covered by a flooring of joists and boards; 
 a shallow ditch being left under the flooring, with a pitch 
 towards the door of the magazine, to allow any water that 
 might leak through to be taken out. A thatch of straw 
 might be used on the inside, but it is somewhat dangerous, 
 owing to its combustibility; hides or tarpaulins arc better 
 and will keep out the moisture more effectually. 
 
 123. A coffcr-xcorh is formed by making frames of 6 inch 
 scantling; each frame is composed of two uprights, termed 
 stanchions, and a cap and ground sill, well nailed together. 
 It is 6 feet wide, and 6 feet high in the clear. These 
 frames are placed upright, and parallel to each other, 
 about two and a-half feet apart ; they are covered on the 
 top and sides by one and a-half inch plank, which is termed 
 a sheeting. The magazine otherwise is constructed as in 
 the last case. 
 
 124. When gabions are used, a hole is usually dug in 
 the ground to form part of the magazine; the gabions are 
 placed in two rows, side by side around the hole, and are 
 filled with earth. The top is formed as in the case of fas- 
 cines. 
 
 125. The mouth of the magazine is covered by a splinter 
 proof shelter . This is constructed by taking scantling 8 
 by 10 inche?, cut into suitable lengths, and placing' it iu 
 
218 FIEtD FOUIIFICATION. 
 
 an inclined position, so as to cover the mouth, and leare 
 an easy access to it. The pieces, usually, ai'c inclined 45° 
 and are placed side by side ; they are covered by at least 
 two feet of earth or sods; and hides or tarpaulins are 
 thrown over the whole. 
 
 126. Splinter proof blinds are mainly intended to afford 
 a shelter against the fragments of hollow projectiles that 
 explode in the work. They may bo used as a kind of bar- 
 rack for the troops ; and to store provisions, &c. 
 
 BATTERIES. 
 
 127. The term battery is usually applied to a collection 
 of several guns ; it is also used in speaking of the arrange- 
 ments made of a parapet to enable the guns to fire over it, 
 or through openings in ic ; as a harhitte battery, an embra- 
 sure battery, &c. Two kinds of batteries are used in the 
 defense of intrenchments, the barbette battery and the em- 
 brasure battery. 
 
 128. The Barbette is a construction by means of which a 
 piece can be fired over a parapet. It consists of a mound 
 of earth, thrown up against the interior slope ; the upper 
 surface of which is level, and two feet nine inches below 
 the interior crest for guns of small calibre, and four feet 
 for heavy guns. If the barbette is raised behind a face, its 
 length should be sufficient to allow sixteen and a half to 
 18 feet long the interior crest for each gun ; and its depth, 
 or the perpendicular distance from the foot of the interior 
 slope to the rear, should be twenty four feet, for the service 
 of the guns. The earth of the barbette at the rear and 
 sides receive the natural slope. To assend the barbette, a 
 
t iKiji I'ui'M 11- u'Ji rn"».\- 2Ly 
 
 constrHCtion, termed a ramp, is made : this is an inclined 
 plane of earth, which connects thetopof the barbette with 
 the terre-plein. The ramp is ten feet wide at the top, and 
 its slope is six base to one perpendicular. The earth at the 
 sides receives the natural slope. The ramp should be at 
 some convenient point in the rear, and take up as little 
 room as possible. 
 
 129. The advantajjes of the barbette, consist in the com- 
 manding position of the guns, and in a very wide field of 
 fire; on these accounts the salients are the best positions 
 for them. Their defects are, that they expose the guns 
 and men to the enemy's artillery and sharpshooters. 
 
 130. Light guns, particularly howitzers, are the best for 
 arming barbettes ; because the hollow projectile of the lat- 
 ter is very formidable, both to the enemy's columns and to 
 his cavalry ; and when he opens his fire against the salients, 
 the light pieces can be readily withdrawn. 
 
 131. The Emhrnsnre is an opening made in the parapet 
 for a gun to fire through. The bottom of the embrasure, 
 termed the «o?e, is two feet nine inches, or four feet above 
 the ground, on which the wheels of the carriage rest, ac- 
 cording to the size of the gun ; it the interior crest. These 
 four lines form the boundaries of the two cheeks on the su- 
 perior and exterior slopes. 
 
 132. When the directrix is perpendicular to the direc- 
 tion of the parapet, the embrasure-is termed direct. When 
 the directrix makes an acute angle with it, the embrasure 
 is termed oblique. 
 
 133. The manner of laying out an objique embrasure is 
 similar to the direct ; the mouth is of a rectangular form, 
 but is made wider in proportion to the obliquity, ia order 
 
22ft iiRLi tei; TfricATTOx. 
 
 that the part of the embrasure, which corresponds to the 
 muzzle of the gun, is nearly of the same width in both the di- 
 rect and oblique embrasures. The exterior width of the 
 sole is made equal to one-half the length of the directrix, 
 measured on the &ole. The cheeks are laid out as in the 
 last case. 
 
 134. The muzzle of a gun should enter at least six inches 
 into the embrasure, to prevent the blast from injuring the 
 cheeks ; <this limits the obliquity of the directrix to about 
 60^ for long guns. 
 
 135. The height of the cheeks must not be more than 
 four feet, for the same reason ; it will, therefore, in some 
 cases, be necessary to raise the ground on which the 
 wheels rest. 
 
 136. The parapet of a battery is usually termed the 
 epaulment. The interior face of the cpaulment, and the 
 cheeks of the slopes outward to allow the gun to be fired 
 under an inclination, the base of this slope should never fee 
 less than six times the altitude ; the interior[open5ng, 
 termed the mouthy is from eighteen inches to two feet wide, 
 according to the calibre of the gun, and is of a rectangu- 
 lar form ; the embrasure wddens towards the exterior, 
 which widening is termed the splay ; the manner in which 
 the play is regulated, is by producing the sole to the exte- 
 rior slope of the parapet, and makiag this exterior line 
 measured on the sole, equal to half the distance between 
 the inner and outer lines of the sole. This construction 
 makes the sole a trapezoidal figure, the side of the trape- 
 zoid, on the interior, being eighteen inches, or two feet ; 
 the ©pposite side being equal to half the perpendicular dis- 
 tance betw«en the tw^ Bido*. The line which bisects thi? 
 
sole 13 termed the directrix of the embrasure : the sides of 
 the embrasure, termed the cheeks, are laid out by setting 
 offtxo points on the exterior crest of the parapet, one on 
 the right, the other on the left of the sole, so that the hori- 
 zontal distance of these points from the sole shall be equal 
 to one-third their height above it. Lines are then drawn 
 on the exterior slope, froin these points to the exterior 
 points of the fole ; lines are in like mnnner drawn from the 
 same points, on the superior slope to the upper points of 
 the mouth, on embrasures, are riveted in the us^ual manner. 
 That part of the interior face which lies below the chase of 
 the gun is termed the (/cHoxiV^erc. The mass of earth be« 
 tweent two cnbrasures is termed a merlon. 
 
 137. The embrasures are generally cut out after the 
 ftpaulment is thrown up. If their position is decided upon 
 beforehand, ihej must be roughly formed at first, and be 
 finished after the epaulment is made- 
 
 138. The advantages of embrasures are, that the men 
 and guns are less exposed than in a barbette battery, — 
 Their principal defects are, that they have a very limited 
 field ol five ; they weaken the parapet, and present open- 
 ings through which an enemy may penetrate in an assault. 
 Owing to their limited field of fire, they are chiefly used 
 for the protection of particular points; as to flank a ditch, 
 protect a salient, enfilade a road, &c. The most suitable 
 position for tlj^em in a work is on tiie flanks. 
 
 139. Platforms. "When a gun is fired often in the same 
 direction, the ground under the wheels is £oon worn into 
 ruts; it is to prevent Ihir, that platforms of timber are 
 wsed in sxich cases. 
 
 140. The shape of th;» plaffrrrrn ]•>. H?waHy a rertangrl* ; 
 
2T1 nKLn FonriFiCATiox, 
 
 in some cases v^liere a wide field of fire is to be obtained^ 
 the form is a trapezoid. The rectangular platform is 10 
 feet wide, and 17 feci long, for seigc pieces; and 9 fee^ 
 wide and 15 feet long, for the field guns. It consists of 
 three sleepers of 6 inch scantling, either 16 or 17 feet long, 
 which are laid perpendicular to the direction of theepaul- 
 ment, and are covered with two-inch plank, twelve inches 
 wide, and cat into lengths (»f 9 or 10 feet. Between the 
 ends of the sleepers, and thefootof the genouillerc, apiece 
 of 8 inch scantling, 9 feet long, termed a heurter, is laid ; 
 it should project about six inches above the platform, and 
 be bisected hy the directrix. The object of the heurter is 
 to prevent the wheels from being run against the revet- 
 ment, and also to give the gun its proper direction, par- 
 ticularly in night firing. 
 
 141. To lay a platform, the earth on which it is to rest, 
 should be well rammed and levelled ; three trenches are 
 then made for the sleepers, two of which should be placed 
 ender the wheels, and the middle one under the trail. The 
 sleepers are laid flush with the ground, and firmily secuj'ed 
 by pickets driven at their sides and ends, and the earth is 
 solidly packed ifl the trench around them ; the plank is 
 then laid and secured by nails or some other Aistenings. 
 
 142. If the platform is for direct firing, with full chargep, 
 the ^ai7 may be made six inches higer than the front to 
 break the recoil ; in all other cases itshould be horizontal. 
 
 143. A platform may be constructed fimply of three 
 pieces of timber, one under each wheel, and one under the 
 trail, firmly secured by pickets, and connected by cross 
 pieces, into which they are halved. 
 
 Mi. For barbetts, the platform may be dippGng?d with. 
 
riBLD FORTinCAlIOA. 225 
 
 or if used, the whole surface nearly of the barbette, should 
 be covered. 
 
 H5. If the platform is made of a trapezoidal from it will 
 require five sleepers. 
 
 LINES. 
 
 14(?. Lines are a series of works and trcnflieisor of inde- 
 pendent works, arrraged so as to defend cacli other, and 
 the ground in front of and between them. 
 
 147. Lines are used to cover the front of a position, or 
 to connect important redoubts or forts together. 
 
 148. Lines are of two kinds, such as aire continuous, and 
 such as have intervals between the wor"ks. 
 
 149. The former are principally applicable to situations 
 where it is proposed to act on the defensive only, and 
 when they are of such limited extent that the whole line 
 of parapet can be occupied by troops sexclusive of reserves ;. 
 as for instance, to close a pass between scarped inountaine, 
 or on the aea shore, or on the banks of large rivers ; thus 
 resting on natural obstacles which will prevent their flank 
 being turned. They are often introduced as portions of 
 an extended line with intervals. 
 
 150. Extensive continued lines can make but slight re- 
 sistance, while the labour necessarily expended in executing 
 them is considerable ; and as the enemy mny menace sev- 
 eral points at once, it follows that as many troops would be- 
 required for the defense as for the attack, in which case 
 the first principal of fortification is violated. Even if the 
 defenders have a sufficient number of disposable troops^, 
 tbcj act when within lines, under adieadvantagc, for they 
 
224 riKLt) }UEJIFI€AT10N. 
 
 must watch and follow every movement of the eneiu j, so 
 as to be equally prepared to resist a false and a real at- 
 tack. It has often happened that while the defenders 
 within the lines were concentrating their forces to oppose 
 a false attack, the eneniy has penetrated at a point where 
 he was not expected; and a continued line once entered 
 may generally be deemed lost. 
 
 151. Continuous lines of redans connected by curtains 
 are constructed in three ways : in the first, (which is the 
 one puincipalljf used,) as described by Vauban, the salients 
 of the redans are 240 yards asunder, consequently the 
 musketry fire of one redan does not, effectively, defend the 
 Balient of the next. . To remedy this defect, it was subse- 
 quently recommended that the salients of the redans should 
 be brought within musket range of each other, or withia 
 160 yards. 
 
 152. In both of these constructions, the flanking angles 
 formed by the faces of the redans and the curtains joining 
 them must exceed 160°, and consequently the flanking de- 
 fence is very impeifect. 
 
 163. Lines o^ lenailles, consists of parapets forming a se- 
 ries Df salient and re-entering angles, and are in fact, like 
 the improved redan lines, except that in this tracing, the 
 redans are all of the same size, and have obtuse angles. 
 
 154. They are traced by setting off distances of about 
 200 yards along the front of the intended lines, to marke 
 the position of the salient angles ; these intervals are then 
 bisected, and perpendiculars drawn towards the interior 
 to give the places of the re-entering angles. The perpen- 
 diculars should not exceed half the distance between the 
 salients, otherwise the re-entering angles would be less 
 then right angles. 
 
rirts roRTiFiCATiox. 225 
 
 155. CremailUre lines are composed of alternate short 
 and long faces at right angles (or nearly so) to each other ; 
 the short faces, called croffJiets, are made about 30 yards 
 long, and the long faces, called br<tnvhes, about 100 yeads 
 long. 
 
 156. These lines possess the following advantages : 
 
 Ipt. The branches are little exposed tc bo enfiladed, 
 owing to the small projection of the salients. 
 
 2diy. Each branch is defended not only by the fire of 
 th« adjoining crotchet, but by several others. 
 
 3dlys mioir outline is very easily adapted to all varieties 
 <of the ground ; and on slopci-', in particular, they are very 
 advantageous, because a stnall additional height given to 
 the e)otchets will defilade a long extent of earth from the 
 tire of an ancmy on the height. 
 
 1.57. Their defects are : 
 
 1st. The crotchets being short, very little of the ditch 
 of each is defended by the adjacent branch; 
 
 2dly. A battery which can enHlade one branch is equally 
 able to enfilade several. 
 
 158. Cremalllore lines may be much strengthened by 
 placing along their front, bastions or double redans, at in- 
 torvals varying from 690 to 800 yards, in order that a cross 
 tire of artillery may be brought from them in front of the 
 other parts of the line. 
 
 f yS9. The crotchets sbould face towards the bastions^ 
 or redans, in order that the firt^ fioni the crotchets mar 
 defenfl the salients of tb'.''9 woiks. aud that the branchce 
 may t).e defiladed by bc»ng diicctcd on the bastion? or 
 double ro'^ans. 
 
S'JS FIKLB FORTIKICATION. 
 
 lilNES WITH INTERVALS OR BROKEN LINES. 
 
 160. Broken lines should always, v>-hen practicable, be 
 «r?po9ed in a double row, and in puch a manner that the 
 inner works may flank theontlinp; the advantages pos- 
 sessed by broken lines, arc : 
 
 1st. With the same extent as continuous lines, they ro- 
 *|uire less labor in the construction, and fewer troOjDS to 
 jjccupy them, consequently large reserves may be formed, 
 
 2dly. The defenders may advance in force and in a regu- 
 lar formation through the intervals, and attack tho enemy 
 should he have been thrown into confiision. 
 
 3dly. They oblige the enemy to overpower each separate 
 work before he can become possessed of the whole; where- 
 as if a continuous line be forced in one part, it is general- 
 ly lost to the defenders. 
 
 4thly. If the enemy has gained one work, he will then 
 be exposed to the flanking fire of the adjacent works, and 
 to a fire from the works in the second line. 
 
 IGl. To profit fully b}' this advantage, when the front 
 line consists of closed works, their rear faces ought to be 
 of slight construction, that the artillery of the second 
 line may easily demolish those faces, if the enemy should 
 gain pc ssession of the works. 
 
 162. When there are two lines of works, the heaviest 
 artillery should bo placed in the interior line, or else the 
 enemy, obtaining possession of the exterior line, would 
 turn the guns against the other, and have a superiority 
 over the dofeniers. 
 
 163. When lines are on sloping ground descending to- 
 wards the front, the slope Sshould, if possible, be very t^toep, 
 so as to form an escapement befur the woj k\-, 
 
MKLu lonriFK'Ano*, 2"'.' 
 
 164. A eiugle row of redans or redouts is comparativi- 
 iy weak, for the fire from tli cm crosses at a distance iu 
 front of the intervals, and but feebly defends tlie salients. 
 Lunettes are better in such a situation on account of tlic 
 lire of the flanks, which may be broug-ht to cross the capi- 
 tals close to the salient angles. 
 
 165. The intervals between the works which form a bro- 
 ken line, should not exceed l^O yards, in order that they 
 may be defended by an effective cross fire from those works- 
 
 166. The different works should occupy the most promi- 
 nent and the highest ground : also the flanking parts ought 
 to be perpendicular to their lines of defense. 
 
 167. The intervals between the works may be strength- 
 ened by artificial obstacles, or by a trench, for troops, 
 with a rough parapet, (like the first parallel in a seige) 
 Laving abroad interior slope to enable the men to advance 
 over it when occasion requires. 
 
 DEFENCE OF FIELD WORKS, 
 
 168. A spot selected for a military post should not be 
 commanded, especially on the flank or in the rear, within 
 the ordinary range of a field piece. There should be plen- 
 ty of materials on the spot to aid in strengthening the 
 works, or in forming obstructions in frontof them, the soil 
 should be of a nature to be easily worked, and the position 
 ehould be difficult of access ; it should, however, offer the 
 means of retreating in security, and with facility. 
 
 169. There is no talent more essential to an officer than 
 that of seizing at a glance the strong and weak points of a 
 position. This talent, known by the name of '"JlUitar,'/ 
 toi'p d' aciV can be atquiicdaloncby practice and stud t ■ 
 
228 FIELD ««RTIFI«AriON. 
 
 for whatever may be said of natural gifts, apprehension, 
 however quick it may be, can supply the places of those 
 indispensable requisitions in every art, and in no one arc 
 they more so than in the Militwry Art. 
 
 170. The highest ground of a position should be occupied 
 by the salients of works, for then the adjoining faces will 
 be, in some measure, secured from enfilade fire j it follows 
 that the re-entering angles should be placed in the lowest 
 spots. 
 
 171. It is very essential to create obstructions within 
 short range of musketi'y in front of all works of a tempo- 
 rary nature, with a view of breaking the order of the as- 
 sailants, and detaining them under a close a«d severe fire, 
 if they persist in forcing their way through. 
 
 172. In fact, all the movements of an enemy, whether to 
 the front, to the right or left, should be as much cramped 
 and impeded as possible ; it is important to break his or- 
 der and put him int© confusion when under fire, for he 
 can seldom reform under such circumstances ; and if he 
 attacks in disorder, the chances are against his success. 
 
 173. To save time in making palisades or stockade work, 
 the whole quantity ought to be divided into distinct por- 
 tions, say 10 or 12 feet in length, to one carpenter and two 
 laborers ; and to prevent confusion in obtaining materials 
 for constructing obstacles, it is well to divide the men into 
 parties of 8 or 10 each, prescribing to each party the na- 
 ture of the materials required, the place where they are 
 to be obtained, and the spot at which they are to be de- 
 posited. 
 
 174. The materials are obtained by felling trees, unroof- 
 ing houses, taking up floora and the like. 
 
FIELD IfdRTjrifATION. 229 
 
 175. The guns of a work should not, gcnerallj, reply to 
 the cannonade which preceds an assault, but should be 
 placed behind traverses, or other places of shelter previ- 
 ously prepared by them ; they should only fire at the ene- 
 my's artillery, while the latter is changing its position. 
 
 176. Hound shot or shells arc fired against guns ; grape, 
 canister, spherical case, and rockets against troops. 
 
 177. As soon as the enemy's light troops advance, the 
 parapets are to be manned ; sand bags, previously filled, 
 are placed along the parapet, leaving loop holes between 
 them ; they are musket shot proof, and give the men the 
 necessary confidence to enable them to take a steady aim. 
 One rank of men is sufficient on the banquette, others be- 
 ing placed behind them to load. A reserve is to b« station- 
 ed under cover, who fall upon the assailants with the bayo- 
 net, should they sueced in getting into the work. For a 
 goad defence, there ought to be a fils per yard to man the 
 parapet, with a reserve of one-fourth or one-sixth of the 
 whole, in addition. 
 
 178. As soon as the assaulting columns begin to mask 
 the fire of their own artillery, the guns of the work will bo 
 brought up and open their fire on them. 
 
 179. A sortie (very rarely) may be made, should the 
 enemy be thrown into disorder ; but this step requires 
 great caution, for should the sortie be repelled, the enemy 
 may enter the works with the retiring troops. 
 
 180. FouGAssBS, previously prepared, will be fired the 
 instant the enemy is above them, by means of a piece of 
 safety fuse, or a musket with its muzzle in the powder, and 
 a wire to the trigger. 
 
 181. If the assailen(« at length descend into the ditch, 
 
230 i:leld lOftiificAin^.N. 
 
 ebells, grenades, and every sort of missile are to be tbrowii 
 upon them. The shells are rolled down b}' being placed 
 in troughs laid on the superior slope of the parapet. 
 
 182. If the enemy has to cross a river before he arrives 
 at the work, the fords maj^ be rendered impassible for ar- 
 tillery and cavalry, by digging pits, planting stakes, 
 throwing in felled trees and harrows, or by driving wag- 
 Otes or oarts full of stones into the middle, and taking off 
 the wheels. 
 
 183. Should the ford be beyond musket range from the 
 ■work, a narapet may be raised opposite to it, at such a dis- 
 tance from it as tojpermit the aefenders to issue forth and 
 charge the party crossing it, at the moment they land in 
 disorder on the bank. 
 
 184. To prevent suprise, outposts arc stationed around 
 the work at night, and heaps of dried brushwood, or tarred 
 fascines, should be placed along the post at intervals ; at 
 the approach of the enemy the outposts retire into the 
 work, having set fire to the piles of brushwood ; this will, 
 in a great measure, prevent an enemy from concealing 
 himself near the work. 
 
 LOOPHOLING WALLS. 
 
 185. Walls are made available for the purpose of de- 
 fense Dy loopholing them, if a ditch cannot, for want of 
 time, be dug at the foot of the wall outside. The loopholes 
 ought to be at least 7 feet above the ground to prevent the 
 assailants from making use of them ; in the former case a 
 temporary stage might be made of casks, ladders, &c., 
 ■within i feet or 4 feet 6 inches of the loopholes, to enable 
 tlie men to fne thFOUfth them. 
 
1 Itl.O rOKTiyiriiH 
 
 JS<i...Tl)o (Quickest way of loopholing a wall is to break it 
 down fcom the U)p in "the form of narrow fissures abont 3 
 feet asunder ; but if the wall is very low, or there is not 
 time to make loopholes, a piece of timber or the trunk of a 
 tree, supported on the top of it by a couple of stones, wou!d 
 be a ready expedient, and the men could fire from the open- 
 ing- under it or sand bagfs, or larp^ stones or sods, might 
 be-placed on the wall at intervals. .. The roopholes made in 
 walls or buildings can seldom bo n)ade of any rcjrular form; 
 The width outside should not exceed 3 inches, but inside 
 it may be equal to the thickness of .the wall. The best 
 tools (of such as are usually found about a building-) .to 
 break loopholes throagh a wall, arc crow-bars, pick-axes, 
 and large hammers. 
 
 187. Barricades for roads and streets," are made, if time 
 permits, by sinking. a ditch 7 or 8 fiet deep, "and forming 
 the earth into a breastwork, adding palisades, &c., but if 
 time presses, casks, bo;ces, or cart bodies lilled with oarth^ 
 stones, manure, or cinders, sacks of four, bale* of mex- 
 chandise, and 'the; like, must be arranged across j jpavino- 
 stones may be taken iip and disposed in a similar manner, 
 
 188. The mass should be raised 6 or 7 feet high, and a 
 banquette formed fuj firing over it; the neighboring 
 houses should also be l.oopholed so as to give a good flank- 
 ing fire over tli^e ground in front of the barricade,, s;ind 
 stones may be collected to tlwow down on the assailants 
 from the contigious houaofe. 
 
 FOUTIFYIXCr EOUSES. 
 
 IvSfA The gveat art of convciting buildings, and the out- 
 liii • ;iiid wall that in:n?llv surround them, into defensible 
 
232 VIELB FeUTIFIOATION. 
 
 posts, consists in selecting from the mass of objects at hand, 
 such as will answer the purpose, and in sacrificing eyery- 
 thing else, making use of the materials to strengthen the 
 part which is to be fortified. 
 
 190. The building chosen should possess some of all tho 
 following requisites : 
 
 Ist. It sTiould command all that surrounds it* 
 
 2dly. It should be substantial, (not thatched,) and of a 
 nature to furnish materials useful for , placing it in a state 
 of defense. 
 
 3dly. It should be of an extent not too great for the 
 number of defenders, and should only require for the com- 
 pletion of the proposed object the time* and means which 
 can be spared. 
 
 4thly. It should hare projections flanking the walls and 
 angles. 
 
 5thly. It should be difficult of access on the side exposed 
 to attack, and yet have a safe retreat for the defenders ; 
 and, of course, it must be in such a position as to answer 
 the purpose for which the detachment is posted. 
 
 191. As a rough guide to judge of the third requisite, 
 there ought to be a man for every 4 feet of wall round the 
 interior of the lower story, one to every 6 feet for the se- 
 cond story, and one to every 8 feet for an attic, with a re- 
 Berve about one-sixth of the whole. 
 
 192. Should there exist any doubt about having suffi- 
 cient time to execute all that might be wished, it would 
 be necessary to decide on the best points to be secured in 
 order to repel an immediate attack ; in such a case it might 
 be well to employ as many men as could work without hin- 
 <lerir»"" e8*"h other by being too crowded, to collect materi- 
 
FIKL» FORTlFI«ATI«N. 233 
 
 a^ aod ban-icado the doors and windowe on the grouflli 
 floor, to make loopholes in them, and to level any obstruc- 
 tion outside that would give cover to the enemy, or facili- 
 tate the attack; to sink ditches opposite the doors on the 
 outside, and arrange loopholes in the windows of the upper 
 story ; to make loopholes through the walls generally, at- 
 tending first to the most exposed parts, and to break com- 
 munications through all the party walls and partitions; to 
 place abattis or any feasible obstruction on the outside, and 
 to improve the defense of the post by the construction of 
 tambours ; to place outbuildings and garden walls in a state 
 of defense, and establish communication between them ; 
 to make arrangements (in the lower story particularly) 
 for defending one room after another, so that a partial 
 possession only, could be obtained on a sudden attack 
 being made. 
 
 193. These different works should be undertaken in the 
 order of their relative importance, according to circum- 
 stances ; and after securing the immediate object for which 
 they arc designed, they mi^ht remain to be improved on, 
 If an opportunity should offer. 
 
 194. Houses are fortified by piercing loopholes through 
 the walls, and if the walls are high, two or even three rows 
 of loopholes may be made, and a temporary scaffolding of 
 furniture, casks, Ac, erected for firing from the upper 
 ones ; one row may be made close to the ground, with pits 
 dug In the rear, &r the floor may be cut through, if there 
 is a basement, for the convenience of making use of them. 
 The loopholes may have the dimensions before prescribed, 
 and they ought not to be made at a less distance than three 
 feet from each other, lest the wall should be too much 
 Treakened, ©r the defenders inconve»ientlr cao^^eled. 
 
2oi fiKLU leKriritAxioK. 
 
 195. The staircases are to be cut away, the eommuuica« 
 lion being kept up by ladders ; and the floors, as well as 
 the partition walls, should be loopholed. 
 
 196. Thatched roofs and all combustible materials a^-e to 
 be removed, and barrels of water should be placed in every 
 room in readiness to extinguish fire. 
 
 197. A communication ought to be opened on the side 
 farthest from the enem}'^, through which ammunition 
 and reinforcements may enter. 
 
 198. The door or barrier closing this communication, 
 may be made musket proof, by nailing strong planks to it, 
 and if there is a basement to the house, the floor should be 
 cut away within the door, so as to form a sort of a ditch. 
 
 199. All the doors and window^are to be barricaded and 
 loopholed. The best barricade for a door is made by strong 
 palisades, which are secured to a thick cross beam let into 
 the wall on each side ; a bank of earth may also be formed 
 on the exterior. 
 
 200. All the enclosures which may atford the enemy 
 cover, must be removed, if not included in the defense. 
 
 201. If artillery is likely to be employed against the 
 h ouse, it will be necessary, unless the walls are very strong, 
 to support the timbers cf the roof by means of props. 
 
 202. If there is time, the house maybe formed into a 
 block house by pulling down the upper stories, and laying 
 the materials over the lower rooms to make the covering 
 shell proof. 
 
 203. A ditch may be dug on the outside of the house, 
 and the eaith placed against the walls; some protection 
 may be obtained for the doors, by placing strong beams 
 on the wall outside in an inclined position, and heaping' 
 Varth or ruljbifh ovcm- Ihem. 
 
I IKLl) riinTllli.'ATfON. loi} 
 
 INTKEXCniXG A VILLAGE. 
 
 204. In intrenching a village, the building?, walls, and 
 hedges on its circuit, are to be considered as part of its 
 enclosure, and arc to be made fit for the purpose of de- 
 fense; all the intervals between them are to be occupied 
 by breastworks or palisades, and strengthened bj abattis. 
 
 205. The streets are to be barricaded at intervals with 
 carts or wagons, having one or two wheels taken off, with 
 barrels of earth, bales of merchandize, «tc. ; a passage 
 should be made through the adjoining houses, which should 
 be loopholed, and care mu^t be taken that the barricade 
 be not turned by an enomy passing down the neighboring 
 etreots. 
 
 20G. Some strong building, such as a church, court- 
 house, or jail, should be selected, and fortified with par- 
 ticular care, to serve as a citadel or reduit, to which the 
 defenders may retire when driven in from the exterior 
 part of the village. 
 
 207. Advantage must be taken of any walls or outbuild- 
 ings surrounding whatever has been selected as the reduit 
 or keep ; and they should be converted into outworks for 
 strengthening it as an independent post. Should the vil- 
 lage be of too great an extent for the force thrown into Of, 
 a portion of it only might be strengthened, and the re- 
 mainder separated or destroyed ; or the defence might be 
 confined to some separate building. 
 
 208. The roads by which an enemy would advance should 
 be cut up, and obstructed with felled trees, ploughs, har- 
 rows, &c. ; bridges should ho brokon, and the passage dis- 
 puted under cover of some simple field wni'k placed favor- 
 ably to command the road. 
 
2^^ FIELD FOBTIFreATrOX. 
 
 209. The resolute defence of villages situated on the 
 front of an army has often decided the fate of a battle; 
 in this position, they may be regarded as bastions connect- 
 ed by movable curtains. 
 
 ATTACK ON FIELD WORKS. 
 
 210. The attack on field works may be executed bysur- 
 prise, or by open force ; the former can only take place 
 when the advance of the assailants is concealed by fog or 
 darkness, or by the nature of the ground, as in mountain- 
 ous countries. 
 
 211. In the attack of field works by open force, it is ad- 
 visable to advance against several points at the same mo- 
 ment, when circumstances permit ; of these some may be 
 false attacks, and may be converted into real ones if the 
 enemy appears weak or hesitating on the points threaten- 
 ed. One attack ought, generally, to be directed upon the 
 rear of the work, (if open at the gorge,) which will al- 
 ways lessen the confidence of the defenders. 
 
 212. As many assaulting columns should be formed as 
 there are points to be attacked, and before the works are 
 stormed, pits and trenches should (when time permits, 
 and there is no natural cover for skirmishers) be dug to 
 conceal riflemen : these pits are about four feet wide, and, 
 with the excavated earth raised before them, four feet in 
 depth, in order that they may serve to cover a file of mon to 
 that height. 
 
 213. The artillery should be posted on the prolongations 
 of the faces to enfilade them, weaken the parapets, and 
 ruin the interior defences of the works and its ditch ; for 
 
FIELB FORTIPieATION. , 237 
 
 the latter purpose howitzers are best adapteii. As soon as 
 the artillery has produced some effect, the signal for the 
 assault should be give ; light troopswill gradually advance 
 towards the counterscarp, in skirmishing order, firing at 
 the gunners through the embrasures ; they will conceal 
 themselves in the pits and trenches prepared for thorn, or 
 seek shelter in the inequalities of the ground. They should 
 be followed by storming parties, and these should be ac- 
 companied by adetachuicnt of sappers, (or ajsqu ad of sol- 
 diers told oft" for that purpose,) carrying axes, crowbars, 
 bags of powder, <fec., to force obstacles. Lastly, the re- 
 servo will follow, at some distance, to act as circumstan- 
 ces may require ; it may repel attempts to aid the 
 defenders, reinforce the storming parties if they succeed 
 in entering ;.the work, or it may afford them a rallying 
 point, and cover their retreat if they fail. 
 
 214. The troops descend into the ditch with unfixed 
 bayonets, in order to avoid accidents ; and thej fix them 
 when on the berme. 
 
 215. Should the ditches have a great depth, it will be 
 necessary to lessen it by means of bags with heather or 
 grass, or by bundles of hay or straw, or fascines, &o. 
 
 21G. A bridge formed of a gun limber and a ladder maj 
 be run up to the counterscarp and thrown across. 
 
 217. To avoid mistakes in marching by night to attack, 
 each soldier should bear some visible mark by which he 
 may be distinguished form an enemy. If a breach or any 
 particular point is to be attacked by night, the way to it 
 should be marked by distinguishable pickets or other ob- 
 jects, placed or re-marked on the ground at the time of the 
 previous reconnoissance. 
 
;:;;3 field FOETiricAxroK. 
 
 -18. The columns naarch to the ai;?ault in tha direction 
 iS the capitals ;- but after passing the ditch, the troopg 
 rhould enter the worka by the faces, on each side of the 
 ■^alient angle, tkat they m&y present a front in the work 
 i uual or ?uperior to that of the enemy. When it may be. 
 iiiitvisable to force an estranco at the gate of a fortifiecJ 
 poit, that gnie may be destroyed by a piece of artillery 
 5,i()ught close ap to it, or by a bag of powder attached to 
 the wood by a gimlet, or propped against it by a forked 
 ^ ' iclc. 
 
 ■219. In assaulting a place whose scarps and counter- 
 v<;irps are revetted with masonry, scaling ladders must be 
 >!n).loyed. The first division of each column of assault 
 riniesthe longest ladders ; they descendiinto the ditcli 
 R:.it.li them, and aftferVi'ards carry the ladders across and 
 rniso them against the scarp. 
 
 220. The next division carries other ladders, ^Yhich they 
 plitpo and leave against the counterscarp. The ladders are 
 finied and planted with arms slung. Ladders planted 
 aii'aiiist aiwall are not to slope above one-foiirth of their 
 h ight, lest they should break under the weight of the 
 iii;'"n. 
 
 22;1. A strong firing party is drawn up on the glacis to- 
 kiiep down the fire of the defenders, if the latter should ap- 
 pear oa tb« parapets to oppose the assault. 
 
 ATTACKING HOUSES. 
 
 222. In the attack of houses, artillery should be era- 
 ])l».r{ito form a breach before giving the assault, and also- 
 tu iuow hot shot, shells, and carcassos-. 
 
iihLi* rom-iiiC-Miox. 
 
 223. If the detnelnncnt is unprovided with artillery, ^.i- 
 tampti must be made to force passages through door. 
 ^vindo^vs, or unflanked parts of the walls: the atta.k 
 should be made on different parte of the building, to du- 
 iractthe attentien of the defenders; in the meantime, 
 and for the same purpose, parties of men keep up a fire -ui 
 anv points where there is a chance of disabling them. - 
 Attempts may also be made to effect an entrance throu;:h 
 the roof by means of ladders. 
 
 224. If the assailants have neit4icr iwwder nor crowbwi^s 
 for forcing doors, a heavy beam or tree may, if at b;-.i..i, 
 be used as a battering ram ; a fire of straw or brush^vnod 
 may bo made near the walls further to distract and p...r.u, 
 the defenders, and to cover the operations of tto aMaU:iiilr. 
 
 ATTACKIXO BARRICADES. 
 
 225. Artillery will soon clear a passage tiirough ordiii*- 
 ry^barricades ; "if not, the assaulting party must endeavor 
 to turn the barricade, either by passing down some <.i h r 
 street, or by forcing a passage from one^ouse to ancUin, 
 until they arrive in rear of it : a few loaded musket, ap- 
 plied to tlie locks and bolts of the strongciit door wiU f-.M-ce 
 it open, and the partition walh: may be destroyed by h^-i 
 of powder, &c. After having taken possession ot a ht-u.-, 
 troops must be left in it for the purpose -of firing frcw it 
 upon the barricade. 
 
OUTPOST AND PICKET DUTY. 
 
 PART SIXTH. 
 
 ADrANCED-OUARDS AND ADVANCED-POSTS. 
 
 1. To k,eep an enem}' in ignorance of the state of our 
 forc»6 and the character of our position, is one of the most 
 indispensablie duties in war. It is in this way that we 
 oblige him to take every possible precaution in advancing; 
 forcing him to feel his way step by step, and to avoid risk- 
 ing his own safety in hazarding those bold and rapid move- 
 ments which, when made against a feeble or an unprepared 
 enemy, lead to the most brilliant results. 
 
 2. This object is eftectedby placing between the position 
 occupied by the main force and the presumed direction of 
 the enemy, a body detached from the main force, but act- 
 ing always with reference to it, termed an Advancecl- 
 Ouard. 
 
 3. Thia term is used for any body of troops so separated 
 from the main body, whatever its strength and composi- 
 tion, and whether the troops be in position or on a 
 march. 
 
 i. For a large Jorce, the adrancsd'-gaard is necessarily 
 
o«f-POSf AN* ncKEi Dwrr. 241 
 
 composed of troop« of all armg, its strength being propor- 
 tioned to that of the main force ; the more or less re- 
 sistance of an independent character it may be required to 
 make; and the greater or less extent it may be found 
 necessary to embrace by its advanced-posts, on the front 
 and flanks, to watch and anticipate every movement of 
 the enemy. 
 
 5. The proportion of the advanced-guard to the main- 
 body may vary from a third to a fifth of the total force. 
 In armies of some strength, or large eorps-d' armee, par- 
 ticularly where the nature of the country requires a wide 
 development of advanced-posts, the larger proportion is de- 
 manded ; as at least one-third or even one-half of its 
 strength will be required for the advanced-post service. 
 In a small force of two or three thousand men, one-fifth 
 will usually be all that can be well spared for the same 
 purposes. 
 
 fi. Our purpose, in all cases, should be to keep the ei>c- 
 my in a state of uncertainty as to our actual force and 
 movements, and this can be effected only by keeping con- 
 stantly between him and our main-body a force of sufficient 
 strength to offer an obstinate resistance, if necessary, to 
 every attempt he may openly make to gain information, 
 and even to aot offensively against him, when occasion of- 
 fers, so as to keep him in doubt aa to the actual character 
 and number of troops before him ; the old military axiom 
 being always kept in mind, that " a sword opportunely 
 drnum frequenthf keepn another hack m itt scabbard." 
 
 7. In all defensive positions, the adv. meed-guard audits 
 advanced-posts should retire slowly but circumspectly, s(> 
 that the main-body may have time to take all its defensive 
 
Tneasures. In the ofTensWe, the attack of the aclvauced- 
 guard should be decided and vigorous ; pressing upon the 
 enemy at cvcrj point, and leaving nothing undone to de- 
 moralize Lim, bj the confusion which so often follows from 
 an impetuous onset. 
 
 8. Whilst in position, the advanced-guard should take 
 advantage of the natural, or other obstacles on its front 
 and flanks which are within supporting distance, to 
 strengthen itself, and again strppurts for its advanced- 
 posts. In this waA^, its means of resistance, whether act- 
 ing oiiensively, or otherwise, may be greatly augmented. 
 Ground of this character, taken up by the troops, should 
 not be abandoned without very cogent reasojis for it; 
 eince, should circKrastauccs bring abo«t a forward move- 
 ment, it might cost more to regain what was given up 
 than to have maintained it obstinately at tir.'>t. 
 
 9. The ground to be taken by an advanced-guiud, and 
 embraced within its advanced-posts, should be carefully 
 chosen. To take position where the movements of the 
 enemy can be well watched, whilst our own troops art 
 kept concealed, and not liable to a sudden attack, either 
 in front or flank, are the dedder^.ta in such cases. If, in 
 following this guide, it should lead to a development -of 
 advanced-posts which would be too weak at any point for 
 a tolerable resistance, there remains but the alternative- 
 to retire slowly before the enemy,— taking care that he 
 do not slip behind the out-posts and their supports,— upoi; 
 3ome een-tral point to the rear where the advanced-posts, 
 united to tlio troops in reserve, may make a good stand, 
 and from which, if the chances are favorable, they may 
 idvance u]u>n the onemv, and makchioi paj- dearly i'arblg 
 
 SeUlCMUTV.. 
 
10. In all affaire of advanced-s^uarda great circumspeo- 
 tion is to be shown, both by the offictir in command of the 
 advanced-guard, in throwing forward fresh troops to 
 strengthen a point assailed, as well as on tho part of the 
 general-in-chief, in sustainins;^ th« advanced-guard br 
 weakening bis main-body. The«e are point.^ that can only 
 be decided upon the spot. The .safer rule, in all cases, is 
 Bot to weaken th-? main defen.^e, or main attack, by detach- 
 ing from it to support a feeble point. If the force engag- 
 ed, under such circumstances, does not suffice for its own 
 defence, it is best for it to fall back in time, and, taking 
 jionition with the main-bod j, endeavor, by their combined 
 eirorts, to turn the scales of victory in their favor. 
 
 11. The duties of advanced-guards being" so much more 
 frequently to feel and occupy tho enemy, preparatoi-y to 
 some decisive blow by the main body, than to engage him 
 with a view to follov/ up any advantage gained, it follows, 
 as a matter of course, that they should be composed of the 
 Moat efficient and active light troops at tho general's dis- 
 popal. 8uch troopp, in the hands of a bold, energetic, but 
 prudent leader, will be the right arm of any army. — 
 Prompt on all occasions, never taken at fault, they keep 
 the enemy constriiitly occupied, harass him with fatiguing 
 precautions to secure his Hanks and rear, whilst their own- 
 ikco is kept relieved from these annoyance?, and alvvay,'> 
 fi'csh for aay great emergency. 
 
 ADVANCED POSTS. 
 
 1 2. The duties of the advanced posts ai'c the same whetlr- 
 er the troops are stationary, or in movement : the}' arCjr 
 \ To keep a good lookout for tb« enemy, and when i^^ hA^ 
 
244 orx-POST akd picket duty, 
 
 immediate presence to take all means to bo accvirately in- 
 formed of his strength, position and movements ; 2. Should 
 the enemy advance, to hold him in check long enough to 
 give the main body ample time to be prepared for his at- 
 tack. 
 
 13. By a faithful discharge of these duties, the n-hole 
 army can, at all times, and under all circumstances, b» 
 kept in a state of readiness for action, without subjecting 
 the soldier to any fatigue beyend the ordinary physical 
 •endurance of a well-developed manhood, as but a small 
 portion, comparatively, of the forces present is required 
 to watch over the safety of the rest, and can therefore be 
 frequently relieved, so that every one may have time suf- 
 ficient for the repose demanded after extraordinaiy exer- 
 tions. 
 
 14. The object being to secure the front and flanks of the 
 ■position occupied by the main body, from any attempt 
 eiiher to reconnoitre or attack it, the detachments which 
 -form the advance posts must be so distributed as to em- 
 brace all the avenues by which the enemy can approach 
 ■the position. The system adoped, in most services, to ef- 
 fect this object, consists of two or three concentric lines of 
 posts, disposed in a. fan-shaped order. The exterior line, 
 which forms the Out-Posts, embraces a wide circumfer- 
 ence, and by means of a chain of Sentinels, poeted in ad- 
 'vance, prevents any one from penetrating to the rear be- 
 tween the posts, without being seen. 
 
 15. The second line, which is one of Grand-Guards, 
 embraces a narrower circumference than the line of out- 
 posts, occupying the more important avenues from the out- 
 jiosts to the interior, go as to be in position to support the 
 
eXTT-POST AyD PICKET BUTT. 24o 
 
 out-posts in case of necegsity, and to receive them if driven 
 in. 
 
 16. The interior line consists of several stronj? detach- 
 ments, termed Pickets, posted upon the main avenues to 
 the position. They serve as supports to the two exterior 
 lines, upon which they rally if forced to retire before the 
 enemy. 
 
 17. Besides ese dispositions for security. Patrols are 
 kept up betwt n the line of posts, to keep the one inform- 
 ed of the state of the other ; and also between the out- 
 posts and chain of sentinels, to see that the duties of the 
 latter are well performed, and to search any ground not 
 brought well under the eyes of the sentinels. The whole, 
 in this way, forms a connected system, for observing the 
 enemy and for mutual support in case of attack. 
 
 18. The duties of the out-posts, and of the grand-guards 
 which form their supports, are strictly those of observa- 
 tion. If attacked, they offer no resistance farther than to 
 enable them to foci the enemy perfectly, and never lose 
 sight of him. The task of holding the enemy in check by 
 a vigorous resistance, so as to procure sufficient time for 
 the main body to make its dispositions foi: battle, is con- 
 signed to the pickets. 
 
 19. The ground taken up hy the advanced-posts will 
 depend on the capabilities which its natural features offer 
 for defence, on the number and character of the approach- 
 es it presents to an enemy for attacking the front or flanks 
 of the position occupied by the main body, and upon the 
 facilities it may afford for communication between the 
 posts. 
 
Mb lUT-POflT AND PICK til 01 I V, 
 
 OUT-POSTS. 
 
 20. The position of the out-po?t3, with respect to the 
 main body, will be regulated by the more or less broken 
 character of the country. As a goijeral rule, the mean 
 distance may be taken at about two miles. The line occu- 
 pied by these posts should take in all the approaches to 
 the front and flanks of the main position. When a posi- 
 tion is to be held for some time, or is taken up after a bat- 
 tle, the out-posts may be thrown farther in advance, to 
 
 ^pprocui'e greater repose and security for the main body. 
 
 21. The ground on which the line of out-posts is estab- 
 lished, should be carefully examined, with a view both to 
 observation and defence. As far as practicable, those 
 points should be selected for posts which present some na- 
 tural advantages for the defence ; will screen the troops 
 from the enemy's view, and enable tbeni to watch all bis 
 movements. Whenever the features of the ground do not 
 offer natural obstacles to cover the posts, artificial means 
 of a slight character should be resorted to. The flanks of 
 the line should rest upon strong natural obstacles ; when 
 such cannot be found, withdvit giving the line too great 
 an extent, these points must be secured by strong pickets 
 of cavalry or infantry, thrown back to form crotchets, 
 from which patrols must be constantly kept up on the 
 flanks, in the presumed direction of the enemy. 
 
 22. The strength of each out-post, and the distance from 
 one to the other, will be '"egulated by the features of the 
 ground, and the number of sentinels or vedi^ttes that each 
 post must throw out. The posts should, as far as practi- 
 cable, be within si^ht of the grand-guards to which they 
 
0UT-P08T AN» riCKir DUir. 2i1 
 
 belonjj, and the sentinels of their respective posts. When 
 the ground does not pertnit this arrangement, sentinels 
 should be placed at intermediate points, to communicate 
 promptly whatever may happen at the line of posts, or of 
 sentinels, to the rear. Posts of infantry should not, as a 
 general rule, be placed farther ap;irt than 600 paces, nor 
 their sentinels more than 300 paces in advance of the posts. 
 Those of cavalry may b^sorae 1500 paces apart, and their 
 vedettes from 600 to 800 paces in advance. The strength 
 of each post should be calculated at the rate of four men 
 for each sentinel, or vedette. 
 
 SENTINELS. 
 
 23. The sentinels and vedettes form a chain in advance, 
 and are posted on points from which they can best watch 
 the enemy without being seen by, or exposed to him, in 
 any way. As one of their main duties is to preveat any 
 one from passing their chain, they should be so placed, 
 with respect to each other, that they can see all the ground 
 between their respective posts, and be able to stop any one 
 who may attempt to pass between them. At night and in 
 misty weather, the sentiuelg should be doubled and be 
 drawn in nearer to the out-posts. 
 
 24. Whenever it may be deemed neeessasy to post senti- 
 nels on points beyond the line of out-posts, they should be 
 furnished by posts detached in advance of the line. 
 
 ORAXD-GUARDS. 
 
 25. As thegrand guards furnish the out-posts, and serve 
 as their supports, not more than one-third of their force 
 
248 wBi-Poax AS» rivKiiT ifir. 
 
 should be taken for the out-posts. The graud-guarjds ai'e 
 posted on the principal arenues leading to the detachments 
 on which they are to fall back, if driven in; and when of 
 infantry, about 200 pace's, and of cavalry, 600 to 800 paces, 
 in the rear of the out-posts. The points which they occu- 
 py should be selected, both to secure them from the enemy's 
 view, and to give a ready communication between them 
 and their respective out-posts. No difficult or broken 
 ground should lie between the grand-guards and their 
 out-poste ; if any such occur, particularly if it be of a na- 
 ture to offer TaTCititjes to an enemy to penetrate to the rear, 
 the whole should be posted on the farther, or either side 
 of it, and in preference in the latter position, if by it the 
 chain of post can be preserved unbroken. 
 
 PICKETS. 
 
 26. The main detachments or pickets, which form t he 
 supports to the grand-guards and out-posts, occupy the 
 principal avenues to the position of the main body. As 
 their duty is to hold the enemy in check, the points which 
 they take up should be susceptible of a good defence ; such, 
 for example, as villages, defiles, &c. Whenever these ad- 
 vantages are not found at hand, resort should he kad to 
 any temporary obstacles, as abattis, &c., which can be 
 readily procured, to place the troops under shelter. The 
 points thus occupied should, as a general rule, be about 
 midway between the line of out-posts and the position of 
 the main body. 
 
 27. Small posts should be thrown forward by the pick- 
 ets, between their position and the line of grand-guards ; 
 
evT-POsr i.N» rieKBT bhtt. 2t- 
 
 both for the greater security of the detachments, and as 
 supports to the grand-guards. In like manner, when the 
 line of pickets is of considerable extent, intermediate poata 
 must be established, to keep open a communication between 
 them. 
 
 28. No pains should be spared to obstruct the approach- 
 es of the enemy to the points occupied by the pickets, par- 
 ticularly those which lead to the flanks, leaving open such 
 only as will oblige the enemy to attack under the most 
 unfavorable circumstances, and if, between the advanced' 
 posts and the main body, a defile, or other unfavorable 
 pass should occur, which the. enemy, by turning the line 
 of the advanced posts, might seize upon, and thus cut off 
 their retreat, it should be occupied by a strong detach- 
 ment, both to prevent such a raanccuvre, and to favor the 
 retreat on the main body. 
 
 STREXGTU OF THE ADVANCED-POSTS. 
 
 29. The entire strength of the advanced posts, as well as 
 the relative strength of tha pickets, grand-guards, and 
 out-posts, will depend upon the character of the ground 
 covered by them, as being more or less open, and present- 
 ing more or less facilities for circumscribing the approach- 
 es of the enemy to the main position. It rarely occurs 
 that sufficient troops can be detached to cover all the ac- 
 cessible ground; and perform the duties in a thorough 
 manner. 
 
 30. The strength of each picket, and the kind of troops 
 of which it is composed, will depend on the degree of re- 
 sistance to be offered to the enemy's attack, and the char- 
 acter of'the position occupied. In most cases where a vig- 
 
-•>'' iiUT-.POST A.\l) I'TCKET Bl.^T.I . 
 
 oroiis defence? is callecl for, they will -consist- of troops of 
 all arms, and an aggregate of sevef al hundred men. The, • 
 grand-guards, ou't-posts, and pafr'ols, should not exceed 
 one-third the strength of the pickets to which thej.belong. 
 They will be composed of car air v, or infantry, according 
 to the more or less broken features ©f the ground/ 
 
 SI. It rarely ocQura that artillery is placed at the out- 
 posts. Whenever it happens that a piece or two may be 
 deemed necessary, to sweep some passage, oi; defile, in ad- 
 vance of the line of out-posts, the guns must be prot^icted 
 by a strong post, to insure their safety in a retreat. , '" 
 
 32. If, from the character of the ground, the out-posts 
 are mainly of infantry> some cavahT should alwa3'&be at- 
 tached to them, to patrol in advance of the position, and 
 to convey intelligence to the rear*, of what may be passing 
 in the jieighborho?)d of the out-posts. 
 
 33. When the advanced posts cover an advanced-guard, 
 the commanding officer of the "whole should take a posi- 
 tion, with his artillery andthe main body of his command, 
 at some central point, in the rear of the pickets, .in order 
 to be read}^ to support them if hard pressed by-the ene- 
 my.. The choice of this position is an object of the great- 
 est importance, as the safety of the advanced-posts, as well 
 as that of the main body, may depend upon the degree of 
 judgment shown in this selection. . - 
 
 34. So soo» as the advanced-posts have taken up thoir 
 stations, instructions shpuld be given to the officers of the 
 different. posts, with respect to the points upon which they 
 are to fall back, in case of bpi-ng forced in, the.Unes of 
 communication they must retire by, and the position they 
 must take up, in joining thj .supports to which they re- 
 spertiv^Ir belnn£'. 
 
, oc!»F(.i^r AN» FicKBT OL rr. ?5l 
 
 DUTIES OF OFFICER COMMANDIXG AN OUT-POST. 
 
 35. An officer in coinniand of any of the out-poat3 must 
 be capable of untirinu; vip^ilance aud activity, to perform 
 the various duties which devolve upon him. lie should bo 
 provided with a ifood map of the country, a telescope, and 
 writing niatoiialf. 
 
 36. lie will thoroucjhly .reconnoitre th* ground upon 
 which be is to dispose his command, and also as far in ad- 
 vance as circumstances will admit, questioning closely 
 any inhabitant he may lind. After taking up his position, 
 he should go forward, with the half of his command, and 
 post each sentinel himself. If, however, he relieves an- 
 other in the command, awd deems it advi>;able to make any 
 changes in the d spositions of his predecessors, he should 
 promptly report the facts to the commanding officer in his 
 roar. 
 
 37. When the officer finds that the enemy is not III his 
 immediate neighborhood, he should endeavor to feel his 
 way cautiously towards him by patrols ; and when in im- 
 mediate presence, he should omit no means to watch the 
 cnemj^'s movements, and from the occurrences of the mo- 
 ment, such as noises, the motion of clouds of dust, camp 
 tires, conflagrations, <fec., endeavor to divine what is pass- 
 ing in his camp, and his probable intentions. 
 
 38. Accurate written reports should be promptly sent to 
 the officer in command, in the rear, on all these points. 
 The reports should be legihly written, and should clearly 
 but concisely state what has fallen under the officer's eye, 
 Tvhat he has learned from others, and the character of the 
 soui'Ces from ^'hicb hi;- iuf'^'i raation i? drann. 
 
252 •rr-posT and picket putt. 
 
 39. Ho will particularly see that no comaiuuication with 
 the enemy be allowed, and that no flag be permitted to 
 pass the line of post, without orders from the rear. 
 
 40. The post under the officer's command, whether horse 
 or foot, should not all be allowed to sleep or eat at once. 
 The horses, when watered, should be taken singly or by 
 pairs, and always mounted. At night, one half of the 
 command should be under z^rms, prepared for an attack, 
 the other seated, their arms and the bridles of thtir horses 
 in hand. The men should never be permitted to occupy a 
 house ; and if the weather is such that a fire out of doors 
 is indispensable, it should be as much concealed as practi- 
 cable; one-half only being allowed to sit near it, the oth- 
 er posted, at a convenient spot at hand, to fall on the ene- 
 my should he attempt a stroke. 
 
 41. When the position taken up is to be held for some 
 time, it will be well to change the locality of the posts oc- 
 ca^nally ; this should be done, particularly at night, in a 
 hilly district, changing the post from the brow of the hill, 
 where the men can best keep a look-oat by day, to the low 
 ground at night, as more favorable to detect any move- 
 ment above. 
 
 42. The out-posts are usually relieved at day break, as 
 being the most favorable moment for the enemy to attempt 
 a surprise ; the new guard will serve to reinforce the old. 
 For the same reasen, the old guard should not be suffered 
 t9 retire before the patrols come in, and report all safe. 
 
 43. As a general rule, no post should ever retire before 
 an inferior force ; and, if attacked by one superior to it, 
 resistance should be cautiously made with a view solely to 
 give time to the graud-guard to be in readiness to receive 
 
OUT-rOST AND PICKF.l DLTT. 253- 
 
 tlic enemy. When it is aeon that the mov.oicnt of the en- 
 vmy is serious, the officer should dravr fn his sentinels as 
 ekirmishers, and retire upon the grand guard ; the latter 
 will usually be divided into two divisions, one of which' 
 will be sent to take up a position to the rear, to cover the 
 retreat ; the other will act as a support to the line of skir- 
 mishers, 80 as to feel the enemj. In all cases of retiring, 
 whether of sentinels upon their posts, or of posts upon 
 their supports, care should be taken to assume a directiom 
 towards the flank of the force in rear, so as to unmask its 
 front and not impede any forward movement it may make, 
 if necessary. 
 
 44. The degree of resistance to be offered by the pick- 
 ets will depend on the object to be obtained, and the im- 
 portance of the point occupied. They should not retire 
 until they have received the whole of their grand-guards, 
 out-posts and patrols. 
 
 15. At night the pfecautions should be neeessarily re- 
 doubled, and every movement bo made with extreme cau- 
 tion. Whenever any noise is heard in the direction of a 
 ncntinel's post, the officer should proceed, with a part of 
 his command, in its direction, to ascertain the cause of it. 
 If he finds that it arises from an onward movement of the 
 enemy, he should only fall back upon his grand-guard 
 when he sees that resistance would be unavailing ; retiring 
 slowly and cautiously, and taking every advantage, which 
 the ground offers, t© check the enemy's advance. Should 
 the enemy fall suddenly upon his commmand, he must en- 
 deavor to cut his way through, and reach his position in 
 the rear by the best circuit he can find. 
 
251 OUl-Pum AND ri<REl Pt IT. 
 
 ADVANCED-GUAKDhi. 
 
 46, Jloasuic^ of precaution, lor a. force in po.ntioii, at ^ 
 
 far more easily arranp;cd than for ono in moUcn. At .< 
 
 halt of som«' <Uys, but alight chanffca in the first di.ipo.-*; 
 
 tiony, arisinj!^ fi<nn u metro thorough knowledge of tli' 
 
 «jround taken up, will be requisite ; on a march the bccn 
 
 is continually shifling, and the enemy may lall on just ;r 
 
 that point or under those circumstances in which we ai 
 
 least prepared to meet him. Hence a necessity for doul 
 
 ling the ordinary precautions on a march, and keeping tli 
 
 troops more in hand, so as to be, at all moments, prepar< 
 
 for anv emercrenrv. 
 t * 
 
 47. The £{iirit of the dispositions ia th«* i<ame in bod' 
 
 cases : changes in the details, so tm to adopt our force to 
 (he changing features of the ground passed over, present 
 the real didiculty. On a march, we may hare to guard 
 against an aitack on the head of the column, on either 
 flank, or both, and in the loar. "Hence a necessary disposi- 
 tion of movable advanced-posts, in each of these direc- 
 tions, keeping pace with the progress of the main body, 
 and far enough from it to give it timely warning of a throal- 
 eucd attack. 
 
RECONNOISSANCES. 
 
 -is. Tiic'ic are no more iraportaut duties wluch an officer 
 may be calletlnpon to perform than those of coUocting and 
 an an5,hig the information upon which cither the general 
 or daily operations of a campaign must be based. For the 
 proper performance of the former, acquirements of a very* 
 l»igh order, in the departments of gcograjjhy. and statistics, 
 are indi><pensabli> requisites, to which must be added a u>in- 
 Ute acquaintance Avith topography, and a good coup d'ctil 
 militairc for that of the latter. 
 
 40. However detailed and perfect may be a 'map, it can 
 'never convey all the information that will enable an ofll- 
 cer to plan even an ordinary march .with safety, etill less 
 operations that necessarily depend for their success upon 
 a far greater number of contingencies. To supply these 
 deficiencies of maps, an examination of the ground must 
 be made liy the eye, and verbal information bo gained, on 
 all the points connected with the operation over this 
 ground. This examination and collection of facts is term- 
 ed a Jiecoiuiois-^aucc. 
 
 fiO. From the services demanded of a reconnoitering of- 
 fiC3r, it i?, in the first place, evident that lie should po.sscss 
 acquirements of no ordinary character, bnt in addition to 
 ^ tbeeo, h«-' shonid l^e <rifted bv nntui-o with certain ti.'iitp, 
 
 \ 
 
2S6 EBC0XK§ie9i'4C!E^' 
 
 without which his acquisitions would be of little account in 
 the discharge of the responsible duty in question. 
 
 51. With clear and specific information before him, one- 
 half of a general's difficulties in planning his measures, are 
 dissipated. In a letter from Gen. Washington to Major 
 Tallmadgc, now to be seen framed in the office of the Com- 
 missary-General of Xew York, he remarks, in relation to 
 reports made to him on a certain occasion : " But these 
 thitjgs not being delivered with certainty, rather perplex 
 thkn form the judgment." It is in truth this feeling of 
 certainty that constitutes all the difierence ; having it, the 
 general makes his dispositions with roiiffdence ; without it, 
 he acts hesitatingly, and thus ccmmUnlcates to others that 
 want of confidence felt in his oWn mind. 
 
 62. A-n officer then, selected for the duty in question, 
 should be known to te cool-headed and tntihful — one wlii; 
 sees things as they Are, and telle clearly and precisely whM 
 he-bass^en. In making his report, whetlier verbaluj or 
 in writing, the officer should study conciseness and' preei- 
 sioa of language. He must carefully separate what he- 
 knows from his own observation, from that which he hafl: 
 learned from others, and add all the Qircumstanpes- oit 
 place and time with accuracy. 
 
 DUTIES OF REC0NN0I1?ER:I"NG OFFI'GER. 
 
 hii. The first thing to be drme by an officep selected for 
 a reconnoispanee, is to ascertain precisely. ihc duty required 
 of him ; and what further should be done in case of cer- 
 tain contingencies that may, from the nature of the duty, 
 bp naturally looke'Jifor. lui tihe oeiiOwraanof* of tlu' diitVj^ 
 
RECONNOISSAKOES. 257 
 
 assigned him, and in making his report, the "officer should 
 keep always in mind the specific character of his mission, 
 as his guide in both points. 
 
 64. As the need of a recounoissauce supposes a deficien- 
 cy in information upon the features of the country, the of- 
 ficer detailed to make one should provide himself with 
 maps, a good telescope, such simple aids for judging of 
 distances, and ascertaining the relative positions of objects, 
 as he can himself readily make ; writing materials ; one or 
 more good guides ; and gain all the knowledge he can, 
 from the inhabitants at hand, bearing upon his mission. 
 
 55. The talent of judging of distances, and of the con- 
 nection between the various features of a country within 
 the field of vision, is partly a natural and partly an ac- 
 quired one. Some individuals can never be brought to 
 have any confidence in their own judgment on these points ; 
 others have a natural aptitude for them, which requires 
 but little practice for their perfect development. The 
 powers of the eye vary so greatly among civilized per- 
 sons, that no general rules can be laid down as a guide for 
 the matter in question. Among uncivilized herdes, used 
 to a roaming life, there are found standards which are 
 well understood by all ; the Arab, for instance, calling 
 that distance a mile, at which a man is no longer distin- 
 guishable from a woman— growing out of their habits. 
 
 5G. The first thing, then, to be done by an ofilcer in ac- 
 quiring the cox(2) cVciil militaire, is to learn, both from 
 books and on the field, what space is taken up by a battal- 
 ion and its intervals,by a squadron and by a battery when in 
 order of battle ; how much when in column of march ; 
 and the average time required for certain movements, un- 
 
 9 
 
der given circumstances of the ground. Thi3 acquire- 
 ment he may make by adopting some standard of his own, 
 his ordinary pace, and that of a horse, serving for comput- 
 ing time and distance reciprocally. The next step is to 
 acquire the habit of estimating, by the appearances of 
 these different objects, from various points of view, how 
 far off they are. This must be done practically. A very 
 simple aid to it is the following : Upon the stem of a lead 
 pencil, cut square, and held out at a uniform arm's length 
 from the eyo, by means of a thread attached to it and fas- 
 tened to the top button-hole, let the officer mark off, on 
 one of the edges, the length seen on it by holding the pen- 
 cil upright between the eye and a man placed successively 
 at different distances from it, as 100, 150—1000 yards. 
 This will gi"^e one rough standard for practice. Another 
 may bo made by first ascertaining the average height of 
 certain cultivated trees, as the apple, &c. 
 
 57. For getting relative positions, a contrivance for 
 measuring angles roughl}^ must be used. This is done by 
 first folding a leaf of paper across, and then doubling it 
 along the folded edge, as if to divide it into four equal 
 parts. The angle between the edge of the first fold and 
 that of the second, will be a tolerably accurate right-an- 
 gle. Now, by cutting off carefully along the fold one of 
 the pieces, we obtain a quadrant, or 90° ; then folding 
 this at the angle, so that the two edges will exactly coin- 
 cide, we get the half of a quadrant, or 45° ; and so on, by 
 successive bisections we can mark off smaller angles. Then 
 making a pen or pencil- mark along each of the folds, and 
 numbering the angles successively from to 90°, we have 
 a rougli j».'V)^/Trr/or, that can be uspd both for measuring 
 
KECUN N UlSS.S N e l-x. 2i0 
 
 «ngIos and setting them off on a s-kctch. To measure ver- 
 tical angles, a thread with a light plummet, must be at- 
 tached to the angular point. If the object is above the 
 horizon of the eye, we hold the proti actor triih the anjxi- 
 lar point from the <^ye, &o that the plumb-line will fall along 
 the face of the paper, just touching it; then directing the 
 tep edge of the protractor on the object, so that it is juFt 
 seen bj the eve, sighting along the edge, the angle formed 
 between the plumb-line and the other edge, will be the 
 .same as the angle between the line of sight and the hori- 
 zon of the eye. 
 
 58. If the object is below the horizon of the eye, the an- 
 gular point !•? ^^/f/cer^ /ocarc/^ //tr; eye', the same scried of 
 operations will give the ar.r^lc below the eye's horizon, 
 
 GUIDE?. 
 
 59. Trustworthy guides are invaluable, but most rare, 
 in an enemy's country. The best, from the information 
 they acquire by their habits of life, are to be found among 
 those classes whose avocations keep them much abroad, 
 going from place to place within a certain sphere con- 
 stantly — such as common carriers, hunters, smugglers, 
 kc. Among the first things to be attended to by an offi- 
 cer, in taking post at any point, is to find out persons of 
 this class, and to ascertain their whereabout when want- 
 ed. Kind treatment, doucciira, and promises, should not 
 be spared, to enlist either their good will or their inter- 
 ests ; and, if policy requires it, they may openly be treat- 
 ed with apparent harfchncs?, to screen them from odiuia 
 among their neiuhbory. 
 
260 RECONNOISSANSES. 
 
 60. If none of this class can bo found, then resort must 
 bo had to a liigjher — local authorities being in preference 
 selected — and if necessary, forced to act. Here rery care- 
 ful treatment is requisite. When the necessity of the case 
 is admitted by thorn, much may be gleaned by kindness, 
 courtesy, and a certain deference, from such persons, that 
 cannot be looked for from their inferiors. 
 
 61. Before starting on his mission, the officer should 
 question his guide thoroughly ; and if he has several, 
 question each apart ; like precautions should be taken with 
 respect to other inhabitants. Care must be had to find 
 out the usual beats of one taken as a guide, so as not to 
 take him out of his own neighborhood. In all cases, the 
 guide must be well watched, however trustworthy he may 
 seem. If unwilling or sulky, he must if needs be, be tied, 
 and attached to a strong man, with a rope round his mid- 
 dle ; being first strictly searched for any cutting instrument 
 about him. 
 
 62. Should there be but one guide, he must necessarily 
 be placed with the most advanced portion of the detach- 
 ment accompanying the oflicer. If there are several, one 
 must be there also ; the one apparently the most intelli- 
 gent with the officer, who should ply him with questions, 
 and the others in the rear strictly guarded. 
 
 63. It may be well to remark, that guides are useful 
 even in a country of easy communications ; as in case of 
 a rencontre, they may point out bye-ways convenient for 
 retreat, if necessary. 
 
REGONNOISSANCKS. 261 
 
 RECONNOISSANCE. 
 
 6'1. To designate all the objects to be embraced in a re- 
 connoisance, would lead farther than the limits of this lit- 
 tle woi'k will allow ; some general heads, which will serve 
 as guides in all cases, wall therefore be alone noticed. 
 
 65. A general view of the ground to be examined must 
 first be taken in, so as to obtain some notion of the forms 
 of the parts, their connection and relations to each other, 
 before going into a detailed examination. To one posess- 
 cd of some topographical knowledge, this study of what 
 is before him will not demand much time. A level country 
 for example, he knows is usually well cultivated, and 
 therefore has plenty of hedges, ditches, &c., which lend 
 themselves w^elllto affairs of light troops, may be not a 
 little inconvenient to manoeuvres of artillery, and fre- 
 quently bring up cavalry very nnexpcctedly in full career. 
 In a mountainous one, dangerous passes, narrow roads, 
 torrents with rough beds, ugly sudden turns, &c., will ne- 
 cessarily be met with. Each and all these demand a par- 
 ticular examination, and in his report their advantages 
 and ilisadvantages should be clearly pointed out by the 
 officer. 
 
 66. If the reconnoissance is for an onward movement, 
 the distances from halt to halt, as well as all others, should 
 be estimated in hours of march ; the nature of the roads, 
 and the obstacles along them be carefully detailed ; the 
 means that may be gathered along the line to facilitate the 
 movement, as vehicles, men and materials for removing 
 obstacles, &c. The points where cross-roads are found, 
 
EECOMsOlSSANCES 
 
 must be specified ; the direction of tbese roads, their 
 uses, &G. 
 
 67. All local objects aloug the line, as villages, farm- 
 houses, &c., should be carefully designated, both as to 
 their position on the line, or on either side of it ; and also 
 as to their form, and color, Ac, as -'square white houge 
 on the right," "round gray stone tower on hill to left.'' 
 
 68. The names of localities, in the way in which tht in- 
 habitants pronounce them, sliould be carefully written, 
 and called over several times, so as to be sure to get them 
 as nearly as practicable right in sound ; then the names, 
 as written by an intelligent inhabitant, should be added. 
 
 69. All halting points must be well looked to ; their 
 military capabilities in case of attack, as well as their re- 
 sources for accommodating the troops, be thoroughly gone 
 into. 
 
 TO. If the halt is to take position for some time, to 
 await or watch the enemy, then more care must be taken, 
 the whole site be well studied as to its fulfilling the pro- 
 posed end ; the points of support on the flanks be desig- 
 nated, as well as others in front and rear, that may re- 
 quire to be occupied ; the suitable localities to be chosen 
 for parks, hospital, &c ; the communications to be opened 
 or repaired, pointed out ; and all the facilities either for 
 an advance or a retrograde movement to be laid down. 
 
 ARMED RECONXOISSANCE. 
 
 71. Reconnoissanees, made in the neighborhood of an 
 enemy, require to be done under the protection of a prop- 
 er detachment, the strength and composition of which 
 
 TV ill depend ou the object to be attainod. 
 
f. ^:^•3^o^»^A.•<f•Ji^. 'i('>3 
 
 12. If the object be to gain secretly a knowledt^e of the 
 enemy's whereabout and strength, then a detachment of 
 light cavalry, conducted by a trusty guide, through cir- 
 cuitous bye-ways, and moving with celerity, but with 
 proper precautions against falling into an ambush, or hav- 
 ing his retreat cut off, is usually resorted to. The detail? 
 for this will be found under the head of Patrols. 
 
 73. When an enemy's position is to ba recoflnoitcred, 
 with a view to force him to show his hand, by causing 
 him to call out all his troops, then a large detachment of 
 all arms, adequate to the task of pressing the enemy vig- 
 orously, and also of withdrawing with safety when press- 
 ed in turn, must be thrown forward. 
 
 74. Under the shelter of either of these forces, the ofli- 
 cer charged with the reconnoissance, takes the best mo- 
 ment, and best point of view, for cirefullv ascertaining 
 the dispositions made by the enemy. A good time will 
 be at early dawn, when troops, in most servicea, are all 
 made to stand to their arms. The points which the ofli- 
 cer must exhibit most attention in finding out, are those 
 occupied by the batteries, and nil those in any way in- 
 trenched. 
 
 TATROLS. 
 
 75. Patrols are of two classes, from the different objocta 
 had in view. The first are those made with a view of in- 
 sui iug greater security from the enemy's attempts to pass, 
 or force the line of out-posts, and may therefore be term- 
 ed drfensive patrols. They consist usually of three or 
 i\n\r m.^n, who go the rounds, along the cliain of Pftritin*^U 
 
264 RBCONNOISSANCES, 
 
 and bet\reen the posts ; seldom venturing farther than a 
 few hundred paces beyond the sentinel's chain ; the object 
 being to search points which might present a cover to the 
 enemy's scouts, and to keep the sentinels on the alert. 
 
 76. The second class are those made exterior to the line 
 of out-posts, with a view of gaining intelligence cf the 
 enemy's whereabout, and may therefore be termed offen- 
 sive 2^ atrols. They are composed of larger bodies of men 
 than the first class, the number being proportioned both 
 to the distance to be gone over, and the extent of front to 
 be examined. In a position, presenting but few cross- 
 roads, and sparsely settled, a patrol of ten or twenty 
 horsemen, may be found ample, to search with all desirable 
 thoroughness, from twenty to forty miles in advance of 
 the position, along the principal avenues to it ; whereas, 
 with a more extended front, presenting many lateral ave- 
 nues, double this number might be required for the same 
 duty. From the information obtained, through the ordi- 
 nary channels of maps, and by questioning the inhabitants 
 at hand, the commanding officer can usually settle, with 
 sufficient accuracy, the strength of a patrol. 
 
 77. From the duties to be performed by patrols, cavalry 
 are usually employed alone ; in cases of very broken 
 country, infantry mjiy be necessary, but they should al- 
 ways be accompanied b}'^ some horse, if for no other pur- 
 pose than to transmit intelligence promptly to the rear. 
 
 78. The main duties of a patrol are to find the enem}^ if 
 in the neighborhood, gain a good idea of his position and 
 strength, to make out his movements, and to bring in an 
 accurate account of his distance from the out-posts of their 
 own force, and the character of the ground between the 
 position occupied by the respective forces. 
 
liECoNMU.SSANCEc. Ibr^ 
 
 79. From the nature of these duties, it i^s OTident that 
 both officers and men, for a patrol, should be selected with 
 especial reference to their activity, intelligence, and the 
 aptitude thej may possess, from previous habits of life, 
 for a service requiring a union of courage, prudence, and 
 discriminating observation — usually to be met with only 
 in individuals who have been thrown very much upon their 
 own resources. When the character of the country ad- 
 mits of it, the employment of such individuals, singl^^, or 
 in very small bodies, as scouts, is one of the most availa- 
 ble means of gaining intelligence of an enemy, without 
 betraying the secret of our own w^hereabout. 
 
 DUTIES OF OFFICER IN COMMAND OF A PATROL. 
 
 80. In conducting a patrol, the commanding officer 
 should provide himself with a good map, telescope, and 
 guides, and gain all the information ho can before start- 
 ing, by questioning persons in the neighborhood. Noth- 
 ing should escape his eye along bis line of search, and ho 
 should particularly note points which might be favorable 
 to his defence, if driven back by the tnem}', or by which 
 his retreat might be endangered. 
 
 81. The order of march of the patrol will be regulated 
 by the circumstances of its strength, kind of troops em- 
 ployed, the character of the country passed over, the hour 
 of the day, and the particular object in view. The intelli- 
 gence and judgment of the officer in command will have 
 sulficiont exercise on these points, as he will be continual- 
 ly called upon to vary his dispositions. The general and 
 obvious rule of keeping a look-out on all sides, will prompt 
 
'J66 Kk,CO^.>'Jl:y8A.NLllS. 
 
 the general disposition of .an advanced-guard, rear-guard, 
 and flankers, according to the circumstances of the case, 
 however small his coniraand. The sole object being to car- 
 ry back intelligence of the enemy, no precaution should 
 be omitted to cover and secure his line of march, without 
 making, however, too great a subdivision of his force. 
 
 82. Too much circumspection cannot be shown in ap- 
 proaching points favorable to ambuscades, as woods, ra- 
 vines, defiles, inclosures, fiirm-houses, villag?s, &o. The 
 main body should ahvaj'-s be halted, in a good position be- 
 yond musket-shot, or where cover can be obtained, whilst 
 a few men proceed cautiously forward, following at some 
 distance in the rear of, but never losing sight of each oth- 
 ^r, to examine the suspected spot. If the officer deem it 
 Deccssary, at any point, to detach from his command 
 smaller patrols, to examine points at some distance on his 
 flanks, he should halt the rest at the point where they 
 separate, until the detachments como in and report; or 
 if he decides to move forward, he should leave three or 
 four men at the spot, to convey intelligence promptly 
 to the rear, if anything is discovered, ns well as to him- 
 self. 
 
 83. It may frequently be found that some eminence on 
 the flanks ma}' present a good view of the surrounding 
 country, in which case, if it be decided to use it, two or 
 three men ought to be detached for the purpose, with or- 
 ders to keep in sight of each other, but far enough apart 
 to guard against a surprise of the whole. 
 
 8-i. When the officer finds himself in the presence of 
 the enemy, he should halt his command at a convenient 
 spot, wher^ ihpy will be screened from the eii^mr's rievr, 
 
and having made his dispositions agaicsi a surprise, he 
 will proceed with a few picked men to the most favorable 
 point from which he can obtain a good look-out, to recon- 
 noitre the position occupied, and the other points of inter 
 est. If he deem it advisable to keep his position, or change 
 it for some other point more favorable, he will first trans- 
 mit a report to the rear of what he ha? observed. 
 
 85. When tlte patrol moves bv night, the ordinary pre- 
 cautions must be redoubled. Signals must be agreed up- 
 on to avoid danger, should any of the party become sepa- 
 rated from the main body. Careful attention must bo 
 given to every thing passing around, as the barking of 
 dogs, noises, fires, &c. On approaching any inhabited 
 spot, the command should be brought to a halt, whilst a 
 few picked men move noiselessly forward, and if practica- 
 ble, by stealing up to the windows, learn the character of 
 the inmates. 
 
 86. It cannot b.* too strongly impressed upon the mind 
 of the officer in command of a patrol, that he must be all 
 ears and eyes j that he will be called upon in turn, to exer 
 else great boldness, caution, presence of mind and good 
 judgment, in accomplishing a mission where the enemy 
 must be seen but not encountered ; and such roads and 
 halting points be selected, both in moving forward and re- 
 turning, as shall be most favorable to his movements, and 
 least liable to expose him to surprise, or a disadvantage- 
 ous collision with the euemv. 
 
SURPRISES AND AMBUSCADES. 
 
 87. These two classes of operations depend for their suc- 
 cess upon the same point — that of being able to attack the 
 enemy suddenly when he is not prepared to resist. The 
 term siuyrise is applied to unexpected attacks upon an 
 enemy's position ; that of ambuscade, where a position is 
 taken for the purpose of falling suddenly upon the enemy 
 when he reaches it. Secrecy, good troops, and a thorough 
 knowledge of the localities, are indispensable to the suc- 
 cess of either of these operations. 
 
 SURPRISE. 
 
 88. In planning a surprise, the officer must spare no 
 pains in ascertaining the fact of the country leading to, 
 and in the immediate vicinity of the enemy's position, the 
 character and disposition of his troops, and the state of 
 preparation of the defenses of the position. Information 
 may be obtained on the points from the spies, deserters, 
 inhabitants of the locality occupied by the enemy, good 
 maps, &c. 
 
 89. The troops to be employed in the expedition, as well 
 as the other necessary arrangements, will depend upon the 
 information gained on these points. If the position be an 
 intrenched one, infantry will constitute the main force ; 
 
glRrniSF.S AN'U AMBUSCADES. 269 
 
 cavalry and artillery can be of little other use than to 
 cover the retreat of the infantry, and to make pris- 
 oners of those who may escape from the position.— 
 A body of engineer troops or of picked men used to hand- 
 ling tools, will accompany the infantry, carrying with 
 them such implements as may be requisite from th« char- 
 acter of the defenses, as axes, saws, crowbars, email scal- 
 ing ladders, &c. 
 
 90. If the position be not intrenched, as an open village, 
 &c., cavalry may perform a very important part, by a 
 sudden dash among the enemy, in creating confusion and 
 alarm. 
 
 91. As the success of the affair will greatly depend upon 
 the secreey with which these preparations are made, and 
 the celerity with which it is conducted, all orders for col- 
 lecting the necessary implements and assembling the 
 troops, should be given at the shortefet notice ; no more 
 troops should be taken than are indispensably necessary, 
 and they should cary nothing with them but their arms, 
 and the requisite amount of ammunition. 
 
 92. Midnight is the best hour for small bodies of trooj^a 
 to carry out such enterprise, as they must effect all they 
 desire to do and be off before day break. A few hours before 
 daylight is the best time for large expeditions, as the 
 dawn of day will be favorable to their retreat by which 
 time they will have been able to effect their purposes. 
 The season of the year and the state of the weather should 
 be taken advantage of. Winter and bad weather are most 
 favorable, as the enemy's sentinels and out-posts will then, 
 in all probability, be less on the alert, and more disposed 
 'o keep under such shelter as they can procure. 
 
 \ 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
270 SCIirillSES and AMIirscADKS. 
 
 93. As our purpose may be divined by the enemy, meas- 
 ures should bo taken against such a contingency. These 
 will mainly consist in securing by detachments all defiles 
 and roads by which our retreat might be cut off, and by 
 designating a rallying point, on which our force will i'all 
 back, if repulsed, which should be strongly occupied by 
 cavalry and artillery, if they constitute a part of the force. 
 
 94. In conducting the march, the troops will be kept 
 well together ; the greatest order and silence be observed. 
 Instead of the ordinary precautions of as advanced-guard 
 and Hankers, reliance should rather be placed* upon a few 
 active and iijteUigent scouts, to gain timel}^ notice of any 
 movement on the part of the enemy. 
 
 95. Concerted attacks upon several points are good 
 means of creating confusion and paralyzing the enemy's 
 efforts, when they can be successfully carried out; but, 
 a.i they may req^uirc some of the detachments to make con- 
 siderable circuits to reach their points, much will depend 
 upon chance as to their success. In such cases, some sig- 
 nal must be agreed upon, to let the detachments, already 
 in position, know when those which are likeliest to reach 
 theirs latest, are ready ; but this may have the inconve- 
 nience of giving the alarm ta the enemy. Rockets may 
 be used for this purpose, and also to give notice to the 
 troops to retire together, 
 
 9o. Tiie retroat after a successful issue, should be con- 
 ducted with the same promptitude as the advance. Time 
 must not be lost in waiting too long for all the detach- 
 ments to coine in at the rallying point, as the safety of the 
 wfii>l(> command misrht bo comptonrii-'pil. 
 
SX lirKl.SK.S A.N» AMliVtfiAl'K*.. -271 
 
 AMBUSCADE. 
 
 07. In planning an ambuscade, we should be well ac- 
 quainted with the enemj-'s force, and the state of disci- 
 pline shown hy it. The position chosen for the attempt, 
 must be favorable to the concealment of troops, and if 
 practicable, it should be reached by night, every precau- 
 ti®n beiii'i; thken to insure secrecy. The best positions are 
 those where the enemy is incioscd by a defile, or villacce- 
 and has not taken the proper precautions to secure him 
 t<clf from an attack. By seizing the outlets of the defile 
 by infcintry, in such cases, and making an impetuous 
 charge of cavalry into it, the enemy inny be completely 
 routed. 
 
 1)8. Ambuscades may frequently bo attempted with suc- 
 cess in the aflairs of the advanced and rear-guards, bv 
 pushing the enem.y vigorously and then falling back, if 
 he ofiers a trong resistance, Eo as to draw him upon a 
 point where stroops are posted in force to receive him. 
 
 on. To trace anything more than a mere outline, ai a 
 guide in operations of this kind, which depend upon so 
 many fortuitous circumstances, would serve but little use- 
 ful purpose. Au active, intelligent ofFicor, with an imagi- 
 nation fertile in the expedients of his pi't.fession, will sel- 
 dom be at a loss as to his best course when the occasion 
 offers ; to one without these qualities, opportunities prfr- 
 scnt themselves in vain. 
 
KEGlJiATIONS AS TO INSPECTIONS, PARADE, 
 ETC., ETC. 
 
 PART SEVENTH. 
 
 FORM OF INSPECTION. 
 
 1. The inspection of troops, not less than a company, will 
 generally be preceded by a review. The present example 
 embraces a battalion. 
 
 2. The inspecting^ officer and the field and staff officers 
 will be on foot. The battalion being in the order of battle 
 the colonel will cause it to break into open column of com- 
 panies, right in front. He will next order the ranks to be 
 opened ; when the color-rank and color-guard, under the 
 direction of the adjutant, will take post ten paces in front, 
 and the band ten paces in rear of the column. The colonel 
 seeing the ranks aligned, will then command : 
 
 1, Officers and Sergeants to the front of your Companies. 
 2. March. 
 
 3. The officers will form themselve in one rank, eigt' 
 paces, and the non-commissioned officers in one rank, * 
 paces iu advance, along the whole fronts of their r"^*^"*" 
 
IXSPECTICN. 273 
 
 tivc companies, from right to loft in the order of seniority; 
 the pioneers and music of each company, in one rank, two 
 paces behind the non-commissioned officers. The colonel 
 will then command : 
 
 1. Field and Staff to the front. 2. Maroh. 
 
 4. The commissioned olRccrs thus designated, will form 
 themselves in one rank, on a line equal to the front of the 
 column, six paces in front of the colors from righ to left 
 in the order of seniority : and the non-commissioned staff, 
 in a similar manner, two paces in rear of the preceding- 
 rank. The colonel seeing the movement executed, will 
 take post on the right of the lieutenant colonel, and wait 
 the approach of the inspecting officer. But such of the 
 field officers as may be superior in rank to the inspector, 
 will not take post in front of the battalion. 
 
 5. The inspector will commence in front. After in- 
 specting the dress and general appearance of the field and 
 commissioned staif under arms, the inspector, accompan- 
 ied by these officers, will pass down the open column, 
 looking at every rank in front and rear. 
 
 G. The colonel will now command. 1. OrcZcr— Amis. 2. 
 Rest ; when the inspector will proceed to make a minute 
 inspection of the several ranks or divisions, commencing 
 in front. 
 
 7. As the inspector approaches the non-commissioned 
 staff, color-rank, the color-guard and the band, the adju- 
 tant will give the necessary orders for the inspection of 
 arms, boxes and knapsacks. The colors will be planted 
 firm in the ground to enable the color-bearers to display 
 the contents of their knapsacks. The nun-commissioned 
 
J (4 l^irLL'Ily^. 
 
 stalFmay be diamisicd as? soon as inspected, but the color- 
 rank and color-guard will remain imtil the colors are to 
 be escorted to the place from which they were taken. As 
 the inspector successively approaches the eonipanies, the 
 captains wii! command : 
 
 1. Attcntien. 2. Conipniiy. 3. In^peciion — Akjss, 
 
 8. The inspecting officers will then go through tha 
 whole company, and minutely inspect the arms, accoutrc- 
 raeuts and dresoofeach soldier. After this is done the 
 captain will command: 0/>cn— Boxes ; when the amron- 
 iiition and boxes will be examined. He will then com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Shouhlcr — Arms. '_'. Clone- OnL'T. 3. Marpk. \. OrJcn' 
 — Arm:>. 5. Stack — ARMy- <j. To the rear open order. 
 7. Map. cit. 8. Front rank, About — Face, 5. Z'neliiV] 
 JCnupsack'. 10. Open Knup>sacl:8, 
 
 ^. The sergeants will face inward at the second com- 
 -inand, and close upon the centre at the 3rd, and at the oth 
 command st nek their armsi at the 6th they M"ill face 
 ■r.utward, and at the 7lh resurae their position. When the 
 ranks are closed, preparatory to iahe armi, the serg■eant^< 
 will also close upon the centre, and at the word, take their 
 iirms and re>uino their position. 
 
 10. The knapsacks will be placed at the feet of the men, 
 the flaps from tliem, with the gi'cat coats on the flaps, and 
 knapsacks leaning on the great coats. In this pojition 
 the inspector will examine their contents or so many of them 
 as he may think necessary, commencing with the r.nn cr.m- 
 s'iiiisioae^l otVirerf. tko men gf.'indinc;' at sttrntion, VrinHi 
 
the iKspector La; pa3sed through the companj, the cap 
 tain will comiT^and : Repack Knajy^achs^ when each sol- 
 dier win repack and buckle up his knapsack, leaving it 
 on the ground, the nuuihrr upwards turneJ from hiin, 
 and then ptanJ at rest. Tlte captain will tlien command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Sling Knap.=iack8. i. 
 Front rank, Anoi'T Face. 5. Clone Ortltr. C. March. 
 7. JaA'e— Akms. 8. .^Aow/c/^r— Arms. 0, OjUrfrs anJ 
 Sergeants 10 your 2>OHt9. 10. March. 
 
 11. At the works7tW7 of the *rd command, each soldier 
 will take his knapsack, holding it by the inner Flraps, and 
 Etand erect; at tlvc la^-t word, he will replace it on his 
 back. At the 10th command, the company will fde off to 
 their tents or quarters, except the company that is to re- 
 escort the colcr?, which will await tb« further order? cf 
 the coloneh 
 
 FOllMS OF PARADE. 
 
 12. ThcJ *jzample3 here given embrace a battaliun of in- 
 fantry. A single company will parnde as if it wore with- 
 the h.att.'ilion, 
 
 I. DRESS PAR A in:, 
 
 13. At the hour appointed, on thoFigna! of the adjutant 
 the captain.s will march their companies to the parade- 
 ground, where they take their position.? in the order of 
 battlff. When the line is formed, the captain o^' the lirst 
 company, on notice fiom the adjutant, ftcpn one pace to 
 the front and gives to hia company the coiiminnd : Order — 
 4rm : • l*i^,io<h — Kvsr • which i^ rr-peatpd Ur *^n.ch nap- 
 
27C DKESS PARADE. 
 
 tain in succession to the left. The adjutant takes post two 
 paces on the right ©fthe line; the sergeant-major two 
 paces on the left. The music will be formed in two ranks 
 on the right of the adjutant. The senior officer preisent 
 will take the command of the parade, and will take post 
 at a suitable distance in front, opposite the centre, facing 
 the line. 
 
 14. When the companies have ordered arms, the adju- 
 tant will order the music to heat off', when it will commence 
 on the right, beat in front of the line to the left, and back 
 to its place on the right The adjutant will then step two 
 paces to the front, face to the left, and command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Battalion. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 4. Pre- 
 pare to open ranks. 5. To the rear open erder. G.March. 
 
 16. At the sixth command, the ranks will be opened, the 
 commissioned officers (tield and stafi" dismounting) will 
 march to the front, field officers six paces, the company 
 officers four paces, opposite to their position in line of 
 battle, halt and dress. The adjutant seeing the ranks 
 aligned, wall command: Fr8nt, and march along the front 
 to the centre, face to the right, and pass the line of com- 
 pany officers, eight or ten paces, face to the right about 
 and command : 
 
 Present —Anna. 
 
 16. Seeing this executed, he will face about to the com- 
 manding officer, salute and report, "Sii', the parade is 
 formed." The adjutant will then, on intimation to that 
 efiect, take his station three paces on the left of the com- 
 manding officer, one pace retired, passing around bis rear. 
 
DRESS PAUADE. 277 
 
 17. The commanding nfticer, having acknowledged the 
 salute of the line by touching his hat, will, after the adju- 
 tant has taken his post, draw his sword and command. 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Shoulder — Akms, 
 
 and add such exercises as he may think proper, conclud- 
 ing with Order — Arms. He will then return his sword, 
 and direct the adjutant to receive the reports. 
 
 18. The adjutant will now pass around the right of the 
 commanding oflicer, advance upon the lino, halt midway 
 between him and the line of company officers, and com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. First Sergeants to the/rorU and centre, 2. Mar#h. 
 
 19. At the first command, the first sergeants will shoul- 
 der arms, march two paces to the front, and face inward. 
 At the second command, they will march to the centre, 
 and halt. The adjutant will then order : 
 
 1. Front— FxcE. 2. Report. 
 
 20. At the last word, each in succession, beginning o» 
 the right, will salute by bringing the left hand smartly 
 across the breast to the right shoulder, and report the re- 
 sult of the roll-call previously made on the company pa- 
 lade. The adjutant then commands : 
 
 1. First Sergeants, outward—FACE. 2. To your posts — 
 March, 
 
 when they will resume their places and order arms. Tho 
 adjutant will then face to the commanding officer, salute, 
 report absent officers, and give the result of the first ser- 
 
2Ts IiRESS Pa U ADS. 
 
 geants' reports. The commanding officer will then direct 
 the orders to be read, when the adjutant will face about 
 and announce : 
 
 ATTENTION TO ORDERS. 
 
 21. Having read the orders, the adjutant will lace to 
 the commanding officer, salute and report; when, on an 
 intimation from the commander, he will face again to the 
 line and announce : 
 
 PAKAQK IS SISM2SSI2D. 
 
 22. All the officers will now return their swords, face 
 inward, and close on the adjutant, he having taken posi- 
 tion in thetr line, the field officers on the flanks. The ad- 
 jutant commands : 
 
 1. Front — Face.. 2. Forward — March. 
 
 When they will march forward, dressing on the centre, the 
 music playing, and when within six paces of the coai' 
 mander, the adjutant will give the command ? Halt. 
 The offiers will then salute the commanding officer by 
 raising the hand to the cap, and there remain until he 
 ?hall have communicated to them such instructions as he 
 may have to give, or intimates that the ceremony is fin- 
 ished. As the officers disperse, the first sergeants will 
 close the ranks of their respective companies, and march 
 them oti", the band continuing to plaj- until the companies 
 clear the regimental parade ground. 
 
KETIKU. 279 
 
 II. IIEVIEW. 
 
 23. Preparatory to a review, the adjutant will cau^e a 
 camp-color to be placed 80 or 100 paces, or more, in front of, 
 and opposite to, where the centre of the battalion will rest, 
 where the reviowinj^j officer is supposed to take his station ; 
 and although he may choose to quit that position, still the 
 color is to be considered as the point to which all the 
 movements and formations are relative. The adjutant 
 will also cause points to be marked, at suitable distances, 
 for the wheeling\s of the divisions, so that their right flanks, 
 in marching past, shall only be about four paces from the 
 camp-color, or position of the reviewing officer. 
 
 24. The battalion being formed in the order of battle at 
 shouldered arms, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Battalion, pn par cf or review. 2. To th«re<ir,oj)cn order. 
 3. Mauch. 
 
 25. At the word march, the field and staft' officers die- 
 moiint, the company officers and the color-rank advance 
 four paces in front of the first rank, and place themselves 
 opposite to their respective places in the order of battle ; 
 the color-guard replace the color-rank; the stafl'offieer«i 
 place themselves, according to rank, three paces on the 
 right of the rank of the company officers, and one pace 
 from each other ; the music takes post as at dress parade; 
 the non-commissioned stafii" takes post one pace from each 
 other, and three paces on the right of the front rank of 
 the battalion. 
 
 2G. When the ranks arc aligned, the colonel will com- 
 m«'\nd : Fuont : ^ml place hi ni.HelC eight paces, und tl<'< 
 
280 KEVIEW. 
 
 lieutenant-colonel and major will place themselves two 
 paces, in front of the rank of company oflEicers, and oppo- 
 site to their respective places in the order of battle, all 
 facing to the front. 
 
 27. When the reviewing officer presents himself before 
 tlie'centre, and is fifty or sixty paces distant, the colonel 
 will face about and command : 
 
 Present — Arms ; 
 
 and resume his front. The men present arms, and the of- 
 fficers'salute, so as to drop their swords with the last mo- 
 tion of the firelock. The non-commissioned staff" salute 
 by bringing the sword to a ^joise, the hilt resting on the 
 breast, the blade in front of the face, inclining a little out- 
 wards. The music will play, and all the drums beat, ac- 
 cording to the rank of the revieAving officer.* 
 
 28. The reviewing officer having halted and acknowl- 
 edged the salute by touching or raising his cap or hat, the 
 colonel will face about and command : Shoulder — Aums 1 
 when the men shoulder their pieces ; the officers and non- 
 commissioned staff" recover their swords with the last mo- 
 tion, and the colonel faces to the front. 
 
 29. The reviewing officer will then go towards the right, 
 the whole remaining perfectly steady, without paying any 
 further compliment, while he passes along the front of 
 the battalion and proceeds around the left flank, and along 
 
 * If the reviewing officer be junior in rank to the com- 
 mandant of the parade, no compliment will be paid to him, 
 but he will be received with arms carried, and the officers 
 will not salute as the column passes in review. The col- 
 ors salute such persons only as from their rank, and by 
 regulation, arc entitled to that honor. 
 
nKVir.w. 2^1 
 
 the rear of the file closers, to the right. While the re- 
 viewing officer is going round the battalion the band will 
 play, and will cease when he has returned to the right 
 flank. 
 
 30. When the reviewing officer turns off to place him- 
 self b}' the camp-color in front, the colonel will face the 
 line and command : 
 
 1. Close order. 2. Mauch. 
 
 31. At the first command the field and company officers 
 will face to the ri(/ht-eihout ; and at the second command, 
 all persons, except the colonel, wiU resume their places in 
 the order of battle ; the field and staff officers mount. 
 
 32. The reviewing officer having taken his position near 
 the camp-color, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. By Company, riyhl ivhcel. 2. Qwic/c— Marcu. 3. Paaa 
 in revieio. 4. CvUnnn, foricard. 5. Guide right. 6. 
 Maucu. 
 
 33. The battalion, in column of companies, right in 
 front, will then in common time, and at shoxilder arms, 
 bo put in motion ; the colonel four paces in front of the 
 captain of the leading company;, the lieutenant-colonel on 
 a line with the leading company ; the major on a line with 
 the rear company ; the adjutant on a line with the second 
 company ; the sergeant-major on a line with the company 
 next preceeding the rear — each six paces from the flank 
 (left) opposite to the reviewing officer ; the staff officers 
 in one rank, according to order of precedency, from the 
 right, four paces in rear of the column ; the music prece- 
 ded by the principal musician, six paces bofor the colonel, 
 
'1H2 RKVIEVV. 
 
 the pioneers preceded by a coi'poral, four paces before the 
 principal musician ; and the quartermastei'-sergeant two 
 paces from (lie side opposite to the guides, and in line with 
 the pioneers. The guides and soldiers will keep their heads 
 steady to the front in passing in review. 
 
 34. The music Avill begin to play at the command to 
 march, and after passing the reviewing officer, wheel to 
 the left out of the column, and take a position opposite 
 and facing him, and will continue to play until the rear of 
 the column shall have passed him, when it will cease, and 
 follow in the rear of the battalion.* The officers will sa- 
 lute the reviewing officer when the}^ arrive within six pa- 
 ces of him, and recover' their swords when six paces past 
 him. All officers, in saluting, will cast their eyes towards 
 the reviewing officer. The colonel, when he has saluted 
 
 . at the head of the battalion, will place himself near the re- 
 viewing officer, and will remain tkere until the rear has 
 passed, when he will rejoin the battalion. The colors 
 will salute the reviewing officer, if entitled to it, when 
 within six paces to him, and be raised when they have 
 passed by him an equal distance. The color-bearer will 
 remain in ranks while passing and saluting. 
 
 35. The reviewing officer, or personage, will acknowl- 
 edge the salute b_y raising or taking oflf his cap, or hat, 
 when the commander of the troops salutes him ; and also 
 when the colors pass. The rest of the time, occupied by 
 the passage of the troops, he will bo covered. 
 
 36. When the column has passed the reviewing officer, 
 the colonel will direct it to the ground it marched from, 
 
 * That is, unless the battalion is to pa?s in qitich time 
 al?o, in which case it will keep it* poaition. 
 
C.CAKD-MOCMl.NG. 2S5 
 
 and command Guide left, in time for tlie guides to cover. 
 The column having arrived on its ground, the colonel will 
 command : 1. Column. 2. Halt ; from it in order of 
 battle, and cause the ranks to be opened as above directed. 
 The review will t«rmiuate by the whole saluting as at the 
 beginning. '•'•■ 
 
 37. The colonel will afterward cause the troops to per- 
 form such exercises and manceuvres as the reviewing oHi- 
 cer may direct. 
 
 :{8. A number of companies, less than a battalion, will 
 be reviewed as a battalion, and a single company as if it 
 were with the battalion. In the latter case the company 
 may pass in column of platoons. 
 
 ] I r. G UARD-MOUNTING. 
 
 39, At the first call for guard-mounting, the men warn- 
 ed for duty turn out on their company parades for inspec- 
 tion by the first sergeants. Each detachment, as it ar- 
 rives, will, under the direction of the adjutant, take post 
 on the left of the one that preceded it, in open order, arms 
 shouldered and bayonets fixed ; the supernumeraries five 
 paces in the rear of the men of their respective companies; 
 
 * If, however, instructions have been given to march the 
 troops past in quick time also, the column will, instead of 
 changing the guide, halting the column, and wheeling it 
 into lino, ns above directed, give the command : 1. Quick 
 time. 2. ^Mauc^. In passing the reviewing officer again, 
 no salute will be offered by either officers or men. As the 
 column approaches, the music, having commenced play- 
 ing at the command mnrch, will place itsef in front of, and 
 march oU' with the column, and continue to play until the 
 battalion is halted on its original ground. The review Avilf 
 lerminatc iu the .?a)ric mannor as abi>v*j diicciiKU 
 
284 GUAUD-MOUNTUsG. 
 
 the first sergeants in rear of them. The sergeant-major 
 will dress the ranks, count the files, verify the details, and 
 when the guard is formed, report to the adjutant, and 
 take post two paces on the left of the front rank. 
 
 40. The adjutant then commands: Front, when the offi- 
 cer of the guard takes post twelve paces in front of the 
 centre, the sergeants in one rank, four paces in rear of the 
 officers ; and the corporals in one rank, four paces in rear 
 of the sergeants — all facing to the front. The adjutant 
 then assigns their places in the guard. 
 
 41. The adjutant then command : 
 
 1. Offi-cer and non-commissioned Officers. 2. About face. 
 3. Inspect your guards — Marsh. 
 
 42. The non-commissioned oflBcers then take their posts. 
 The commander of the guards then commands : 
 
 1. Order — Arms. 2. Inspection — Arms. 
 
 and inspects his guard. When there is no commissioned 
 officer on the guard, the adjutant will inspect it. During 
 inspection the band wiU play. 
 
 43. The inspection ended, the officer of the guard takes 
 post as though the guard were a company of a battalion 
 in open order, under review ; at the same time, also, the 
 officers of the day will take post in front of the centre of 
 guard ; the old officer of the day three paces on the right 
 of the new officer of the day, one pace retired. The adju- 
 tant will then command : 
 
 1. ParatZe— Rest. 2. Troop— Q^Ki Off. 
 
 ■ when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down 
 
GUARB-MOUMIMi. 265 
 
 tlio line in front of the oflScer of the guard to the left, and 
 back to its place on the right, it will cease to play. 
 
 44. The adjutant will command : 
 
 1. t^ttention. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 3. Close Order.-' 
 March. 
 
 45. At the word ** close order," the officer will face 
 about; at " march," resume his post in line. The adju- 
 tant then commands : Present — Arms: at which he will 
 face to the new officer of the day, salute and report, ^'Sir, 
 the guard is forjyied." The new officer of the day, after 
 acknowledging the salute, will direct the adjutant to march 
 the guard in review, or by Hank to its post. But if the 
 adjutant be senior to the officer of the day, he will report 
 without saluting with the sword then, or when marching 
 in review. 
 
 46. In review, the guard march past the officer of the 
 day, according to the order of review, conducted by the 
 adjutant, marching on the left of the first division; the 
 sergeant-major on the left of the last division. When the 
 column has passed the officer of the day, the officer of the 
 guard marches it to its post, the adjutant and sergeant- 
 major retiring. The music, which has wheeled out of the 
 column and take post opposite the officer of the day, will 
 cease, and the old officer of the day salute, and give the 
 old or standing orders to the new officer of the day. The 
 supernumeraries, at the same time, will be marched to 
 their respective company parades and dismissed. 
 
 47. On the approach of the new guard, the officer of the 
 old guard having his guard paraded, will command: — 
 /Vescj(<— Arms. The new guard will march in quick 
 
<ime, puft the old guard, at ehouldur arms, nfiicefs ealut- 
 ing-, and take post four paces on its right,, when, being 
 aligned v.ith it, its commander will order : Present — Akms". 
 The two officers will then approach each other and salute. 
 Tliey will th«n return to their respective guards, and com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Shoulder— Anus. U Order-~A\i^i^. 
 
 48. The otllcer ®f the new guard wHl now direct the de- 
 tail for the advance guard to be formed and marched to 
 its post, the list of the guard made and divided into three 
 reliefs, and perform all the other duties incident to his post 
 itnd necessary at this time to be done. 
 
 4:0. The first relief having been designated and ordered 
 two paces to the front, the corporal of the new guard will 
 take charge of it, and go to relieve the sentinels, accom- 
 panied by the corporal of the old guard/ Vvho will take 
 command of the old sentinels, when the whole are reliev- 
 ed. The relief, with arms at a support, in two ranks, will 
 march by a flank, conducted by the corporal on the side 
 of the leading front rank man ; and then men will be num- 
 bered alternately in the front and rear rank, the man on 
 the right of the front rank being No. 1. Should an offi- 
 cer approach, the corporal will command : Carry c(rm<i, 
 and resume the support arms when the officer is passed: 
 
 50. When the sentinel sees the relief approaching, ho 
 will halt and face to it, uith his arms at a shoulder. At 
 fix paces the corporal will command : 1. lleU'f, 2. Halt ; 
 when the relief will halt and carry arras. The corporal 
 will then add, '-' No. 1," or ''No. 2." or ''No. 8," accord- 
 ing to the number of the port, Arms—Voi.i, Thet'-ro 
 
tlAHJiS AX* SK.S I IMil.S. 
 
 utitteU will, with arms &tport tkon approach each other. 
 n hen the old j-entincl, under the correction of the corpo^ 
 ral, v\ill whisper Ihc inEtruciions to tlic now sentinel. Tuiti 
 *lone, the two sentinels will shoulder arnip, and the old 
 sentinel will pass, in quick time, to his place in rear of the 
 relief. The corporal will then command : 1. Support — 
 Anjfs. 2, Foruard, 3. JlAncn. And the relief prooeedB 
 in the same manner until th^e wh«le .ire relieved. 
 
 51. The detachments and sentinels from the old guard 
 hsviniy come in, it will bo marched, at shovlcUr avnin, 
 .'•ioDg the front of tlie new fcuai d, in quick time, the new 
 guard standing at presented arms ; oHiccrs saluting and 
 the music of both guards beating, except at the out-posti?. 
 
 52. On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade, 
 the commander of the old guard will send the detachment^ 
 oonipos-ing it to thrir respective regiments or compani'^s. 
 
 53. Wlicn the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the 
 officer of the new gnard will order his men to stack their 
 arm SI. or ]-lace them in the arm-rack?. 
 
 GUARDS AND SENTINELS. 
 
 iii. Camp and garrison guards will be relieved every 
 tvTenty-four hours. Sentinels will bo relieved every two 
 hours. The oflicers are to remain constantly at their 
 guards, except while visiting the sentinels or necessarily 
 engaged elsewhere on their proper duty. Neither officers 
 nor soldiers are to take off their clothing or accoutrements 
 while they are on guard. AVhen a fire breaks out, or any 
 alarm is raised in a garrison, all guards are to be imme- 
 diately under arms. Sontinck-; will not take ord?)- or al- 
 low thi'^Hi=»lvp« to be relieved, orcopt by an (Wlienv or non- 
 
288 '}UARDS AKli SENTINELFo 
 
 commissioned officer of their guard or party, the officer of 
 the day, or the commanding officer. Sentinels will re- 
 port every breach of orders or regulations they are en- 
 trusted to enforce. They must keep themselves on the 
 alert, observing everything that takes place within ^ight 
 and hearing of their post. They will carry their arms 
 habitually at support or on either shoulder, but will never 
 quit them. In wet weather they will secure arms. No 
 sentinel will quit his post or hold conversation not neces- 
 sary to the proper discharge of his duty. 
 
 55. Sentinels will be respected by all persons of whatev- 
 er rank. They will present arms to general and field offi- 
 cers, to the officer of the day, and to the commanding offi- 
 cer of the post. To all other officers they will carry arms. 
 The sentinel at any post of the guard, when he sees kny 
 body of troops, or an officer entitled to compliment, ap- 
 proach, must call "Turn out the guard; and announce 
 who approaches. Guards do not turn out as a matter of 
 compliment after sunset, but sentinels will, when officers 
 in uniform approach, pay them proper attention, by facing 
 to the proper front and standing steady at sJioulder arms. 
 This will be observed until the evening is so far advanced 
 that the sentinels begin challenging. 
 
 CHALLENGING. 
 
 56. After re/rea^ (or the hour appointed by the com- 
 manding officer) until broad daylight, a sentinel challeng;- 
 63 every person who approaches him, taking at the same 
 time the position of arms poj-f. He will suffer no person 
 to come nearer than within the reach qf bis bayont, until 
 
CBAIIfiS AM) ^E.Ml-NKL.-. 2S'J 
 
 the peisou has given the coHn!crsijfi. A sciitiucl in dial- 
 longing, wHl call out : "Who coviev pJure*^^ If ausweir 
 ed—'' Friend , icith (he conntcftign,'^ and he be instructed 
 to pass pei'ons with the countcvtign, he will reply — *' Ad- 
 vance, friend, with (he coi(i)(ersignJ" If answered— 
 " Friends" he will repl^'— " HaU friends. Adcance one 
 ivith (he countertvjn" If answered— " Relief," ** Patrol " 
 or " Grand rounda," he will reply — " Jfalt ; advance »cr- 
 ffcant (or corporal) with (he countcrsifjn," and satisfy him- 
 self that the party is what it represents itself to be. If he 
 have no^authority to pass persons with the countersign, if 
 the wrong countersign be given, or if the persons hare not 
 the countersign, he will cause thcni to stand, and call — 
 *' Corporal of (he f/ucird." 
 
 «RAM) KOl'NUS. 
 
 57. The oflicei' wishing to make the rounds, will take an 
 escort of a non-commissioned oQiccr and two men. When 
 the rounds arc challenged by a sentinel, the sergeant will 
 answei" — '* Grand roiinds ;" and the sentinel will replv— 
 '"Halt, grand rounds. %fldrance, sergeant with the toro)- 
 tersign." Upon Avhich the sergeant advances and gives 
 the eounter&ign. Tiie sentinel will thou cry — ** Adoanut- 
 7'ounds ; and stand at a shoulder till th;^y have passed. 
 
 58. When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and 
 is answered — " Grand rounds," he will reply •' HaU, grand 
 rounds. Turn ou^ (he guard , grand rounds." Upon whirh 
 the guard will be drawn up at shouldered arm?. The ofiicfir 
 commanding the guard will then order atcigeaut and tno 
 caeu to advancs: when within ten pace:?, the ser;rcaut 
 
 10 
 
cballengcs. Tiiu soi'g-eant of the grand rouniLi aiis\?ers — 
 '* Grand rounds." The sergeart of the guard replies — 
 "t^dvance, sergeant, ivith the countersign." 
 
 59. The sergeant of the rounds advances alone, gives the 
 countersign, and returns to his round. The s«rgeant of 
 the guard calls to his officer — ''The countersign is right"; 
 on which the officer of the guard calls — "Advance rounds." 
 The officer of the rounds then advances alone, ihe guard 
 i<tanding at shouldered arms. The officer of the rounds 
 passes along the front of the guard to the officer, who 
 keeps his post on the right, and gives him theparole. He 
 then examines the guard, orders back his escort, and tak- 
 ing a new one, proceeds in the same manner to other 
 guards, 
 
 ESCORTS OF HONOR. 
 
 , ,60. The escort will be drawn up in line, the centre op- 
 posite to the place where the person to be escorted pre- 
 sents himself, with an interval between the wings to re- 
 ceive him and his retinue. On bis appear Jince he will be 
 received with the honors due to his rank. When he haa 
 taken his place in the line, the whole will bo wheeled into 
 platoons or companies, as the case may he, and take up 
 the march. The same ceremony will be observed, and the 
 same honors paid, on his leaving the escort. 
 
 61. When the position of the escort is at a considerabl© 
 distance from the point where he is expected to be receiv- 
 ed a double line of sentinels will be posted from that point 
 to the escort, facing inward, and the sentinels will succes- 
 aively salute as he passes. An officer will be appointed to 
 attend him, to bear such communications as h« may have 
 Co make to ^he eommandcr of the es-c&rt. 
 
K5cr.PT OF Ho\"o*i -29i 
 
 COLOR ESCORT. 
 
 €2> Whoii a battftliou turns out under arms, and tliB 
 coior is WRotcd, a company, other tban that of the color, 
 will be put in march to receive and escort the color, in the 
 following order, in quick time and without music : the 
 drum-major and field music followed by the band-; the es- 
 cort in column by platoon, right in front, with arms shift- 
 ed to the right shoulder, and the color-bearer between the 
 platoons. 
 
 63. Arrived in front of the tent cr quarters of the colo- 
 nel, the escort will form into line, the field music and baud 
 on the right, and arms will be carried. The eolor-bearer, 
 preceded by the first lieutenant, and followed by a serge- 
 ant of the escort, will then go to receive the color. 
 
 Gi. When the color-bearer shall come out, followed br 
 the lieutenant and sergeant, he will halt before the en- 
 trance ; the captain will cause the escort to present armsp 
 and the drums will beat to the color for half a minute, 
 when arms will be shouldered, and the escort will fee bro- 
 ken into column by platoon. The color bearer witi place 
 himself between the platoons. The lieutenant and serge- 
 ant will resume their posts, and the escort will march back 
 to the battalion to the sound of music, in quick time and 
 in the same order as above. 
 
 65. Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from the 
 battalion the escort will be halted, and the music will 
 cease; the colonel will place himself sis paces before the 
 centre of the battalion, the color-bearer will approach the 
 o:>Ionel. by fha rront-, in quick (miip : whf»n at tiie drstanre 
 
Of ten paces, ho wlU halt: the colonel will cause arm, tx. 
 h. presented, and to tJ^e .olor to be played -^-.^'^-g ^ ; 
 c.uted,the color-bearer will take hi« place u. the froiU 
 rank >fthe color-guard, and the battalion by command 
 ,viU shoulder arms. The escort, field mus^c --' -"^ ^^ . 
 return in quick time to their several places m tnc hue ot 
 battle, marching by the rear of the battalion. 
 
 66 The color will bo escorted back to the colonel s tc^.t 
 or quarters with like ceremony and in the same order. 
 
 rUNKRAL HONORS. 
 
 67 Th. funeral escort will be formed i:. two rank., op- 
 ^oe te to the quartern or tent of the deceased, with shoul- 
 S eda-sand bayonets unfixed ; the artillery and cav- 
 a rvon the right of the infantry.- On the appearance ot 
 tt/corpse, the officer commanding the escort will com- 
 
 inand : 
 
 /^•e?-?Hf~ AuMS. 
 
 68 When the honors due to the deceased will be paid by 
 ,vhen it will be halted. The commander will then oidci . 
 
 a.h.el n. March. 4. Jieverse-A^m. 5. Column, 
 fonmrd. C. GHide right. 7. March. , 
 
 69. The column ^viU bemai;chedm_^lm^ 
 
 -;i^;;.;ri;;dge of ^^^^^^^ 4^r:^f 
 
 black crape ^''""'^^^ *''';. ^^j "be worn when in full or 
 
music, and on reacliin<( tlio o;ravo, will take a diiection so 
 ns that the g'uides shall be next to the grave. When the 
 centre of the column is opposite the grave, the coinuiander 
 will order : 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 2. Right into line tvhecl. 4. Maiith. 
 
 70. The coffin is then brought along the front, to the 
 oppofiite side of the grave, and the coramandei- then or- 
 ders : 
 
 1. Shoulder. — AuMS. 2. Piebeut—Xv.\\\i. 
 
 71. And when the coflin reachen the grave, he adds : 
 
 3. Shoulder — Arm?. 4. Rent on — Arms. 
 
 72. After the funeral service is performed, and the 
 coffin is lowered into the grave, the commander will ordei : 
 
 1. Jittention. 2. Shoulder — Arm.«. 3. Load at will. A. 
 Load. 
 
 73. And cause three rounds of small arms to be fired by 
 the escort. He will then command : 
 
 1. P,tf company {or platoon) r'ujht-wh eel. 1. March. S, 
 Column forward. 4. Guide left. 5. Quick — March. 
 
 74. The music will not begin to play until the escort is 
 clear of the enclosui-e. 
 
AMMUNITION. 
 
 Troops in the field should not only be supplied with a 
 sufficient quantity of ammunition, but the men of the 
 command should be taught how to prepare it. Cartridges 
 for small arms are made of paper in the following manner: 
 Having prepared the paper, which should be strong, but 
 not too thick, by cutting it first into strips eight and a 
 half inches wide, then cutting these strips crosswise to 
 smaller strips four and a half inches in width, and then 
 cutting these last diagonally, so that the pieces will be 
 three inches on one side and five and a half on the other ; 
 the pieces are then rolled on a small cylindrical stick of 
 the same diameter as the ball to be used, about six inches 
 long, having a spherical cavity at one end and rounded at 
 the other. The paper is laid on a table with the side per- 
 pendicular to the bases next the workman, the broad end 
 to the left; the stick laid on it with the concave end half 
 an inch from the broad edge of the paper, and enveloped 
 in it once. The right hand is then laid flat on the stick, 
 and all the paper rolled on it. The projecting end of the 
 paper is now neatly folded down into the concavity of the 
 stick, pasted, and pressed on a ball imbedded in the table 
 for the purpose. 
 
 Instead of being pasted, these cylinders maybe closed 
 by choking with a string, tied to the table, and having at 
 the other end a stick by which to hold it. The convex end 
 of the /ormcr is placed to the left, and after the paper is 
 rolled on, the former is taken in the left hand, and a turn 
 made around it with the choking string half an Inch from 
 the end of the papei'. Whilst the ■-'■fiing: is drawn tight 
 
AMMUMIIOK. 29o 
 
 with the right hand, the former is held iu the left with 
 the forfinger resting on the end of the cylinder, folding it 
 neatly down upon the end of the former. The choke ib 
 then firmly tied with twine. 
 
 For ball cartridges, make the cylinders and choke thoui 
 as above described, and the choke tied without cutting the 
 twine. The former is then withdrawn, the ball put in, and 
 the concave end of the former put iu after it. The half 
 hitches are made a little above the ball, and twine cut off. 
 
 For ball and buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as 
 before, insert three buckshot, fasten them with a half hitch 
 and insert and secure the ball as before. 
 
 For buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as before, 
 insert four tiers of three buckshot each, as at first, making 
 a half hitch between the tiers, and ending with a double 
 hitch. 
 
 To till the cartridges, the cylinders are placed upright 
 in a box, and the charge poured into each from a connical 
 charger of the appropriate size; the mouths of tlie cylin- 
 ders are now folded down oa the pov/der by two rectan- 
 gular folds, and the cartridges bundled in packages often. 
 For this a folding box is necessary ; it is made with two 
 yertical sides at a distance from each other equal to five 
 diameters of the ball, and two diameters high. 
 
FORMS, 
 
rtw or FUKT.orr.H. 2*»7 
 
 FopM No. 1. 
 FORM OF FURLOl GH. 
 
 FURLOUGHS TO ENLISTED MEN. 
 
 Furloughs will be grantod onh' by the ■commanding ofh- 
 cer of the post or the commanding' ofliccr of the regiment 
 actually quartered with it. Furloughs may be prohibited 
 At the discretion of the olticer in command. 
 
 Soldiers on furlough shall not take n-ith them their 
 arms or accoutrements. 
 
 Form of furlough : 
 
 TO ALL WHOM IT MAY COXCERX. 
 
 The bearer hereof, , a Sergeant [corpora], 
 
 or private, as the case may be] of Captain • 
 
 company — regiment of , aged — ■ years, — feet, 
 
 — inches higli, complexion, pyes, 
 
 hair, and by profession a ; born in the — 
 
 , and enlisted at , in the of — 
 
 the — day of eighteen hundre<:l and - 
 
 for the period of is hereby permitted to go to 
 
 in the county of State of he having 
 
 received a Furlough from the — day of , to the — 
 
 day of , at which period he will rejoin his company 
 
 or regiment at , or wherever it then may be, oV 
 
 be considered a deserter. 
 
 iSubsistence has been furnished to said 
 
 tlie — day of , and pay to the — day of 
 
 inclusive. 
 
 Uiven under my kand, at , this — day of 
 
 iiignature of the officer > 
 giving the furlough ) — 
 
298 
 
 PIT AcenuvT. 
 
 a 
 
 « 
 
 Eh 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 «3 
 
 s 
 
 « 
 
 <•* 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 'C 
 
 f»H 
 
 ^ 
 
 .' 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 »- 
 
 
 
 
 
 c« 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 a; 
 
 
 
 
 
 tf 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 W' 
 
 
 
 
 
 -«^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 j_^ 
 
 xn 
 
 
 
 
 
 « • 
 
 -u 
 
 
 
 
 
 -1 
 
 c;) 
 
 
 
 
 
 id 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a> 
 
 , 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 >% 
 
 
 
 
 
 t-'O 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 r-^ 
 
 riS 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 a o 
 
 -W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J5 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 in 
 
 
 
 
 
 JH 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 , -. , 
 
 
 
 
 
 a a , 
 
 
 
 
 
 cy o I 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 '-^ o 
 
 
 
 
 
 <v) rt 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 o j:; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?, 'g. 
 
 _- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 Stj 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 J5 a 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 O rt 
 
 flH 
 
 
 
 
 
 -i-> 
 
 
 ;h (U 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 .O o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «« .« 
 
 
 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 
 (m 
 
 "o 
 
 
 aJ 
 
 en 
 
 
 fS 
 
 to 
 
 rt: 
 
 r ^ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 I 2 
 
 
 ,a 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 V. f% 
 
 |s 
 
 
 p^ 
 
 L => 
 
 O I 
 
 
 a 
 
 ^f^ 
 
 fM I 
 
 
 
 1 o 
 
 
 Cs 
 
 
 N 
 
 
PAT ACCUC-NI. 
 
 293 
 
 13 
 
 "a J'r,*" o^ e-:S ^ ^ ^ *: 
 « S S^ S: « S - I s 
 
 "■ be S 
 
 ■a i) r: 
 
 
 ±>S-. 
 
 
 O jj i> 
 
 bo a o 
 a S e <u 
 
 bt) c?, ^ .2 P -^ xi _ o be « 
 •° ^ o :S ^ ^ « -^ - = -^ ^ 
 
 r; Ujs fe g --girt S g eti 
 
 . " t»l '-H J3 --v r- 1^ ri C ^ 
 
 ^ ^ i» .d o '^ 
 
 
 — 0) 
 
 ^ 
 
 „ o *c; *^ 'S -^> B 
 « - :2 ^ x3 " =^ ' 
 
 
 «» 
 
 e3 O C 
 
 e 
 
 o 
 S 
 
300 
 
 SUBfilylAiViCK. 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 05 
 
 •S t^ 
 
 O 
 
 <Si c 
 
 ^ 
 
 H 
 
 di 
 
 r// 
 
 
 l-H 
 
 5 
 
 M 
 
 fti 
 
 ca 
 
 a 
 
 1:3 
 
 ^ 
 
 .§^5^ 
 
 7- O 
 
 ft5 
 
 
 no 
 
 w 
 
 M 
 
 
 o 
 ■■n 
 
 H 
 ->( 
 
 p5 
 
 
 
 •IIBS 1 
 
 •dtjog i 
 
 soipu«o 1 
 
 .icSoui^ 1 
 
 Mui^n^ 1 
 
 •^S^fOQ 1 
 
 •00 iH ! 
 
 •su'Bog; 1 
 
 'jno]j[ 1 
 
 •iiaoj 1 
 
 jsaq -J^ 1 
 
 'SUOl^TJ.! 'OJy: 1 
 
 •SATjp JO -OX 1 
 
 •I^^OJL 1 
 
 •aaraoAV -o^vj | 
 
 'tiain JO -o^Nj I 1 
 
 ( 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 ■"< 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 (/) 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 
 o s 
 
ir, 
 O 
 
 J** 
 
 m 
 I 
 « 
 
 N 
 
 pecitied are 
 
 circumstan- 
 
 tending to 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 an CJ 
 
 ■?-2 
 
 1?, 
 
 1:1 
 
 •a 
 
 4; C.2 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 
 !S "S ;:^ 
 
 t-» 
 
 ^C 
 
 ■^ i 
 
 1 -^ o o 
 
 S 
 
 
 ?i ^ 
 
 i: ►- 
 
 fc. -s *-> 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 "^ as 
 
 a 
 ar- 
 
 the a 
 the fol 
 ink fit 
 
 < 
 
 c; 
 
 
 m 
 
 'J 
 
 d 
 
 -<:: 
 , 
 
 cs &• 
 
 
 
 
 :!5 
 
 a 
 
 a> 
 
 C n 
 
 <u 
 
 
 '. '■^ 
 
 -^^••-i *■* 
 
 ^ » g 
 
 
 
 ; .Cn 
 
 ^•.2 c 
 
 S"^' 
 
 
 
 t.- ' — ' 
 
 ^ c 
 
 ed i7> a> 
 
 ^, 
 
 
 — XI 
 
 
 13 correct, 
 ice, render, 
 easons as h 
 
 TJ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 »— < 
 
 6J UV ^ 
 
 • •«• cy) ^ 
 
 
 '5 
 
 - a; 
 1 a^ 
 
 1 -r. « s 
 
 
 'i* 
 
 U..5 
 
 -Ji i 
 
 *S -^ f '^ "i^ ii 
 
 > +J " .■G O ™ 
 C . te -^^ CIS 0) 
 
 c9 •*; t- .0 .i *-> 
 
 _ 4; 5»-. /J 
 5J i) o , ■•" S 
 
 -^^ •- •£ S'< •-' 
 
 b^ i,, 2 « fl p- 
 w-5 .. ^ »"o 
 
 
 
 w::; 
 
 
 • ^ Q,- 
 
 ?^ ^• 
 
 -e s- 
 
 S !=l 
 
 d <^ 
 
 4J ^ 
 
 C5 -i-> 
 
 
 "< 
 
 c 
 
 
 ■SI 
 
 -»-> i) 
 
 
 
 
 ./J _o 
 
 
 C4 
 
 0:1: u 
 
 
 -, ^ w 
 
 
 > t) 
 
 
 <p cS 
 
 1 fcfci, 
 
 .Ur 1> 
 
 .,; p 
 
 tt 
 
 h:S">. 
 
 
 •-• 
 
 
 ,*^ 
 
 a «-• 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 1. The t'ollovTiDg^ movements are designed principallj 
 for the Hse of volunteer compaaies on public occasion8, for 
 parade and show, and when properly executed, greatly 
 enhance the looks of a corps of citizen soldiery. 
 
 2. In the execution of these movements, the company 
 »3 supposed to be in one rank, facing to the froat ; the cap- 
 tain then counts off the strength of the company from 
 right to left, and divides them into fowr eq^ual parte, termed 
 ♦ ' RrcUobs."' To execute movement No. L, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Brtak into coltivm by sections. 2. By icctions righi 
 
 wheel. 3. March. 
 
 (/-%. 1.) 
 
 3. At the cemmand warch, the sectioiis-iirhc-Gt as is pre- 
 
scribed in company drill for hreuking i»to cohapn hy jjla^ 
 toon, being halted and dressed in the same manner, and 
 each officer and non-commissioned officer taking the po- 
 sition prescribed for thorn, that is, the captain takes com* 
 niand of the first section, the iirst lieutenant the fourth, 
 Ac, and the first sergeant acting as guide of the first sec- 
 tion, and the second of the fourth. At the command, 
 Forieard — Marcii, thcj will step off promptly. 
 
 {Fig. 2.) 
 
 i. To c-xecute Fig. 2., the company is supposetl to be 
 marching in the position of Fig. 1. ; ihe captain will give 
 the cautionary command. Subdivision of secHoni, at which 
 each chief of sections will, with his sword, divide his sec- 
 tions in two parts, and at the command : 1. Subdivision/i 
 of sections^ right and left ohlique, 2. March, each subdi- 
 vision will oblique two paces, the right going to the right 
 ,ind the left subdivision to the left, and when at that dis- 
 tance the captain will command : 1. Fortpord, 2. March. 
 The captain may sometimes command : Offictrs, c«ntre, 
 when each chief will take his place in the interval formed 
 in the centre of his section. 
 
 ft. To cause the position of Fig. 1., to be resumed, the 
 tfomraand will be. I. Subdivisions af »e(^tons, right and I^C 
 
304 AP{»EXDI.t. 
 
 oh^ijue to place, 2. MiRCH; at the ^'omnrand march, oarh 
 subdivision will oblique to Its pkce, and as soon sa the 
 connexion is mride they will Continue the march to the 
 front without farthef cotrimand. 
 
 ( ^*V- 3 ) 
 
 6. Fig;. 3. is formed by giving the command : 
 
 1. Subdivlsion.1 of Sections to rear. 2. Margk, 
 
 7. At the first command the guide of each section will 
 go immediatety to the right, if not already tbere, and iit 
 the command march, each left subdivision will mark time 
 until each right subdivision gets about 3 paces in front^ 
 the left subdivisions will then oblique right until exactly 
 behind and in a line with their right aubdivisions when 
 the command will be given 1. Foi'irard. 2. ^aecip, 
 
 8. To cause a resumption of Fig. 1, the command will 
 feejl. Form sections. 2. Marc^, At thecoijjmand wsflo-cA, 
 
APPKNDIX. 
 
 30.» 
 
 thft right subcHvi>'ion?i mark timo until the K^ft «hall have 
 obliqued left to their placo*?, when tlio commantl will l)e- 
 given, fo r ira /• d, m a v cJi^ 
 
 9. To form Fig. 4, the canipAny is supposed marching: 
 to the front in position of Fig. 1. ; the captain will com- 
 mand : ' 
 
 1. Form crosD. 2. Maucit. 
 
 10. At the first command the guide of each section will 
 place himself promptly on the right, and at the command 
 inarch, tha first section will come by the riffht Jlank,file 
 left, and mark time, forming the first wing of the cross: 
 the second section will march straight to the front and 
 form the left wing of the cross; the third will oblique to- 
 the right and connecting its left flank to the rearmost file 
 of the first section, will form the right wing; the fourth, 
 will come by the right fank, hyjile left, and the front mjin 
 of this section will connect Mmself with tlve rearmost man' 
 of the first, forming kbe fourth wing ; the wote move- 
 
 -"nt will be done »imuU:inpon?1v. nnd nr; soon as it \^ 
 
306 
 
 APfKXlHX. 
 
 ffxecuted the captain will cominan4, 1. Forward, 2. M^irch; 
 at which command the company will move off promptly. 
 
 {Fig. 5.) 
 
 - Colors, 
 
 11. The company marching in the position of Pig. 4., 
 and the captain wishing it to execute the movemewt of 
 Fig. 6, will command : 
 
 1. Open order hy sections. 2. March. 
 
 12. At the command march, the fourth section will mark 
 time until the first has gotten to the distance of four pa- 
 ces to the front, at the same time the second and third 
 sections will oblique to the right each two paces, the cap- 
 tain will then command: 1, .For!i«7'(^, 2, March, when 
 tlie company will move cfF. 
 
 18. In both these movements the flag will take position in 
 the centre of the cross. 
 
 14. The captain wishing to change the movement, will 
 command : 1. Close ortfergy 2. March : at the second c?om- 
 
tVFhSBlX. 
 
 30V 
 
 iiiaud the iiist »ot;tiou will mark tiuio and the utbei>? will 
 close on it, assuming the position of Fig. 4. The com- 
 mand will then be given : 
 
 1. Form column by tectiovi. 2. March. 
 
 )5. At the command march, the men of the first section 
 will form rapidly on the left of tfre front rank man in the 
 manner prescribsd in the movement, by platoon in line, 
 the front rank man (who is the first sergeant), marching- 
 straight to the front ; the second oection .continues to 
 march straight to the front at its proper distance ; the 
 third obliquing to its place in rear of the second and the 
 fourth, going through the movement prescribed for the 
 first ; the company will then be in the position of Fig. 1. 
 
 {Fig.%.) 
 
 lb": The company marching in the position of Fig. 1, 
 tlie captain wishing to cause it to assume the positiou of 
 Fig. 6, will command ; 
 
 1. Form square. 2. March. 
 
 17. At the command mirch, the first and fourth eoctions 
 will majrk time, the sQCond will come6j/ ths right fiank, by 
 
;](jg APfENWlX. 
 
 nie lepy and iurm the right side of the cro^s, the third will 
 come hi, the left flank, file right, and form the left wing ot 
 the cro'ss ; as soon as executed the captain will command : 
 1. i'bnrarrf, 2. MAKCH,at which command the company 
 
 will step ofi". 
 
 18. To execute this movement well, it is exceedingly 
 necessary that it be done all together ; the captain should 
 dwell sometime between the command of caution and that 
 ofcreoMh-oH, to enable the men to think how the move- 
 ment is to be executed. 
 
 19. The captain may add to this command by halting,' 
 the company, and putting them through the diflerent fir- 
 ings, to do this hr/will command : 
 
 1. Compcouj. 2. Halt. 
 
 20. At the second command the company will halt 
 promptly, dosing up any interval that may have been 
 made ; the captain will then command : Outward face, 
 at which the 2nd, 3rd and 4th sections will face outwards, 
 they will then be put through the firings as the captain 
 may see proper ; when he wishes them to march forward 
 acrain he will cause them to ceasefirinrj, and command :- 
 1? To first position. 2. Face. At this command they 
 ^villface promptly to their places. 
 
 21. To cause them to resume tlieir posJtioa <jf Fig. 1, 
 the captain will command : 
 
 1. Form sec'ioue. 2. March. 
 
 22. At the command marck, the first section will con- 
 liime to marth titraight forward, the second section, which 
 is the right side of uf the square, will form promptly ou it? 
 
.irrEN-rtiA. 309 
 
 right guide and follow in the rear of the first; the third 
 Avill form in like luanner, and the fourth will march 
 straight forward; but marking time a little at first, to 
 allow the second and third to finish the execution of theiv 
 movement. 
 
 (/',V. 7.) 
 
 23. The compinn' uiarchinsf in the position of Fig. 1, 
 and the captain wishing it to assume the position of Fig. 7, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Echelon hi/ sections to the right. 2. Mauoh. 
 
 24. At the command march, the first section will con- 
 tinue to march straight forward, the 2nd, 3i'd and 4th, 
 will commence obliquing to the right, and as soon as the 
 left fde of the second section is in a line with the right file 
 of the first, the chief of the section will command: For- 
 ward March ; as soon as the left file of the third has got- 
 ten in line with the right file of the second, the same com- 
 mand will be given; the same thing is applicable to the 
 fourth section. 
 
 25. This movement may bo varied by commanding 
 Echelon, to the left — Jfarch, which will be done in the 
 v^amc manner, except in this case the sections oblique to 
 the left. 
 
2t). To caipse the position of Fig. 1, tu be resttined, the 
 captain will command : 
 
 1. Form eolumn. 2. MAucn.. 
 
 27. At the command march, the sections will oblique to 
 their places, keeping the regular distances from each other. 
 
 \Fig.b.) 
 
 28. Thexompany marching in the powtiou of Fig. 1, 
 and the captain wishing it to assuume that of Fig. 8, will 
 command : 
 
 1. Echelon hy sections^ right andhift. 2. March. 
 
 29. At the command march, the first section marches 
 straight forward ; the second obliques right until it gets 
 into the position as indicated in Fig. 7. ; the third obliques 
 left in the same manner, the fourth continuing to march 
 forward. The second and third must be exactly opposite 
 each other. 
 
 30. To cause the position of Fig. 1 to be resumed, the 
 command will be : 1. Form coZK??i?i. — 2. March, at which 
 the sections oblique to their proper places. 
 
APPENDIX. 311 
 
 {Fig. 9... 
 
 31. To assume the position of Fig. 9, the company is 
 supposed to be marching in the position of Fig. 3, when 
 the captain will command : 
 
 1. Echelon by subdtvition »/ tectione to the right {or l^t) 
 2. March. 
 
 32. At the command march, each subdivision will oblique 
 right (or left) as has been indicated in No. 24, Fig. 7, 
 except that as soon as the left flank man of each subdivis- 
 ion is in line and covers the right flank man of the preced- 
 ing section, they will forward without further command. 
 
 33. To resume the position of Fig. 3, the captain will 
 command : 
 
 1. Forvi column hy subdivision of sections. 2. March. 
 
 34. At the command march, each subdivision will oblique 
 to its prcper place, keeping the required distance from 
 each other. 
 
3-1' 
 
 IPPENDTT. 
 
 {F!g. 10.) 
 
 35. The company being in march, in the position of FI<j. 
 ?>, and the captain wisliing it to assume the position of Fig. 
 10, will command : 
 
 1 . Echelon hy stihdirision of sections to front and rear. 2, 
 March. 
 
 36. At the command march, the first subdivision will 
 continue to march forward, the 2nd and 3rd will oblique 
 to the right and left, and place themselves opposite each 
 other, the 4th and 5th execute the same movement ; the 
 Cth and 7th oblique right and left until they get opposite 
 each other and in an exact line with the 2nd and 3rd ; the 
 8th continues to march forward, and the whole keeping 
 the proper interval between them. 
 
 37. To resume the position of Fig. 3, the captain will 
 command: 
 
 1. Form eohimn hy snhdivision of secfioii. 2. March. 
 
 38. At the command march, the subdivisions will obliqua 
 right and left until they get in <ht»ir proptM- position?. 
 
APPU.NDIX. 
 
 {Fig. 11.) 
 
 31: 
 
 39. The coim>anv uiarching in the position o( Fig. 10, 
 and the captain wishing it to assume that of Fig. 11, will 
 com ui and : 
 
 1. Subdivisiom of section. 2. By the right jlank,Jile lej'i. 
 3. March. 
 
 40. At the command march, each subdivision will 
 promptly and simultaneously execute the movement of 
 flanking to the right and filing to the left. 
 
 41. To resume the position of Fig. 10, the captain will 
 command : Subdivisions of sections , file right — 3Iarch, and 
 
 ,as soon as they shall have filed, he will command: 
 \. By tUUftJkmk. 2. March. 
 
>li APPBNUIa. 
 
 {Fiy.Vl.) 
 
 41. To execute the movement of Fig. 12, the company 
 is supiioscd to be marching in the position of Fig. 3, when 
 the captain will command : 
 
 1. Echelon hy subdivisions of sectione^ right and left. 2. 
 Marck. 
 
 42. At the command march, the first subdivision of sec- 
 tion continues to march forward, the second obliques right, 
 the third left, the fourth right, the fifth left, and so on 
 forming the movement as indicated in Fig. 12. 
 
 43. The captain wishing them to assume the position 
 of Fig. 3, will command: 
 
 •1. Form column by subdivision of sections. 2. March. 
 
 44. At the command march, each subdivision will ob. 
 liqae right and left to its proper place, taking care not to 
 loae the distance between them. 
 
.tPPFN»IX; 31i) 
 
 {f;s. 15.) 
 
 45. In the execution of Tig. 13, the company should be 
 marching in one rank, (single file), and when the captain 
 shall wish to cause the movement to be executed, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Echelon Jjy Jilt right and left. 2. March. 
 
 46. At the command march, the first sergeant continues 
 to march forward, the man next in his rear will oblique to 
 the right until his left shoulder is in a line and thirteen 
 inches in rear of the sergeant's right shoulder ; thus the 
 movement will continue alternately from right to left, 
 each man obliqueing in the Ojiposite direction from the 
 one in front of him. In the execution of this movement 
 the first sergeant will shorten his steps to enable the men 
 to execute it without confusion. Should the company be 
 a large ontv t r r>venit>nt hnd better be done in double 
 ijuick timi*. 
 
210 A.PPKNPfX. 
 
 47. The onptain may var3M,his movement 'by command- 
 ing: Jiic/lit uhont—March, when in thd position of Fig. 13. 
 He may also put the company throiigh the different firings 
 in this position. 
 
 48. The captain may vary these movements ao he sees 
 proper. 
 
 49. He may also greatly add to the appearance of the 
 company when marching by section, to give the caution- 
 ary command, subdivision a of necfiotit, right and left wheel-, 
 and then command : 
 
 1. First section, right and left wheel. 2. M.vp.CU, 
 
 at which command, each subdivision of section will begin 
 wheeling, the right subdivision wheeling right and (he left 
 wheeling Uft, they will continue the wheel and go to the 
 rear, passing to the right and left of the other three sec- 
 tions, who continue to march straight to the front ; as 
 soon as it has an ived to the rear, its chief will command : 
 1. Firist section right and left wheel — March ; both subdi- 
 Tisions will wheel at the same time and form the section 
 again, which will march on after the other three ; the se- 
 cond will go through the same movement and by the same 
 commands from its chief, as soon as it has arrived at sec- 
 tion distance in front of the ground where the first section 
 wheeled; the thiid and fourth will execute the same move- 
 ment, thus keeping up a succession of wheels as the column 
 moves on. i 
 
 50. In the execution of Figures 4, 5, fi. 8, 10 and 11, the- 
 color-bearer takes his place in the ccntii.'. 
 
AdTUTAM ami iNSPECTOC-ORNKRAf/s OFirCE, 
 
 Richmond, Va., June fi, 11^61, 
 General Orders. Xo. 9.] 
 
 UNIFORM AND DRESS OF THE ARMY. 
 
 T t: X 1 c . 
 For Cnmmissionrd OJfirers. 
 
 1. All officers shall woar a tunic of ifray cloth, known as 
 cadet gray ; the skirt to extend half-way between the hip 
 antl the knee; double breasted for all grades. 
 
 2. For a Brigadier-General — Two rows of buttons on the 
 breast, eight in each row, placed in pairs ; the distance 
 between the rows four inches at top and three inches at 
 bottom; stand up collar, to rise no higher than to per- 
 mit the chin to turn freely over it ; to hook in front at the 
 bottom, and slope thence up and backward, at an angle of 
 thirty degrees, on each side; cuffs two and a half inches 
 deep on the undtr side, there to be bul toned with three 
 small buttons, and sloped upAvards to a point, at a di.i- 
 tance of four inches from the end of the sleeves ; pockets 
 in I li<e fuUls of thi^ skirt, wilh en.' bnttnn at tli • hip .inJ 
 
318 SNIPOWX? JkNB DRESS. 
 
 one at the entl of each pocket, making four buttoRiss on th« 
 back and skirt of the tunic, the hip buttons to range with 
 the lowest breast buttons. 
 
 3. For a Colonel — the same as for a Brigadier-General, 
 except that there will be only seven buttons in each row 
 on the breast, placed at equal distances. 
 
 4. For a Lieutenant- Colonel, Major, Captain and Lieu- 
 tenant — the same as for a Colonel. 
 
 For Enlisted Men. 
 
 5. The uniform coat for enlisted men shall be a double 
 breasted tunic of gray cloth, known as cadet gray, with 
 the skirt excnding half-way between the hip and the knee ; 
 two rows of buttons on the breast, seven in each row ; the 
 distance between the rows four inches at top and three inch- 
 es at bottom : stand-up collar, to rise no higher than to 
 permit the chin to turn freely over it ; to hook in front at 
 the bottom, and slope thence backwards at an angle of 
 thirty degrees on each side ; cufis too and a half inches 
 deep at the under seam, to button with two small buttons, 
 and to be slightly pointed on the upper part of the arm ; 
 pockets in the folds of the skirts. The collars and cuffs te 
 be of the color prescribed for facings for the respective 
 arms of service, and the edges of the tunic to be trimmed 
 throughout with the same colored cloth. Narrow lining 
 in the skirts of the tunic of gray material. 
 
 Facinc/s. 
 
 6. The facings for General Officers, and for Officers of 
 the Adjutant-General's Department, the Quartermaster- 
 General's Department, the Commissary-General's Depart- 
 
IMVORM ANb Dl!i;S>. 31$ 
 
 oieut, and the Engineers — buff. The tuuic lor all oflicers 
 to be edged throughout with the fasciugs designated. 
 
 7. For the Medical department — black. 
 
 8. For the Artillery — red. 
 
 •K For the Cavalry — yellow. 
 
 10. For the Infantry — light blue. 
 
 11. For fatigue purposes, a light gray blouac, doubled 
 breasted, with two rows of small button?*, seven in each 
 row ; small turn over collar — may be issued to the troops. 
 
 12. On all occasions of duty, except fatigue, and when 
 out of quarters, the coat will be buttoned and hooked at 
 the collar. Officers on bureau duty m:iy w*ar the tunic 
 open. 
 
 Buttons. 
 
 13. For General Officers and Officers of the Genera! 
 Staff — bright guilt, rounded at the edge, convex, raised 
 eagle in the centre, with stars surrounding it ; large sizc» 
 one inch in exterior diameter ; small size, half an incb. 
 
 14. For Officers of the Corps of Engineers, the same a« 
 f©r the General Staff, except that, in place of the eagle 
 and stars, there will be a raised E in German text. 
 
 15. For Officers of Artillery, Infantry, Riflemen, and 
 Cavalry — guilt, convex, plain, with] large raised letter in 
 the centre : A, for Artillery ; I, for Infantrj' ; R, for the 
 Riflemen ; C, for the Cavalry ; large size, seven- eights of 
 an inch in exterior diameter; small size half an inch. 
 
 16. Aids-de-Camp may wear the button of the General 
 Staff, or of their regiments or corps, at their.option. 
 
 17. For enlisted men of Artillery— yellow, convex, large 
 raised letter A in the centre ; three-quartcrd of an infth in 
 exteriof diameter. 
 
•18. For all otiiet" enlisted meii; the saijio as lor the Ar- 
 tillery, except that tlie numTber of the re<;iment, in large 
 rdgurcs, wiU'oe fubtsitiited for the letter A. 
 
 Troiosers, 
 
 19. The uniform trowsers for both offi(;prs and enlisted 
 men will be of cloth throughout the year ; made loose, and 
 to spread well over the foot; oflij^ht (or sk}') blue color, 
 for regimental officers and enlisted men ; and of dark blue 
 clcth for all other officers ; reinforced for the cavalry. 
 
 20. For General Offiers — two stripes of gold lace on the 
 outer seam, one-eighth of an inch apart, and each five- 
 eighths of an inch in width. 
 
 21. For Officers of the Adjutant-Generars Department,- 
 the Quartermaster-General's Department, the Commissary 
 General's Department, and the Corps of Engineers — one 
 stripe of gold lace on the outer seam, an inch and a 
 quarter in width. 
 
 22. For the Medical Department— a black telvet stripe; 
 one inch and a quarter in width, ;\ ith a gold cord on 
 each edge of the stripe. 
 
 23. For Regimental Officers— a stripe of cloth on the 
 outer seam, one inch and a quarter in width; color accord- 
 ing to corps ; for Artillery, red ; Cavalry, yellow ; Infan- 
 try, dark blue. 
 
 24. For the non-eommissioned staff of reti:iments and for 
 all sergeants, a stripe of cotton webbing or braid on the 
 outer seam, one and a quarter inch in width: color ac- 
 cording to arm of service. 
 
 23. For all othor enlisted men — plain. 
 
CMirtRM AND DRESS. 321 
 
 Chapeau, or Cocked Hat. 
 
 26. A chapeau, or cocked hat, will be worn bv General 
 officers and officers of the General Staff and Corps of En- 
 gineers, of what is called the French patern ; the model 
 to be deposited in the office of the Qaartermaster-General. 
 
 27. Forage cap for officers — a cap similar in form to 
 that known as the French kepi, according to pattern to 
 be deposited in the office of the Quartermaster-General. 
 
 28. Uniform cap— according to pattern to bo deposited 
 in the office of the Quartermaster-General, 
 
 Pompon. 
 
 29. For the Artillery— red. 
 
 30. For the Infantry— light blue. 
 
 31. For the Caralry — yellow. 
 
 Cravat or Stock. 
 
 32. For all offieers--black. When a cravat is worn, 
 the tie not to be risible at the opening of the collar. 
 
 33. For enlisted men— black leather, according to pat- 
 tern. 
 
 Boots. 
 
 34. For all officers— ankle or Jeff*erson. 
 
 35. For enlisted men of Cavalry— ankle and JeSersoDi 
 according to pattern. 
 
 36. For other enlisted men— Jefferson, according to 
 pattern. 
 
 Spurs. 
 
 37. For all mounted officeri— yellow mt tal or guilt. 
 
322 uirir«»M akd bress. 
 
 38. For enlisted mounted men— yellow metal, according 
 to pattern. 
 
 Gloves. 
 
 39. For (JenerJil Officers, and officers of the General 
 Stiff Corps— buffer white. 
 
 40. For officers of Artillery, Infantry and Caralry— 
 White. 
 
 tSush. 
 
 41. For General OfiScers — buff silk net, with silk bul< 
 lion fringe ends j sash to go twice round the waist, and to 
 tie behind the left hip ; pendent part not to extend more 
 than eighteen inches below th© tie. 
 
 42. For officers of the General Staff and Engineers, and 
 of the Artillery and Infantry --red silk net. For officers 
 of the Cavalry — yellow silk net. For medical officers — 
 green silk net. All, with silk bullion fringe ends j to go 
 around the waist, and to tie as for General Officers. 
 
 43. For sergeants — of worsted, with worsted bullion 
 fringe ends ; red for Artillery and Infantry, and yellow 
 for Cavalry. To go twice around the waist, and to tie a 
 above specified. 
 
 Sword Belt, 
 
 44. For all officers— a waist belt, not less than one aid one- 
 half inches, not more than two inches widej to be worn 
 over the sash 5 the sword to be suspended from it by slings 
 of the same material as the belt, with a hook attached to 
 the belt upon which the sword may be hung. 
 
 45. For General Officers — Russian leather, with three 
 stripes of gold embroidery ] th« slings embroidered on 
 both sides, ., .c ; 
 
UKIFORM AND DftaSj. Zl^ 
 
 46. For k\\ other officers— black leather, plain. 
 
 47. For all non-coiiiinissioned officers— black leather, 
 plain. 
 
 Sword Belt Plate. 
 
 43. For all officers and enlisted men — gilt, rectangular; 
 two inches wide, with a raised bright rim ; a silver wreath 
 of laurel encircling the "arnta of the Confederate States." 
 
 Sword and Srabfmrd. 
 
 40. For all officers — according to patterns to be depesi- 
 ted in the Ordinance Bureau. 
 
 Sword Knot. 
 
 80. For all officers— of plaited leather, with tassels. 
 Badges to distingmsh RanJc. 
 
 51. On the sleeve of the tunic, rank will be distinguidhed 
 by an ornament of gold braid, (in form as represented in 
 the drawing deposited in the Quartermaster-General's 
 office,) extending around the seam of the cufi", and up the 
 outside of the arm to the bend of the elbow. To be of one 
 braid for lieutenants j two, for captains ; three for field 
 officers; and four, for general officers. The braid to be 
 one-eighth of an in«h in width. 
 
 52. On the front part of the collar of the tunic, the rank 
 of the officer will be distinguished, as follows : 
 
 53. General Officers — A wreath with three stars en- 
 closed, embroidered in gold. The edge of the wreath to 
 be three-fourths of an inch from the front edge ot the col- 
 lar ; the stars to be arranged horizontally ; the centre «n9 
 t© be one and one-fourth inches in exterior diameter, and 
 the others tlMT^e- fourths of an inch. 
 
:324 UNIFORM AND SRISt. 
 
 54. Colonel — Three stars, embroidered in gold, arranged 
 horizontally, and dividing equally the rertical spac* of 
 the collar. Each star to be one and one-fourth inches in 
 exterior diameter ; the front star to be three-fourths of an 
 inch from the edge of the collar. 
 
 55. Lieutenant- Colonel — Two stars of same material, 
 size and arrangement, as for a colonel. 
 
 56. Ilajor — One star, of same material and size as for a 
 colonel ; to be placed three-fourths of an inch from edge 
 of collar, and dividing equally the vertical space. 
 
 57. Captain — Three horizontal bars, embroidered in 
 gold; each one- half inch in width; the upper bar to be 
 three inches in length ; the front edge of the bars to in- 
 cline to correspond with the angle of the collar, and to be 
 three-fourths of an inch from the edge ; the line of th« 
 back edges to b« vertical. 
 
 T8. First-Lieutenant — Two horizontal bars of the same 
 material and size as for captains, and dividing equally th« 
 vertical space of collar. 
 
 59. Second-Lieutenant — One horizontal bar of the same 
 material and size as for the centre bar of captain, and 
 dividing equally the vertical space of collar. 
 
 Overcoats for enlisted Men. 
 
 (50. For mounted men— of cadet gray cloth ; stand-up 
 collar ; double breasted; caepe to reach to the cuff of the 
 coat, when the arm is extended, and to button all the way 
 (sp, (buttons, eighteen.) 
 
 61. For footman— of cadet gray cloth ; stand-up collar; 
 double breasted ; cape to reach to the elbows, when the 
 arm is extended, and to button all the way up, (buttons, 
 
trMIPOBM 1V» BRISS. 32{> 
 
 eighteen.) For the present to be a talma, with sleeves, 
 of water-proof material; black. 
 
 Chevrons. 
 
 62. The rank of non-commissioned officers will t>e mark- 
 ed by chevrons on both sleeves of the uniform tunic and 
 the overcoat, above the elbow, of silk or worsted binding, 
 half an inch wide; color the same as the edging of the 
 tunic ; points down, as follows : 
 
 C3. For a Sergeant -Major — three bars and an arc in ailk. 
 
 G4. For a Qaartermasttr- Sergeant — three bars and a tie 
 in silk 
 
 65. For an Ordnance-Sergeant — three bars and a star in 
 silk. 
 
 60. For a First (or Orderly) Sergeant — three bars and 
 a lozenge in worsted. 
 
 67. For a Sergeant — three bars in worsted. 
 
 68. For a Corporal — two bars in worsted. 
 
 Hair and Beard. 
 
 69. The hair to be short: the beard to be worn at the 
 pleasure of the individual ; but, when worn, to be kept 
 short and neatly trimmed. 
 
 By Command of thb Secretary of War : 
 
 S. COOPER, 
 Adjutant and Impector-General. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 TAGS, 
 
 Introduction - ** 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 Position of the Soldier ^ 
 
 ,, . J 
 
 f acing? 
 
 The Direct Step ♦♦ "•'". * 
 
 The Quitk Step •• **' 
 
 The Doable Quick Step ^ 
 
 The Run '^ 
 
 Alignments • ^ 
 
 To March to the Front ^ 
 
 To Mark Time ^* 
 
 To Change Step • •••• ^^. 
 
 To March by the Flank • 13 
 
 Wheelings ^^ 
 
 Wheeling from a Halt, or on a Fixed Pivot 1* 
 
 Wheeling in Marching or on a Moveable Pivot 18 
 
 Turning ..•— ^^ 
 
 Manual of Arms for Heavy Infantry 20 
 
 Principles of Shoulder Arms • •• ?l> 
 
 Position of Order Arms - 23 
 
 To Ground Arms ^^ 
 
 ;inspectioA of j^rms ....^ • •••••• • ^^ 
 
II TABLB or CONTEHTS. 
 
 Loading and Firisg 38 
 
 Load in Four Times 41 
 
 Load at Will 42 
 
 The Firings 45 
 
 The Oblique Fire 46 
 
 Position of Banks in the Oblique Fire to Right 46 
 
 " " " " <' " " Left 47 
 
 To Fire bv File 47 
 
 To Fire by Flank 48 
 
 PART SECOND.~THE COMPANY. 
 
 Foi-mation of Company 64 
 
 To Open Banlca 66 
 
 Alignment in Open Ranks 67 
 
 Manual of Arms 67 
 
 To Fire by Rear Rank 69 
 
 ToAdrancein Line of Battle 70 
 
 To March in Retreat 71 
 
 Oblique March in Line of Battle 72 
 
 To March by Flank 73 
 
 To Change Direction by File 75 
 
 Movements in Column 78 
 
 Post of Officers in Column 83 
 
 To March in Column 84 
 
 To Change Direction 85 
 
 To Halt the Column, and to form to the right (or left) 
 
 into line either at a Halt or on the March 87 
 
 To Break the Company into Platoons 91 
 
 To Re-form the Company 92 
 
 Being in Column, to Break Files to the Rear, tud to 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. lU 
 
 PAGB. 
 
 cause them to Re-enter into Line 93 
 
 The Columa in Route 95 
 
 Countermarch 98 
 
 Formation of Company from Two Ranks into Single 
 
 Rank, and Reciprocally 103 
 
 Formation of a Company from Two Ranks into Four, 
 
 and Reciprocally, at a Halt and in March 103 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Manual of Arm« for Riflemen or Light Infantry 107 
 
 The Position of Order Arms 110 
 
 To Stack Arms 123 
 
 To Resume Arms 124 
 
 Formation of a Regiment in Line of Battle or in Line 124 
 
 Position of Field Officers and Regimental Staff 12fi 
 
 Posts of Field Music and Band 127 
 
 Color Guard 127 
 
 General Guides ;. 12S 
 
 PART FOURTH. 
 
 Instruction for Skirmishers 12? 
 
 Deployments 132 
 
 Bayonet Exercise 169 
 
 PosUion of the Guard 170 
 
 Develop aud Volts ". 171 
 
 Develop 172 
 
 Combinations of the Movements 174 
 
 Parries and Thrusts 176 
 
 Guard agaiust lufantrv , 170 
 
)v » table of contehtb. 
 
 ?aob; 
 
 Guard against Cavalry 180 
 
 Manual of Sword or Sabre for Officers 182 
 
 Manual for Relieving Sentinels 183 
 
 Color Salute 182 
 
 Instruction for Chief Bugler 184 
 
 General Calls 185 
 
 Callifor Skirmishers 180 
 
 PART FIFTH.-FIELD FORTIFICATION, 
 
 Nomenclature and General Principles of Field Fortifi- 
 cation 187 
 
 Manner of Throwing up a Work 193 
 
 Distribution of the Working Party 15^4 
 
 Revetmentt « 196 
 
 Obstacles 201 
 
 Inundations 205 
 
 Mines .., 207 
 
 The Outlines of Field Works 208 
 
 Powder Magazines 216 
 
 Lines 223 
 
 Lines with Intervals or Broken Lines 22G 
 
 Defence of Field Works 227 
 
 Loopholing Walls 230 
 
 Fortifying Houses 231 
 
 Intrenching a Village 235 
 
 Attack on Field Works 236 
 
 Attacking Houses 238 
 
 ** Barricades 23^5 
 
TABLE OF CONTEXTS. T 
 
 PAHT SIXTH.— OUTPOST AND PICKET DUTY. 
 
 Plus. 
 
 Instructions for Picket Dutj 240 
 
 AdTaHced Posts 24a 
 
 Out Posts 246 
 
 Sentinels , 247 
 
 Graod Guards 247 
 
 Pickets 248 
 
 Strength of the Advance Posts 249 
 
 Duties of Officer Commanding^ Out Posts 251 
 
 Advanced Guards 254 
 
 Reconnoissances 255 
 
 Duties of Reconnoitering Officer 25G 
 
 Guides 259 
 
 Reconnoissance 262 
 
 Armed Reconnoissance 202 
 
 Patrols 23.3 
 
 Duties of Officer in Command of Patrol 205 
 
 SURPRISES AND AMBUSCADES. 
 
 Surprise 268 
 
 Ambuscade 271 
 
 REGULATIONS AS TO INSPECTIONS, PARADE, Ac. 
 
 Form of Inspection 272 
 
 Forms of Parade 275 
 
 Dress Parade 275 
 
 Review 279 
 
 (ruard Mounting 283 
 
 Guides aad ^Sentinels 287 
 
VI TABLE OF C0KTBNT3. 
 
 PAOH. 
 
 Challenging 288 
 
 Grand Rounds 28& 
 
 Escort of Honor : 290 
 
 Color Escort : 291 
 
 Funeral Honors 292 
 
 AMMUNITION. 
 
 Preparation of Ammunition 294 
 
 FORMS. 
 
 Form of Furloug-h 29T 
 
 Officers* Pay Account 298 
 
 Subsistence Form 300 
 
 Requisition Form ". 301 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 The Mo'/ements of Volunteer Corps for Public Occa- 
 casions 302— 81G 
 
 UNIFORM AND DRESS OF THE ARMY. 
 
 For Comoiissioned Officers, &c 317—324 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 By neglect of the Proof-reader several mistakes have 
 occurred in numbering (he pages of the foregoing work. 
 The errors, however, are confined to the figures on the up- 
 per corners of the pages. The text is in its proper order 
 and the whole number of pages contained in the work is 
 correctly given in the concluding pages. In ether ree- 
 pects it is believed the work ii generally accurate.